Hitachi Welding System Sj300 037Hfe Users Manual Series Inverter Instruction

SJ300-037HFE to the manual c88dbdc4-787c-4d2d-b3f1-7341546bb418

2015-01-24

: Hitachi Hitachi-Welding-System-Sj300-037Hfe-Users-Manual-314307 hitachi-welding-system-sj300-037hfe-users-manual-314307 hitachi pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 289 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

HITACHI
SJ300 Series Inverter
Instruction Manual
• Three-phase Input 200V Class
• Three-phase Input 400V Class
After reading this manual,
keep it handy for future reference.
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
Manual Number: NB613XH
December 2003
UL Version Models CE Version Models
Cover
SJ300 Inverter i
Safety Messages
For the best results with the SJ300 Series inverter, carefully read this manual and all of the
warning labels attached to the inverter before installing and operating it, and follow the instruc-
tions exactly. Keep this manual handy for quick reference.
Definitions and
Symbols
A safety instruction (message) includes a hazard alert symbol and a signal word, WARNING or
CAUTION. Each signal word has the following meaning:
This symbol indicates HIGH VOLTAGE. It calls your attention to items or operations
that could be dangerous to you and other persons operation this equipment. Read the
message and follow the instructions carefully.
This symbol is the “Safety Alert Symbol.” It occurs with either of two signal words:
CAUTION or WARNING, as described below.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result
in minor to moderate injury, or serious damage to the product. The situation described
in the CAUTION may, if not avoided, lead to serious results. Important safety
measures are described in CAUTION (as well as WARNING), so be sure to observe
them.
STEP: A step is one of a series of action steps required to accomplish a goal. The
number of the step will be contained in the step symbol.
NOTE: Notes indicate an area or subject of special merit, emphasizing either the
product’s capabilities or common errors in operation or maintenance.
TIP: Tips give a special instruction that can save time or provide other benefits
while installing or using the product. The tip calls attention to an idea that may not
be obvious to first-time users of the product.
Hazardous High Voltage
HIGH VOLTAGE: Motor control equipment and electronic controllers are connected to haz-
ardous line voltages. When servicing drives and electronic controllers, there may be exposed
components with housings or protrusions at or above line potential. Extreme care should be
taken to protect against shock.
Stand on an insulating pad and make it a habit to use only one hand when checking compo-
nents. Always work with another person in case an emergency occurs. Disconnect power before
checking controllers or performing maintenance. Be sure equipment is properly grounded.
Wear safety glasses whenever working on electronic controllers or rotating machinery.
ii
General Precautions - Read These First!
WARNING: This equipment should be installed, adjusted, and serviced by qualified electrical
maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the
hazards involved. Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
WARNING: The user is responsible for ensuring that all driven machinery, drive train mecha-
nism not supplied by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd., and process line material
are capable of safe operation at an applied frequency of 150% of the maximum selected
frequency range to the AC motor. Failure to do so can result in destruction of equipment and
injury to personnel should a single-point failure occur.
WARNING: For equipment protection, install a ground leakage type breaker with a fast
response circuit capable of handling large currents. The ground fault protection circuit is not
designed to protect against personal injury.
HIGH VOLTAGE: HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. DISCONNECT INCOMING
POWER BEFORE WORKING ON THIS CONTROL.
WARNING: Wait at least five (5) minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before
performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
CAUTION: These instructions should be read and clearly understood before working on
SJ300 series equipment.
CAUTION: Proper grounds, disconnecting devices and other safety devices and their location
are the responsibility of the user and are not provided by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems
Co., Ltd.
CAUTION: Be sure to connect a motor thermal disconnect switch or overload device to the
SJ300 series controller to assure that the inverter will shut down in the event of an overload or
an overheated motor.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Dangerous voltage exists until power light is OFF. Wait at least 5 minutes
after input power is disconnected before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: This equipment has high leakage current and must be permanently (fixed) hard-
wired to earth ground via two independent cables.
WARNING: Rotating shafts and above-ground electrical potentials can be hazardous. There-
fore, it is strongly recommended that all electrical work conform to the National Electrical
Codes and local regulations. Installation, alignment and maintenance should be performed only
by qualified personnel.
Factory-recommended test procedures included in the instruction manual should be followed.
Always disconnect electrical power before working on the unit.
SJ300 Inverter iii
CAUTION:
a) Motor must be connected to protective ground via low resistive path (< 0.1Ω)
b) Any motor used must be of a suitable rating.
c) Motors may have hazardous moving parts. In this event suitable protection must be provided.
CAUTION: Alarm connection may contain hazardous live voltage even when inverter is
disconnected. When removing the front cover for maintenance or inspection, confirm that
incoming power for alarm connection is completely disconnected.
CAUTION: Hazardous (main) terminals for any interconnection (motor, contact breaker, filter,
etc.) must be inaccessible in the final installation.
CAUTION: The end application must be in accordance with BS EN60204-1. Refer to the
section “Step-by-Step Basic Installation” on page 2–6. The diagram dimensions are to be
suitably amended for your application.
CAUTION: Connection to field wiring terminals must be reliably fixed having two indepen-
dent means of mechanical support. Using a termination with cable support (figure below), or
strain relief, cable clamp, etc.
CAUTION: A three-pole disconnection device must be fitted to the incoming main power
supply close to the inverter. Additionally, a protection device meeting IEC947-1/IEC947-3
must be fitted at this point (protection device data shown in “Determining Wire and Fuse Sizes”
on page 2–14).
NOTE: The above instructions, together with any other requirements are highlighted in this
manual, and must be followed for continued LVD (European Low Voltage Directive) compli-
ance.
Terminal (ring lug) Cable support
Cable
iv
Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual
Installation—Cautions for Mounting Procedures
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on flame-resistant material such as a
steel plate. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
............... 2–6
CAUTION: Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the inverter.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
............... 2–6
CAUTION: Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in the
inverter housing, such as wire clippings, spatter from welding, metal
shavings, dust, etc. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
............... 2–6
CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a place that can bear the weight
according to the specifications in the text (Chapter 1, Specifications Tables).
Otherwise, it may fall and cause injury to personnel.
............... 2–6
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not
subject to vibration. Otherwise, it may fall and cause injury to personnel.
............... 2–6
CAUTION: Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged or
has missing parts. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
............... 2–6
CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a well-ventilated room that
does not have direct exposure to sunlight, a tendency for high temperature,
high humidity or dew condensation, high levels of dust, corrosive gas,
explosive gas, inflammable gas, grinding-fluid mist, salt air, etc. Otherwise,
there is the danger of fire.
............... 2–6
CAUTION: Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the
inverter and to provide adequate ventilation. Otherwise, the inverter may
overheat and cause equipment damage or fire.
............... 2–7
Wiring—Warnings for Electrical Practices and Wire Specifications
WARNING: “Use 60/75°C Cu wire only” or equivalent. ............. 2–13
WARNING: “Open Type Equipment.” For models SJ300–750H to SJ300–
1500H.
............. 2–13
WARNING: “A Class 2 circuit wired with Class 1 wire” or equivalent. ............. 2–13
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 240 V maximum.” For models with
suffix L.
............. 2–13
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum.” For models with
suffix H.
............. 2–13
SJ300 Inverter v
HIGH VOLTAGE: Be sure to ground the unit. Otherwise, there is a danger
of electric shock and/or fire.
............. 2–13
HIGH VOLTAGE: Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified
personnel. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.
............. 2–13
HIGH VOLTAGE: Implement wiring after checking that the power supply
is OFF. Otherwise, you may incur electric shock and/or fire.
............. 2–13
HIGH VOLTAGE: Do not connect wiring to an inverter or operate an
inverter that is not mounted according the instructions given in this manual.
Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or injury to personnel.
............. 2–13
Wiring—Cautions for Electrical Practices
CAUTION: Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifica-
tions: • Three phase 200 to 240V 50/60Hz • Three phase 380 to 480V 50/
60Hz
............. 2–19
CAUTION: Be sure not to power a three-phase-only inverter with single
phase power. Otherwise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter
and the danger of fire.
............. 2–19
CAUTION: Be sure not to connect an AC power supply to the output termi-
nals. Otherwise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the
danger of injury and/or fire.
............. 2–19
Power Input Power Output
RST
T1 T2 T3
UVW
L1 L3
NOTE:
L1, L2, L3: Three-phase 200 to 240V 50/60 Hz
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50/60 Hz
L2
vi
CAUTION: Fasten the screws with the specified fastening torque in the
table below. Check for any loosening of screws. Otherwise, there is the
danger of fire.
............. 2–16
CAUTION: Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the main
power supply: Adjustable frequency inverters with CE-filters (RFI-filter)
and shielded (screened) motor cables have a higher leakage current toward
Earth GND. Especially at the moment of switching ON this can cause an
inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupter breakers. Because of the rectifier
on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall the switch-off
function through small amounts of DC current. Please observe the follow-
ing: • Use only short time-invariant and pulse current-sensitive ground fault
interrupter breakers with higher trigger current. • Other components should
be secured with separate ground fault interrupter breakers. • Ground fault
interrupter breakers in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an
absolute protection against electric shock.
............. 2–19
CAUTION: Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the main power supply
to the inverter. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
............. 2–19
CAUTION: For motor leads, ground fault interrupter breakers and electro-
magnetic contactors, be sure to size these components properly (each must
have the capacity for rated current and voltage). Otherwise, there is the
danger of fire.
............. 2–19
CAUTION: Failure to remove all vent opening covers before electrical
operation may result in damage to the inverter.
............. 2–20
Powerup Test Caution Messages
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not
to touch them. Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
............. 2–21
CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low
speed to high speed. Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the
motor and machine before operating the inverter. Otherwise, there is the
danger of injury.
............. 2–21
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter
standard default setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and
machine specifications with the respective manufacturer. Only operate the
motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval. Otherwise, there
is the danger of equipment damage and/or injury to personnel.
............. 2–22
CAUTION: Check the following before and during the powerup test. Other-
wise, there is the danger of equipment damage. • Is the shorting bar between
the [P] and [PD] terminals installed? DO NOT power or operate the inverter
if the jumper is removed. • Is the direction of the motor rotation correct? •
Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration? • Were the rpm and
frequency meter readings as expected? • Were there any abnormal motor
vibrations or noise?
............. 2–22
SJ300 Inverter vii
Warnings for Operations and Monitoring
WARNING: Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing
the front case. While the inverter is energized, be sure not to open the front
case. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
............... 4–3
WARNING: Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands.
Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
............... 4–3
WARNING: While the inverter is energized, be sure not to touch the
inverter terminals even when the motor is stopped. Otherwise, there is the
danger of electric shock.
............... 4–3
WARNING: If the Retry Mode is selected, the motor may suddenly restart
after a trip stop. Be sure to stop the inverter before approaching the machine
(be sure to design the machine so that safety for personnel is secure even if
it restarts.) Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
............... 4–3
WARNING: If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time, the
inverter may restart operation after the power supply recovers if the Run
command is active. If a restart may pose danger to personnel, so be sure to
use a lock-out circuit so that it will not restart after power recovery. Other-
wise, it may cause injury to personnel.
............... 4–3
WARNING: The Stop Key is effective only when the Stop function is
enabled. Be sure to enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency
stop. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
............... 4–3
WARNING: During a trip event, if the alarm reset is applied and the Run
command is present, the inverter will automatically restart. Be sure to apply
the alarm reset only after verifying the Run command is OFF. Otherwise, it
may cause injury to personnel.
............... 4–3
WARNING: Be sure not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to
put any conductive object into it. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric
shock and/or fire.
............... 4–3
WARNING: If power is turned ON when the Run command is already
active, the motor will automatically start and injury may result. Before
turning ON the power, confirm that the RUN command is not present.
............... 4–3
WARNING: When the Stop key function is disabled, pressing the Stop key
does not stop the inverter, nor will it reset a trip alarm.
............... 4–3
WARNING: Be sure to provide a separate, hard-wired emergency stop
switch when the application warrants it.
............... 4–3
WARNING: If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already
active, the motor starts rotation and is dangerous! Before turning power ON,
confirm that the external Run command is not active.
............. 4–12
WARNING: After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset occurs,
the motor will restart suddenly if the Run command is already active. Be
sure to set the alarm reset after verifying that the Run command is OFF to
prevent injury to personnel.
............. 4–27
WARNING: You may need to disconnect the load from the motor before
performing auto-tuning. The inverter runs the motor forward and backward
for several seconds without regard to load movement limits.
............. 4–67
viii
Cautions for Operations and Monitoring
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not
to touch them. Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
............... 4–2
CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low
speed to high speed. Be sure check the capability and limitations of the
motor and machine before operating the inverter. Otherwise, it may cause
injury to personnel.
............... 4–2
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter
standard default setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and
machine specifications with the respective manufacturer. Only operate the
motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval. Otherwise, there
is the danger of equipment damage.
............... 4–2
CAUTION: It is possible to damage the inverter or other devices if your
application exceeds the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a
connection point.
............... 4–7
CAUTION: Be careful not to turn PID Clear ON and reset the integrator
sum when the inverter is in Run Mode (output to motor is ON). Otherwise,
this could cause the motor to decelerate rapidly, resulting in a trip.
............. 4–30
CAUTION: When the motor runs at lower speeds, the cooling effect of the
motor’s internal fan decreases.
............. 4–55
CAUTION: If the inverter capacity is more than twice the capacity of the
motor in use, the inverter may not achieve its full performance specifica-
tions.
............. 4–70
CAUTION: You must use a carrier frequency of more than 2.1kHz. The
inverter cannot operate in vector control mode at less than 2.1 kHz carrier
frequency.
............. 4–70
Warnings and Cautions for Troubleshooting and Maintenance
WARNING: Wait at least five (5) minutes after turning OFF the input power
supply before performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is
the danger of electric shock.
............... 6–2
WARNING: Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform mainte-
nance, inspection, and part replacement. Before starting to work, remove
any metallic objects from your person (wristwatch, bracelet, etc.). Be sure
to use tools with insulated handles. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric
shock and/or injury to personnel.
............... 6–2
WARNING: Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads (wires
for cooling fan and logic P.C. board). Otherwise, there is danger of fire due
to wire breakage and/or injury to personnel.
............... 6–2
CAUTION: Do not connect the megger to any control circuit terminals such
as intelligent I/O, analog terminals, etc. Doing so could cause damage to the
inverter.
............. 6–11
CAUTION: Never test the withstand voltage (HIPOT) on the inverter. The
inverter has a surge protector between the main circuit terminals above and
the chassis ground.
............. 6–11
SJ300 Inverter ix
General Warnings and Cautions
WARNING: Never modify the unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or
injury.
CAUTION: Withstand voltage tests and insulation resistance tests (HIPOT) are executed
before the units are shipped, so there is no need to conduct these tests before operation.
CAUTION: Do not attach or remove wiring or connectors when power is applied. Also, do not
check signals during operation.
CAUTION: Do not stop operation by switching OFF electromagnetic contactors on the
primary or secondary sides of the inverter.
When there has been a sudden power failure while a Run command is active, then the unit may
restart operation automatically after the power failure has ended. If there is a possibility that
such an occurrence may harm humans, then install an electromagnetic contactor on the power
supply side, so that the circuit does not allow automatic restarting after the power supply recov-
ers. If an optional remote operator is used and the retry function has been selected, this will also
allow automatic restarting when a Run command is active. So, please be careful.
WARNING: The screws that retain the capacitor bank assembly are part of
the electrical circuit of the high-voltage internal DC bus. Be sure that all
power has been disconnected from the inverter, and that you have waited at
least 5 minutes before accessing the terminals or screws. Be sure the charge
lamp is extinguished. Otherwise, there is the danger of electrocution to
personnel.
............. 6–13
CAUTION: Do not operate the inverter unless you have replaced the two
screws that connect the capacitor bank assembly to the internal DC bus.
Otherwise, damage to the inverter may occur.
............. 6–13
CAUTION: Remove the fan assembly carefully, since it is attached to the
unit via connecting wires.
............. 6–14
HIGH VOLTAGE: Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals
when working with the inverters and taking measurements. Be sure to place
the measurement circuitry above in an insulated housing before using them.
............. 6–16
Power
Input Inverter
R, S, T
Ground fault
interrupter
U, V, W Motor
FW
MCCB GFI
L1, L2, L3
x
CAUTION: Do not insert leading power factor capacitors or surge absorbers between the
output terminals of the inverter and motor.
CAUTION: Be sure to connect the grounding terminal to earth ground.
CAUTION: When inspecting the unit, be sure to wait five minutes after tuning OFF the power
supply before opening the cover.
CAUTION: SUPPRESSION FOR NOISE INTERFERENCE FROM INVERTER
The inverter uses many semiconductor switching elements such as transistors and IGBTs.
Thus, a radio receiver or measuring instrument located near the inverter is susceptible to noise
interference.
To protect the instruments from erroneous operation due to noise interference, they should be
used well away from the inverter. It is also effective to shield the whole inverter structure.
The addition of an EMI filter on the input side of the inverter also reduces the effect of noise
from the commercial power line on external devices.
Note that the external dispersion of noise from the power line can be minimized by connecting
an EMI filter on the primary side of inverter.
Power
Input
Inverter
R, S, T
Ground fault
interrupter
U, V, W Motor
GND lug
Surge absorber
Leading power
factor capacitor
GFI
L1, L2, L3
Power
source
R1
EMI filter
S1
T1
R2
S2
T2
R
S
T
U
V
W
Motor
Inverter
Inverter
Remote
operator
EMI filter
noise
Motor
Conduit or shielded cable—
to be grounded
Grounded frame
Completely ground the enclosed
panel, metal screen, etc. with as
short a wire as possible.
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
SJ300 Inverter xi
CAUTION: MOTOR TERMINAL VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION FILTER
(For 400 V CLASS Inverters)
In a system using an inverter with the voltage control PWM system, a voltage surge caused by
the cable constants such as the cable length (especially when the distance between the motor
and inverter is 10 m or more) and cabling method may occur at the motor terminals. A
dedicated filter of the 400 V class for suppressing this voltage surge is available. Be sure to
install a filter in this situation. (See “LCR filter” on page 5–2, part type HRL–xxxC.)
CAUTION: EFFECTS OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ON INVERTERS
In the cases below involving a general-purpose inverter, a large peak current can flow on the
power supply side, sometimes destroying the converter module:
1. The unbalance factor of the power supply is 3% or higher.
2. The power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity (or the
power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more).
3. Abrupt power supply changes are expected, due to conditions such as:
a. Several inverters are interconnected with a short bus.
b. A thyristor converter and an inverter are interconnected with a short bus.
c. An installed phase advance capacitor opens and closes.
Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable, you
MUST install an input-side AC reactor of 3% (at a voltage drop at rated current) with respect to
the supply voltage on the power supply side. Also, where the effects of an indirect lightning
strike are possible, install a lightning conductor.
CAUTION: Do not install inverters in a corner-grounded Delta distribution system. The result-
ing line imbalance will cause premature line fuse failure and failure of the inverter input bridge
rectifier. Install in a balanced Delta or Wye distribution system only.
CAUTION: When the EEPROM error E8 occurs, be sure to confirm the setting values again.
CAUTION: When using normally closed active state settings (C011 to C019) for externally
commanded Forward or Reverse terminals [FW] or [RV], the inverter may start automatically
when the external system is powered OFF or disconnected from the inverter! So, do not use
normally closed active state settings for Forward or Reverse terminals [FW] or [RV] unless
your system design protects against unintended motor operation.
General Caution
CAUTION: In all the illustrations in this manual, covers and safety devices are occasionally
removed to describe the details. While operating the product, make sure that the covers and
safety devices are placed as they were specified originally and operate it according to the
instruction manual.
xii
UL® Cautions, Warnings, and Instructions
Wiring Warnings
for Electrical
Practices and
Wire Sizes
The Cautions, Warnings, and instructions in this section summarize the procedures necessary to
ensure an inverter installation complies with Underwriters Laboratories® guidelines.
WARNING: “Use 60/75°C Cu wire only” or equivalent.
WARNING: “Open Type Equipment.” For models SJ300–750H to SJ300–1500H.
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 240 V maximum.” For models with suffix L.
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum.” For models with suffix H.
Terminal Tighten-
ing Torque and
Wire Size
The wire size range and tightening torque for field wiring terminals are presented in the table
below.
TIP: AWG = American Wire Gauge. Smaller numbers represent increasing wire thickness.
kcmil = 1,000 circular mils, a measure of wire cross-sectional area
mm2 = square millimeters, a measure of wire cross-sectional area
Input
Voltage
Motor
Output 200V
Inverter Model Wire Size Range (AWG)
Torq ue
HP kW ft-lbs (N-m)
200V
1/2 0.4 SJ300-004LFU 20 1.1 1.5
1 0.75 SJ300-007LFU 18 1.1 1.5
2 1.5 SJ300-015LFU 14 1.1 1.5
3 2.2 SJ300-022LFU 14 1.1 1.5
5 3.7 SJ300-037LFU 10 1.1 1.5
7.5 5.5 SJ300-055LFU 8 1.8 2.5
10 7.5 SJ300-075LFU 6 1.8 2.5
15 11 SJ300-110LFU 4 3.6 4.9
20 15 SJ300-150LFU 2 3.6 4.9
25 18.5 SJ300-185LFU 4 || 4 AWG 3.6 4.9
30 22 SJ300-220LFU 4 || 4 AWG 6.5 8.8
40 30 SJ300-300LFU 2 || 2 AWG 6.5 8.8
50 37 SJ300-370LFU 2 || 2 AWG 6.5 8.8
60 45 SJ300-450LFU 1 || 1 AWG (75°C) 10.1 13.7
75 55 SJ300-550LFU 2/0 || 2/0 AWG 10.1 13.7
SJ300 Inverter xiii
Input
Vol tage
Motor
Output 400V
Inverter Model Wire Size Range (AWG)
Torque
HP kW ft-lbs (N-m)
400V
1 0.75 SJ300-007HFU/E 20 1.1 1.5
2 1.5 SJ300-015HFU/E 18 1.1 1.5
3 2.2 SJ300-022HFU/E 16 1.1 1.5
5 4.0 SJ300-040HFU/E 14 1.1 1.5
7.5 5.5 SJ300-055HFU/E 12 1.8 2.5
10 7.5 SJ300-075HFU/E 10 1.8 2.5
15 11 SJ300-110HFU/E 8 3.6 4.9
20 15 SJ300-150HFU/E 6 3.6 4.9
25 18.5 SJ300-185HFU/E 6 3.6 4.9
30 22 SJ300-220HFU/E 4 3.6 4.9
40 30 SJ300-300HFU/E 3 3.6 4.9
50 37 SJ300-370HFU/E 4 || 4 AWG 3.6 4.9
60 45 SJ300-450HFU/E 1 (75°C) 6.5 8.8
75 55 SJ300-550HFU/E 2 || 2 AWG 6.5 8.8
100 75 SJ300-750HFU/E 1 || 1 AWG (75°C) 6.5 8.8
125 90 SJ300-900HFU/E 1 || 1 AWG (75°C) 10.1 13.7
150 110 SJ300-110HFU/E 1/0 || 1/0 AWG 10.1 13.7
175 132 SJ300-1320HFE 3/0 || 3/0 10.1 13.7
200 150 SJ300-1500HFU 3/0 || 3/0 10.1 13.7
xiv
Circuit Breaker
and Fuse Sizes
The inverter’s connections to input power must include UL Listed inverse time circuit breakers
with 600V rating, or UL Listed fuses as shown in the table below.
Wire Connectors
WARNING: Field wiring connections must
be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified
ring lug terminal connector sized for the
wire gauge being used. The connector must
be fixed using the crimping tool specified by
the connector manufacturer.
Motor Overload
Protection
Hitachi SJ300 inverters provide solid state motor overload protection, which depends on the
proper setting of the following parameters:
• B012 “electronic overload protection”
• B212 “electronic overload protection, 2nd motor”
• B312 “electronic overload protection, 3rd motor”
Set the rated current [Amperes] of the motor(s) with the above parameters. The setting range is
0.2 * rated current to 1.2 * rated current.
WARNING: When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be protected
by the electronic overload protection. Install an external thermal relay on each motor.
Input
Vol ta ge
Motor
Output 200V
Inverter Model
Circuit
Breaker
(A)
Fuse
(A)
Input
Vol tage
Motor
Output 400V
Inverter Model
Circuit
Breaker
(A)
Fuse
(A)
HP kW HP kW
200V
1/2 0.4 SJ300-004LFU 10 10
400V
1 0.75 SJ300-007HFU/E 10 10
1 0.75 SJ300-007LFU 10 10 2 1.5 SJ300-015HFU/E 10 10
2 1.5 SJ300-015LFU 10 10 3 2.2 SJ300-022HFU/E 10 10
3 2.2 SJ300-022LFU 15 15 5 4.0 SJ300-040HFU/E 15 15
5 3.7 SJ300-037LFU 20 20 7.5 5.5 SJ300-055HFU/E 15 15
7.5 5.5 SJ300-055LFU 30 30 10 7.5 SJ300-075HFU/E 20 20
10 7.5 SJ300-075LFU 40 40 15 11 SJ300-110HFU/E 30 30
15 11 SJ300-110LFU 60 60 20 15 SJ300-150HFU/E 40 40
20 15 SJ300-150LFU 80 80 25 18.5 SJ300-185HFU/E 50 50
25 18.5 SJ300-185LFU 100 100 30 22 SJ300-220HFU/E 60 60
30 22 SJ300-220LFU 125 125 40 30 SJ300-300HFU/E 70 70
40 30 SJ300-300LFU 150 150 50 37 SJ300-370HFU/E 90 90
50 37 SJ300-370LFU 175 175 60 45 SJ300-450HFU/E 125 125
60 45 SJ300-450LFU 225 225 75 55 SJ300-550HFU/E 125 125
75 55 SJ300-550LFU 250 250 100 75 SJ300-750HFU/E — 175
125 90 SJ300-900HFU/E — 200
150 110 SJ300-110HFU/E — 250
175 132 SJ300-1320HFE — 300
200 150 SJ300-1500HFU — 300
Terminal (ring lug) Cable support
Cable
xv
SJ300 Inverter
Safety Messages
Hazardous High Voltage i
General Precautions - Read These First! ii
Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual iv
General Warnings and Cautions ix
UL® Cautions, Warnings, and Instructions xii
Table of Contents
Revisions xvii
Contact Information xviii
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Introduction 1–2
SJ300 Inverter Specifications 1–6
Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives 1–13
Frequently Asked Questions 1–17
Chapter 2: Inverter Mounting and Installation
Orientation to Inverter Features 2–2
Basic System Description 2–5
Step-by-Step Basic Installation 2–6
Powerup Test 2–21
Using the Front Panel Keypad 2–23
Chapter 3: Configuring Drive Parameters
Choosing a Programming Device 3–2
Using Keypad Devices 3–3
“D” Group: Monitoring Functions 3–6
“F” Group: Main Profile Parameters 3–8
“A” Group: Standard Functions 3–9
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions 3–29
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions 3–47
“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions 3–62
“P” Group: Expansion Card Functions 3–65
“U” Group: User-selectable Menu Functions 3–67
Programming Error Codes 3–68
Chapter 4: Operations and Monitoring
Introduction 4–2
Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss 4–4
Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices 4–7
Using Intelligent Input Terminals 4–11
Using Intelligent Output Terminals 4–42
Analog Input Operation 4–59
Analog Output Operation 4–62
Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control 4–65
PID Loop Operation 4–71
Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors 4–72
Table of Contents
xvi
Chapter 5: Inverter System Accessories
Introduction 5–2
Component Descriptions 5–3
Dynamic Braking 5–6
Chapter 6: Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Troubleshooting 6–2
Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions 6–5
Restoring Factory Default Settings 6–9
Maintenance and Inspection 6–10
Warranty 6–18
Appendix A: Glossary and Bibliography
Glossary A–2
Bibliography A–6
Appendix B: Serial Communications
Introduction B–2
Communications Protocol B–5
Communications Reference Information B–17
Appendix C: Drive Parameter Settings Tables
Introduction C–2
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry C–2
Appendix D: CE–EMC Installation Guidelines
CE–EMC Installation Guidelines D–2
Hitachi EMC Recommendations D–4
Index
SJ300 Inverter xvii
Revisions
Revision History Table
No. Revision Comments Date of Issue Operation
Manual No.
Initial release of manual NB613X March 2001 NB613X
1 Add three higher-horsepower models:
Model # convention update, page 1–5
Specs table, pages 1–6 to 1–10
Derating curves, pages 1–11 to 1–12
Dimension drawings, page 2–12
Update wire and fuse size table, pages 2–14, 2–15
Update terminal dimensions table, pages 2–16, 2–17
Update braking tables, pages 5–8, 5–12
Add function P044 to P049, page 3–66, pages C–15, C–16
Add programming error codes, pages 3–67, 3–68
Update keypad navigation map, pages 2–25, 3–4
Add Appendix D: CE-EMC Installation Guidelines
Moved Hitachi EMC Recommendations from page iv to D–4
Contents, Revisions, Index updates
Front cover update
August 2001 NB613XA
2 Added default terminal symbols to tables on 3–47, 3–53
Updated intelligent I/O wiring examples throughout Chapter 4 to
use default terminals or otherwise least-used terminals
Corrected alarm relay symbols in multiple pages in Chapter 4
Contents, Revisions, Index updates
Front cover update
December 2001 NB613XB
3 Updated company name on cover, contact page, and
nameplate photo
Corrected graphs on pages 3–29 and 3–43
Made a few minor edits throughout
May 2002 NB613XC
4 Corrected [FM] common terminal to [L] in Chapter 4 Analog
Input section
Updated wire and fuse sizes for larger horsepower models in
Safety section tables and Chapter 2 tables
Enhanced Chapter 5 text and diagrams for dynamic braking
Contents, Revisions, Index, Cover updates
August 2002 NB613XD
5 Enhanced sink/source input descriptions in Chapter 4
Added jumper descriptions throughout Chapter 4
Updated keypad navigation map in Chapters 2 and 3
Contents, Revisions, Index, Cover updates
March 2003 NB613XE
6 Corrected table heading on page 5–7 (external resistor topic)
Revisions, Cover updates
March 2003 NB613XF
7 Minor miscellaneous edits
Revisions, Cover updates
July 2003 NB613XG
8 Minor miscellaneous edits
Revisions, Cover updates
December 2003 NB613XH
xviii
Contact Information
NOTE: To receive technical support for the Hitachi inverter you purchased, contact the Hitachi
inverter dealer from whom you purchased the unit, or the sales office or factory contact listed
above. Please be prepared to provide the following inverter nameplate information:
1. Model
2. Date of purchase
3. Manufacturing number (MFG No.)
4. Symptoms of any inverter problem
If any inverter nameplate information is illegible, please provide your Hitachi contact with any
other legible nameplate items. To reduce unpredictable downtime, we recommend that you
stock a spare inverter.
Hitachi America, Ltd.
Power and Industrial Division
50 Prospect Avenue
Tarrytown, NY 10591
U.S.A.
Phone: +1-914-631-0600
Fax: +1-914-631-3672
Hitachi Australia Ltd.
Level 3, 82 Waterloo Road
North Ryde, N.S.W. 2113
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-4100
Fax: +61-2-9888-4188
Hitachi Europe GmbH
Am Seestern 18
D-40547 Düsseldorf
Germany
Phone: +49-211-5283-0
Fax: +49-211-5283-649
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co, Ltd.
International Sales Department
WBG MARIVE WEST 16F
6, Nakase 2-chome
Mihama-ku, Chiba-shi,
Chiba 261-7116 Japan
Phone: +81-43-390-3516
Fax: +81-43-390-3810
Hitachi Asia Ltd.
16 Collyer Quay
#20-00 Hitachi Tower, Singapore 049318
Singapore
Phone: +65-538-6511
Fax: +65-538-9011
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co, Ltd.
Narashino Division
1-1, Higashi-Narashino 7-chome
Narashino-shi, Chiba 275-8611
Japan
Phone: +81-47-474-9921
Fax: +81-47-476-9517
Hitachi Asia (Hong Kong) Ltd.
7th Floor, North Tower
World Finance Centre, Harbour City
Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon
Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2735-9218
Fax: +852-2735-6793
Getting Started
In This Chapter.... page
— Introduction ....................................................................................... 2
— SJ300 Inverter Specifications ........................................................... 6
— Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives...................................... 13
— Frequently Asked Questions........................................................... 17
1
Introduction
Geting Started
1–2
Introduction
Main Features Congratulations on your purchase of an SJ300
Series Hitachi inverter! This inverter drive features
state-of-the-art circuitry and components to provide
high performance. The housing footprint is excep-
tionally small, given the size of the corresponding
motor. The Hitachi SJ300 product line includes
more than twenty inverter models to cover motor
sizes from 1/2 horsepower to 200 horsepower, in
either 230 VAC or 480 VAC power input versions.
The main features are:
• 200V Class and 400V Class inverters
• UL or CE version available
• Sensorless vector control
• Regenerative braking circuit
• Different operator keypads available for RUN/
STOP control and setting parameters
• Built-in RS-422 communications interface to
allow configuration from a PC and for field bus
external modules
• Sixteen programmable speed levels
• Motor constants are programmable, or may be set
via auto-tuning
• PID control adjusts motor speed automatically to
maintain a process variable value
The design of Hitachi inverters overcomes many of
the traditional trade-offs between speed, torque and
efficiency. The performance characteristics are:
• High starting torque of 150% rating or greater
• Continuous operation at 100% rated torque
within a 1:10 speed range (6/60 Hz / 5/50 Hz)
without motor derating
• Models from 0.4–11kW (1/2 to 15hp) have built-
in dynamic braking units
• Cooling fan has ON/OFF selection to provide
longer life
A full line of accessories from Hitachi is avail-
able to complete your motor control application.
These include:
• Digital remote operator keypad
• Expansion card for sensor feedback
• Braking resistors
• Radio noise filters
• CE compliance filters
• Additional factory I/O network interface cards
(to be announced)
Model SJ300-037HFU (UL version)
Model SJ300-037HFE (CE version)
Expansion Card - Encoder Input
SJ300 Inverter
Getting Started
1–3
Digital Operator
Interface
Components
The SJ300 Series inverters have a detachable keypad (called a digital operator) on the front
panel of the housing. The particular keypad that comes with the inverter depends on the
country or continent corresponding to the particular model number. The standard digital opera-
tors occupy just part of the keypad recess in the panel. Therefore, the inverter comes with a
snap-in panel filler plate that mounts below the keypad as shown.
These detachable keypads can be mounted in a NEMA cabinet panel door cut-out, for example.
Threaded metal inserts on the rear of the keypads facilitate this external mounting configura-
tion. A short cable then connects the keypad unit to the connector in the inverter keypad recess.
See Chapter 3 for information on how to install and use these keypads and cables.
The digital operator / copy unit is optional, and
occupies the entire keypad recess when mounted. It
has the additional capability of reading (uploading)
the parameter settings in the inverter into its memory.
Then you can install the copy unit on another inverter
and write (download) the parameter settings into that
inverter. OEMs will find this unit particularly useful,
as one can use a single copy unit to transfer parame-
ter settings from one inverter to many.
Other digital operator interfaces may be available
from your Hitachi distributor for particular industries
or international markets. Contact your Hitachi
distributor for further details.
Digital Operator OPE-SRE
standard for -LFU and -HFU models
Digital Operator OPE-S
standard for -HFE models
Optional Digital Operator / Copy Unit
SRW-0EX
Introduction
Geting Started
1–4
Removable
Components
The SJ300 Series inverters are designed for long life and ease of service. Several components
are removable as shown below, aiding installation or parts replacement. Details on how and
when to remove these parts are in the referenced chapters.
Fan Unit
(See Chapter 6 for servicing)
Control Signal Terminal Block
(See Chapter 4 for wiring)
Cable entry/exit plate
(See Chapter 2 for instructions)
Capacitor Bank for DC Link
(See Chapter 6 for servicing)
Digital Operator and Panel Filler Plate
(See Chapter 3 for instructions)
Auxiliary fan (on some models)
SJ300 Inverter
Getting Started
1–5
Specifications
Label and Agency
Approvals
The Hitachi SJ300 inverters have product specifi-
cations labels located on the front and the right
side of the housing, as pictured to the right. Be
sure to verify that the specifications on the labels
match your power source, motor, and application
safety requirements.
Model Number
Convention
The model number for a specific inverter contains useful information about its operating
characteristics. Refer to the model number legend below:
Product Labels
Power Input Rating:
frequency, voltage, phase, current
Inverter model number
Motor capacity for this model
Output Rating:
frequency, voltage, current
Manufacturing codes:
lot number, date, etc.
Specifications
Regulatory agency approvals
SJ300 004 H F U 2
Version number (_, 2, 3, ...)
Restricted distribution:
E=Europe, U=USA
Input voltage:
H = three-phase 400V class
L = three phase only, 200V class
Applicable motor capacity in kW
004 = 0.4 kW
007 = 0.75 kW
015 = 1.5 kW
022 = 2.2 kW
037 = 3.7 kW
040 = 4.0 kW
055 = 5.5 kW
075 = 7.5 kW
110 = 11 kW
150 = 15 kW
185 = 18.5 kW
220 = 22 kW
300 = 30 kW
370 = 37 kW
Configuration type
F = with digital operator (keypad)
Series
name
450 = 45 kW
550 = 55 kW
750 = 75 kW
900 = 90 kW
1100 = 110 kW
1320 = 132 kW
1500 = 150 kW
SJ300 Inverter Specifications
Geting Started
1–6
SJ300 Inverter Specifications
Tables for 200V
class inverters
Note that “General Specifications” on page 1–9 covers all SJ300 inverters, followed by
footnotes for all specifications tables. The 200V models in the upper table below (1/2 to 15 hp)
include internal dynamic braking units (see “Dynamic Braking” on page 5–6).
Item 200V Class Specifications
SJ300 inverters, 200V models, UL version 004LFU 007LFU 015LFU 022LFU 037LFU 055LFU 075LFU 110LFU
Applicable motor size, 4-pole *2 HP 1/2 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15
kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11
Rated capacity (200/240V) kVA 1.0 / 1.2 1.7 / 2.0 2.5 / 3.1 3.6 / 4.3 5.7 / 6.8 8.3 / 9.9 11 / 13.3 15.9/
19.1
Rated input voltage 3-phase: 200 to 240V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated input current (A) 3.8 5.5 8.3 12 18 26 35 51
Rated output voltage *3 3-phase (3-wire) 200 to 240V (corresponding to input voltage)
Rated output current (A) 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.5 16.5 24 32 46
Efficiency at 100% rated output, % 85.1 89.5 92.3 93.2 94.0 94.4 94.6 94.8
Watt loss,
approximate (W)
at 70% output 64 76 102 127 179 242 312 435
at 100% output 70 88 125 160 235 325 425 600
Starting torque *6 200% at 0.5 Hz (SLV), 150% at around 0 Hz (SLV, 0 Hz domain,
with motor one frame size down), 100% at 0 Hz (with feedback board)
Dynamic braking
approx. % torque,
short time stop *7
internal res. only 50% 20% 10%
with external res. 200% 160% 100% 80% 70%
DC braking Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force
Weight kg / lb 3.5 / 7.7 3.5 / 7.7 3.5 / 7.7 3.5 / 7.7 3.5 / 7.7 3.5 / 7.7 5 / 11 5 / 11
Item 200V Class Specifications, continued
SJ300 inverters, 200V models, UL version 150LFU 185LFU 220LFU 300LFU 370LFU 450LFU 550LFU
Applicable motor size *2 HP 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
kW 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Rated capacity (200/240V) kVA 22.1 / 26.6 26.3 / 31.5 32.9 / 39.4 41.9 / 50.2 50.2/60.2 63 / 75.6 76.2/91.4
Rated input voltage 3-phase: 200 to 240V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated input current (A) 70 84 105 133 160 200 242
Rated output voltage *3 3-phase (3-wire) 200 to 240V (corresponding to input voltage)
Rated output current (A) 64 76 95 121 145 182 220
Efficiency at 100% rated output, % 94.9 95.0 95.0 95.1 95.1 95.1 95.1
Watt loss,
approximate (W)
at 70% output 575 698 820 1100 1345 1625 1975
at 100% output 800 975 1150 1550 1900 2300 2800
Starting torque *6 200% at 0.5 Hz (SLV), 150% at around 0 Hz (SLV, 0 Hz domain,
with motor one frame size down), 100% at 0 Hz (with feedback board)
Dynamic braking
approx. % torque,
short time stop *7
w/o braking unit 10%
with braking unit 30–200% 25–170% 25–150% 55–110% 45–90% 35–75% 30–60%
DC braking Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force
Weight kg / lb 12 / 26.4 12 / 26.4 12 / 26.4 20 / 44 30 / 66 30 / 66 50 / 110
SJ300 Inverter
Getting Started
1–7
Tables for 400V
class inverters
Note that “General Specifications” on page 1–9 covers all SJ300 inverters, followed by
footnotes for all specifications tables. The 400V models in the upper table below (1 to 15 hp)
include internal dynamic braking units (see “Dynamic Braking” on page 5–6).
Item 400V Class Specifications
SJ300 inverters,
400V models
UL version 007HFU 015HFU 022HFU 040HFU 055HFU 075HFU 110HFU
CE version 007HFE 015HFE 022HFE 040HFE 055HFE 075HFE 110HFE
Applicable motor size *2 HP12357.51015
kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11
Rated capacity (400 / 480V) kVA 1.7 / 2.0 2.6 / 3.1 3.6 / 4.4 5.9 / 7.1 8.3 / 9.9 11 / 13.3 15.9/19.1
Rated input voltage 3-phase (3-wire) 380 to 480V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated input current (A) 2.8 4.2 5.8 9.5 13 18 25
Rated output voltage *3 3-phase (3-wire): 380 to 480V (corresponding to input voltage)
Rated output current (A) 2.5 3.8 5.3 8.6 12 16 23
Efficiency at 100% rated output, % 89.5 92.3 93.2 94.0 94.4 94.6 94.8
Watt loss,
approximate (W)
at 70% output 76 102 127 179 242 312 435
at 100% output 88 125 160 235 325 425 600
Starting torque *6 200% at 0.5 Hz (SLV), 150% at around 0 Hz (SLV, 0 Hz domain,
with motor one frame size down), 100% at 0 Hz (with feedback board)
Dynamic braking
approx. % torque,
short time stop *7
internal res. only 50% 20% 10%
with external res. 200% 140% 100% 70%
DC braking Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force
Weight kg / lb 3.5 / 7.7 3.5 / 7.7 3.5 / 7.7 3.5 / 7.7 3.5 / 7.7 55 / 121 55 / 121
Item 400V Class Specifications
SJ300 inverters,
400V models
UL version 150HFU 185HFU 220HFU 300HFU 370HFU 450HFU 550HFU
CE version 150HFE 185HFE 220HFE 300HFE 370HFE 450HFE 550HFE
Applicable motor size *2 HP 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
kW1518.52230374555
Rated capacity (400 / 480V) kVA 22.1 / 26.6 26.3 / 31.5 33.2 / 39.9 40.1 / 48.2 51.9 / 62.3 62.3 / 74.8 76.2/91.4
Rated input voltage 3-phase (3-wire) 380 to 480V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated input current (A) 35 42 53 64 83 99 121
Rated output voltage *3 3-phase (3-wire): 380 to 480V (corresponding to input voltage)
Rated output current (A) 323848587590110
Efficiency at 100% rated output, % 94.9 95.0 95.0 95.1 95.1 95.1 95.1
Watt loss,
approximate (W)
at 70% output 575 698 820 1100 1345 1625 1975
at 100% output 800 975 1150 1550 1900 2300 2800
Starting torque *6 200% at 0.5 Hz (SLV), 150% at around 0 Hz (SLV, 0 Hz domain,
with motor one frame size down), 100% at 0 Hz (with feedback board)
Dynamic braking
approx. % torque,
short time stop *7
w/o braking unit 10%
with braking unit 40–200% 40–200% 35–200% 110–170% 90–150% 70–120% 60–100%
DC braking Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force
Weight kg / lb 12 / 26.4 12 / 26.4 12 / 26.4 20 / 44 30 / 66 30 / 66 50 / 110
SJ300 Inverter Specifications
Geting Started
1–8
Tables for 400V class inverters, continued...
Footnotes for the preceding tables and the table that follows:
Note 1: The protection method conforms to JEM 1030.
Note 2: The applicable motor refers to Hitachi standard 3-phase motor (4-pole). When using
other motors, care must be taken to prevent the rated motor current (50/60 Hz) from
exceeding the rated output current of the inverter.
Note 3: The output voltage decreases as the main supply voltage decreases (except when
using the AVR function). In any case, the output voltage cannot exceed the input
power supply voltage.
Note 4: To operate the motor beyond 50/60 Hz, consult the motor manufacturer for the
maximum allowable rotation speed.
Note 5: When SLV is selected, please set the carrier frequency higher than 2.1 kHz.
Note 6: At the rated voltage when using a Hitachi standard 3-phase, 4-pole motor (when
selecting sensorless vector control—SLV).
Note 7: The braking torque via capacitive feedback is the average deceleration torque at the
shortest deceleration (stopping from 50/60 Hz as indicated). It is not continuous
regenerative braking torque. The average decel torque varies with motor loss. This
value decreases when operating beyond 50 Hz. If a large regenerative torque is
required, the optional regenerative braking resistor should be used.
Note 8: The frequency command will equal the maximum frequency at 9.8V for input voltage
0 to 10 VDC, or at 19.6 mA for input current 4 to 20 mA. If this characteristic is not
satisfactory for your application, contact your Hitachi sales representative.
Note 9: The storage temperature refers to the short-term temperature during transport.
Note 10: Conforms to the test method specified in JIS C0911 (1984). For the model types
excluded in the standard specifications, contact your Hitachi sales representative.
Note 11: NEMA 1 applies up to 22kW. An optional wire-entry conduit box is required for
30kW to 55kW models to meet NEMA 1 rating.
Item 400V Class Specifications
SJ300 inverters,
400V models
UL version 750HFU 900HFU 1100HFU — 1500HFU
CE version 750HFE 900HFE 1100HFE 1320HFE —
Applicable motor size *2 HP 100 125 150 175 200
kW 75 90 110 132 150
Rated capacity (400 / 480V) kVA 103.2 / 123.8 121.9 / 146.3 150.3 / 180.4 180.1 / 216.1 180.1 / 216.1
Rated input voltage 3-phase (3-wire) 380 to 480V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated input current (A) 164 194 239 286 286
Rated output voltage *3 3-phase (3-wire): 380 to 480V (corresponding to input voltage)
Rated output current (A) 149 176 217 260 260
Efficiency at 100% rated output, % 95.2 95.2 95.2 95.2 95.2
Watt loss,
approximate (W)
at 70% output 2675 3375 3900 4670 4670
at 100% output 3800 4800 5550 6650 6650
Starting torque *6 180% at 0.5 Hz (SLV), 130% at around 0 Hz (SLV, 0 Hz domain,
with motor one frame size down), 100% at 0 Hz (with feedback board)
Dynamic braking
approx. % torque,
short time stop *7
w/o braking unit 10%
with braking unit 45–70% 40–60% 30–50% 25–40% 20–35%
DC braking Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force
Weight kg / lb 60 / 132 60 / 132 80 / 176 80 / 176 80 / 176
SJ300 Inverter
Getting Started
1–9
General
Specifications
The following table (continued on next page) applies to all SJ300 inverter models.
Item General Specifications
Protective enclosure *1, *11 IP20 (NEMA 1)
Control method Line-to-line sine wave pulse-width modulation (PWM) control
Output frequency range *4 0.1 to 400 Hz
Frequency accuracy Digital command: ± 0.01% of the maximum frequency
Analog command: ± 0.2% (25°C ± 10°C)
Frequency setting resolution Digital: ± 0.01 Hz; Analog: (max. frequency)/4000, [O] terminal: 12-bit 0 to 10V;
[OI] terminal: 12-bit, 4-20mA; [O2] terminal: 12-bit -10 to +10V
Volt./Freq. characteristic *5 V/F optionally variable (30 to 400Hz base frequency), V/F control (constant torque,
reduced torque), sensorless vector control
Speed fluctuation ± 0.5% (sensorless vector control)
Overload capacity (output current) 150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 0.5 seconds
Acceleration/deceleration time 0.01 to 3600 sec., (linear curve profiles, accel./decel. selection), two-stage accel./decel.
Input
signal
Freq.
setting
Operator keypad Up and Down keys / Value settings
Potentiometer Analog setting via potentiometer on operator keypad
External signal *8 0 to 10 VDC (input impedance 10k Ohms), 4 to 20 mA (input impedance 250 Ohms),
Potentiometer (1k to 2k Ohms, 2W)
Serial port RS485 interface
FW/RV
Run
Operator panel Run key / Stop key (change FW/RV by function command)
External signal FW Run/Stop (NO contact), RV set by terminal assignment (NC/NO),
3-wire input available
Intelligent Input
terminals (assign eight
functions to terminals)
RV (reverse run/stop), CF1~CF4 (multi-speed select), JG (jogging), DB (external DC
braking), SET (set 2nd motor data), 2CH (2-stage accel./decel.), FRS (free-run stop),
EXT (external trip), USP (unattended start protection), CS (commercial power source),
SFT (software lock), AT (analog input voltage/current select), SET3 (set 3rd motor
data), RS (reset inverter), STA (start, 3-wire interface), STP (stop, 3-wire interface),
F/R (FW/RV 3-wire interface), PID (PID ON/OFF), PIDC (PID reset), CAS (control
gain setting), UP (remote control Up function, motorized speed pot.), DWN (remote
control Down function, motorized speed pot.), UDC (remote control data clearing),
OPE (Operator control), SF1-SF7 (Multispeed bits 0-7), OLR (Overload limit change),
TL (torque limit enable), TRQ1 (torque limit selection bit 1, LSB), TRQ2 (torque limit
selection bit 2, MSB), PPI (Proportional / Proportional/Integral mode selection), BOK
(Brake confirmation signal), ORT (Orientation – home search), LAC (LAC: LAD
cancel), PCLR (Position deviation reset), STAT (pulse train position command input
enable), NO (not selected)
Thermistor input One terminal (PTC characteristics)
Output
signal
Intelligent Output terminals
(assign six functions to five
open collector outputs and
one relay NO-NC contact)
RUN (run signal), FA1 (Frequency arrival type 1 – constant speed), FA2 (Frequency
arrival type 2 – over-frequency), OL (overload advance notice signal 1), OD (Output
deviation for PID control), AL (alarm signal), FA3 (Frequency arrival type 3 – at-
frequency), OTQ (over-torque signal), IP (Instantaneous power failure signal), UV
(Under-voltage signal), TRQ (In torque limit), RNT (Run time over), ONT (Power-ON
time over), THM (thermal alarm), BRK (Brake release signal), BER (Brake error
signal), ZS (Zero speed detect), DSE (speed deviation maximum), POK (Positioning
completion), FA4 (Frequency arrival type 4 – over-frequency 2), FA5 (Frequency arrival
type 5 – at-frequency 2), OL2 (Overload notice advance signal 2), Terminals 11-13 or
11-14 automatically configured as AC0-AC2 or AC0-AC3 per alarm code output selec-
tion)
Intelligent monitor output
terminals
Analog voltage monitor, analog current monitor (8-bit resolution), and PWM output, on
terminals [AM], [AMI], [FM]
Display monitor Output frequency, output current, motor torque, scaled value of output frequency, trip
history, I/O terminal condition, input power, output voltage
SJ300 Inverter Specifications
Geting Started
1–10
Signal Ratings Detailed ratings are in “Specifications of Control and Logic Connections” on page 4–9.
Other user-settable parameters V/F free-setting (up to 7 points), frequency upper/lower limit, frequency jump, accel/
decel curve selection, manual torque boost value and frequency adjustment, analog
meter tuning, start frequency, carrier frequency, electronic thermal protection level,
external frequency output zero/span reference, external frequency input bias start/end,
analog input selection, retry after trip, restart after instantaneous power failure, various
signal outputs, reduced voltage start, overload restriction, default value setting (US,
Europe, Japan), deceleration and stop after power failure, AVR function, fuzzy accel/
decel, auto-tuning (on-line/off-line), high-torque multi-operation, automatic energy-
saving operation
Carrier frequency range 0.5 to 15 kHz
Protective functions Over-current, overload, braking resistor overload, over voltage, EEPROM error, under-
voltage error, CT (current transformer) error, CPU error, external trip, USP error,
ground fault, input over voltage, instantaneous power failure, expansion card 1 error,
expansion card 2 error, inverter thermal trip, phase failure detection, IGBT error,
thermistor error
Environ-
ment
Temperature (*9) Operating (ambient): -10 to 50°C / Storage: -20 to 65°C
Humidity 20 to 90% humidity (non-condensing)
Vibration *10 Models SJ300–004xxx to 220xxx: 5.9 m/s2 (0.6G), 10 to 55 Hz
Models SJ00–300xx to 1500xxx: 2.94 m/s2 (0.3G), 10 to 55 Hz
Location Altitude 1,000 m or less, indoors (no corrosive gasses or dust)
Coating color Gray
Accessories Feedback PCB SJ-FB (vector control loop speed sensor)
Digital input PCB SJ-DG (4-digit BCD / 16-bit binary)
Others EMI filters, input/output reactors, DC reactors, radio noise filters, braking resistors,
braking units, LCR filter, communication cables, factory I/O network interface cards
Operator input devices OPE–SRE (4-digit LED with potentiometer) / OPE–S (4-digit LED w/o potentiometer),
Optional: OPE-SR (4-digit LED with potentiometer, Japanese/English overlay),
SRW–0EX Multilingual operator with copy function (English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish, and Portuguese)
Item General Specifications
Signal / Contact Ratings
Built-in power for inputs 24VDC supply, 100 mA maximum
Intelligent (programmable) logic inputs 27VDC maximum, 4.7kΩ input impedance
Intelligent (programmable) logic outputs Open collector type, 50mA max. ON state current, 27 VDC maximum OFF state voltage
Thermistor input Minimum thermistor power 100mW
PWM output 0 to 10VDC, 1.2 mA max., 50% duty cycle
Voltage analog output 0 to 10VDC, 2 mA max.
Current analog output 4-20 mA, nominal load impedance 250Ω
Analog input, current 4 to 19.6 mA range, 20 mA nominal
Analog input, voltage 0 to 9.6 VDC range, 10VDC nominal, 12VDC max., input impedance 10 kΩ
+10V analog reference 10VDC nominal, 10 mA maximum
Alarm relay, normally closed contacts Maximum loads: 250VAC, 2A; 30VDC, 8A resistive load
250VAC, 0.2A; 30VDC, 0.6A inductive load
Minimum loads: 100 VAC, 10mA; 5VDC, 100mA
Alarm relay, normally open contacts 250VAC, 1A; 30VDC 1A max. resistive load /
250VAC, 0.2A; 30VDC, 0.2A max. inductive load
Min. loads: 100 VAC, 10mA; 5VDC, 100mA
SJ300 Inverter
Getting Started
1–11
Derating Curves The maximum available inverter current output is limited by the carrier frequency and ambient
temperature. The carrier frequency is the inverter’s internal power switching frequency, settable
from 0.5 kHz to 12 kHz. Choosing a higher carrier frequency tends to decrease audible noise,
but it also increases the internal heating of the inverter, thus decreasing (derating) the maximum
current output capability. Ambient temperature is the temperature just outside the inverter
housing—such as inside the control cabinet where the inverter is mounted. A higher ambient
temperature decreases (derates) the inverter’s maximum current output capacity.
Use the following derating curves to help determine the optimal carrier frequency setting for
your inverter, and to find the output current derating. Be sure to use the proper curve for your
particular SJ300 inverter model number.
SJ300 1.5 to 22 kW at 50 deg. C ambient
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 150.5
65%
70%
75%
80%
85%
90%
95%
100%
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
% of Drive’s Rated Amps
004 to 150L
185L
220L
SJ300 30 to 55 kW at 50 deg. C ambient
2468101214150.5
65%
70%
75%
80%
85%
90%
95%
100%
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
% of Drive’s Rated Amps
370L
300L
450L
550L
450L550L
SJ300 Inverter Specifications
Geting Started
1–12
Derating curves, continued...
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 150.5
65%
70%
75%
80%
85%
90%
95%
100%
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
% of Drive’s Rated Amps
370H
450H
300H
550H
SJ300 30 to 55 kW at 50 deg. C ambient, continued
SJ300 75 to 150 kW at 50 deg. C ambient
2468101214150.5
65%
70%
75%
80%
85%
90%
95%
100%
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
% of Drive’s Rated Amps
750H
900H
1100H
1320H
1500H
60%
220H
60%
015 to 185H
SJ300 Inverter
Getting Started
1–13
Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives
The Purpose of
Motor Speed
Control for
Industry
Hitachi inverters provide accurate speed control for 3-phase AC induction motors. You connect
AC power to the inverter, and connect the inverter to the motor. Many applications can benefit
from the use of variable-speed drives in several ways:
• Energy savings - HVAC
• Need to coordinate speed with an adjacent process - textiles and printing presses
• Need to control acceleration and deceleration (torque)
• Sensitive loads - elevators, food processing, pharmaceuticals
What is an
Inverter?
The term inverter and variable-frequency drive are related and somewhat interchangeable. An
electronic drive for an AC motor controls the motor’s speed by varying the frequency of the
power sent to the motor.
An inverter, in general, is a device that converts DC power to AC power. The figure below
shows how the variable-frequency drive employs an internal inverter. The drive first converts
incoming AC power to DC through a rectifier bridge, creating an internal DC bus voltage. Then
the inverter circuit converts the DC back to AC again to power the motor. The special inverter
can vary its output frequency and voltage according to the desired motor speed.
The simplified drawing of the inverter shows three double-throw switches. In Hitachi inverters,
the switches are actually IGBTs (isolated gate bipolar transistors). Using a commutation
algorithm, the microprocessor in the drive switches the IGBTs ON and OFF at a very high
speed to create the desired output waveforms. The inductance of the motor windings helps
smooth out the pulses.
Torque and
Constant Volts/
Hertz Operation
In the past, AC variable speed drives used an
open loop (scalar) technique to control speed.
The constant-volts-per-hertz operation
maintains a constant ratio between the applied
voltage and the applied frequency. With these
conditions, AC induction motors inherently
delivered constant torque across the operating
speed range. For some applications, this scalar
technique was adequate.
Today, with the advent of sophisticated micro-
processors and digital signal processors
(DSPs), it is possible to control the speed and
torque of AC induction motors with unprece-
dented accuracy. The SJ300 utilizes these devices to perform complex mathematical calcula-
tions required to achieve superior performance. The technique is referred to as sensorless
vector control. It allows the drive to continuously monitor its output voltage and current, and
their relationship to each other. From this it mathematically calculates two vector currents. One
Power
Input
Inverter
L1/R Motor
L2/S
L3/T
Rectifier
Variable-frequency Drive
Internal DC Bus
+
+
–
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Converter
Output frequency
Output
voltage
100%
V
0
100%
f
Constant torque
Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives
Geting Started
1–14
vector is related to motor flux current, and the other to motor torque current. The ability to
separately control these two vectors is what allows the SJ300 to deliver extraordinary low-
speed performance and speed control accuracy.
Inverter Input and
Three-Phase
Power
The Hitachi SJ300 Series of inverters includes two sub-groups: the 200V class and the 400V
class inverters. The drives described in this manual may be used in either the United States or
Europe, although the exact voltage level for commercial power may be slightly different from
country to country. Accordingly, a 200V class inverter requires (nominal) 200 to 240VAC, and
a 400V class inverter requires from 380 to 480VAC. All SJ300 inverters require three-phase
input power, whether 200V or 400V class.
TIP: If your application only has single phase power available, refer to the Hitachi SJ100
Series inverters. SJ100 inverters of 3HP or less can accept single phase input power.
The common terminology for single phase power is Line (L) and Neutral (N). Three-phase
power connections are usually labeled Line 1 (L1), Line 2 (L2) and Line 3 (L3). In any case,
the power source should include a ground connection. That ground connection will need to
connect to the inverter chassis and to the motor frame (see “Wire the Inverter Output to Motor”
on page 2–20).
Inverter Output to
the Motor
The AC motor must be connected only to the inverter’s
output terminals. The output terminals are uniquely
labeled (to differentiate them from the input terminals)
with the designations U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. This
corresponds to typical motor lead connection designa-
tions T1, T2, and T3. It is often not necessary to connect
a particular inverter output to a particular motor lead for
a new application. The consequence of swapping any
two of the three connections is the reversal of the motor
direction. In applications where reversed rotation could
cause equipment damage or personnel injury, be sure to
verify direction of rotation before attempting full-speed
operation. For safety to personnel, you must connect the
motor chassis ground to the ground connection at the
bottom of the inverter housing.
Notice the three connections to the motor do not include one marked “Neutral” or “Return.”
The motor represents a balanced “Y” impedance to the inverter, so there is no need for a
separate return. In other words, each of the three “Hot” connections serves also as a return for
the other connections, because of their phase relationship.
The Hitachi inverter is a rugged and reliable device. The intention is for the inverter to assume
the role of controlling power to the motor during all normal operations. Therefore, this manual
instructs you not to switch OFF power to the inverter while the motor is running (unless it is an
emergency stop). Also, do not install or use disconnect switches in the wiring from the inverter
to the motor (except thermal disconnect). Of course, safety-related devices such as fuses must
be in the design to break power during a malfunction, as required by NEC and local codes.
3-Phase
AC Motor
U/T1 V/T2
W/T3
Earth
GND
SJ300 Inverter
Getting Started
1–15
Intelligent
Functions and
Parameters
Much of this manual is devoted to describing
how to use inverter functions and how to config-
ure inverter parameters. The inverter is micro-
processor-controlled, and has many independent
functions. The microprocessor has an on-board
EEPROM for parameter storage. The inverter’s
front panel keypad provides access to all
functions and parameters, which you can access
through other devices as well. The general name
for all these devices is the digital operator, or
digital operator panel. Chapter 2 will show you
how to get a motor running, using a minimal set
of function commands or configuring parame-
ters.
The optional read/write programmer will let you
read and write inverter EEPROM contents from
the programmer. This feature is particularly
useful for OEMs who need to duplicate a partic-
ular inverter’s settings in many other inverters in
assembly-line fashion.
Braking In general, braking is a force that attempts to slow or stop motor rotation. So it is associated
with motor deceleration, but may also occur even when the load attempts to drive the motor
faster than the desired speed (overhauling). If you need the motor and load to decelerate
quicker than their natural deceleration during coasting, we recommend installing a braking
resistor. The dynamic braking unit (built into certain SJ300 models) sends excess motor energy
into a resistor to slow the motor and load (see “Introduction” on page 5–2 and “Dynamic
Braking” on page 5–6 for more information). For loads that continuously overhaul the motor
for extended periods of time, the SJ300 may not be suitable (contact your Hitachi distributor).
The inverter parameters include acceleration and deceleration, which you can set to match the
needs of the application. For a particular inverter, motor, and load, there will be a range of
practically achievable accelerations and decelerations.
Velocity Profiles The SJ300 inverter is capable of sophisti-
cated speed control. A graphical representa-
tion of that capability will help you
understand and configure the associated
parameters. This manual makes use of the
velocity profile graph used in industry
(shown at right). In the example, the acceler-
ation is a ramp to a set speed, and the decel-
eration is a decline to a stop.
Fixed speed
Accel Decel
t
Speed
Velocity Profile
Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives
Geting Started
1–16
Acceleration and deceleration settings
specify the time required to go from a stop to
maximum frequency (or visa versa). The
resulting slope (speed change divided by
time) is the acceleration or deceleration. An
increase in output frequency uses the accel-
eration slope, while a decrease uses the
deceleration slope. The accel or decel time a
particular speed change depends on the
starting and ending frequencies. However,
the slope is constant, corresponding to the
full-scale accel or decel time setting.
For example, the full-scale acceleration
setting (time) may be 10 seconds—the time
required to go from 0 to 60 Hz.
The SJ300 inverter can store up to 16 preset
speeds. And, it can apply separate accelera-
tion and deceleration transitions from any
preset to any other preset speed. A multi-
speed profile (shown at right) uses two or
more preset speeds, which you can select via
intelligent input terminals. This external
control can apply any preset speed at any
time. Alternatively, the selected speed is
infinitely variable across the speed range.
You can use the potentiometer control on the
keypad for manual control. The drive
accepts analog 0-10V signals and 4-20 mA
control signals as well.
The inverter can drive the motor in either
direction. Separate FW and RV commands
select the direction of rotation. The motion
profile example shows a forward motion
followed by a reverse motion of shorter
duration. The speed presets and analog
signals control the magnitude of the speed,
while the FW and RV commands determine
the direction before the motion starts.
NOTE: The SJ300 can move loads in both directions. However, it is not designed for use in
servo-type applications that use a bipolar velocity signal that determines direction.
Speed Maximum speed
0
Acceleration t
Acceleration (time) setting
Speed
Speed 1
Speed 2
t
Multi-speed Profile
Speed Forward move
Reverse move
t
Bi-directional Profile
SJ300 Inverter
Getting Started
1–17
Frequently Asked Questions
Q. What is the main advantage in using an inverter to drive a motor, compared to alternative
solutions?
A. An inverter can vary the motor speed with very little energy loss, unlike mechanical
or hydraulic speed control solutions. The resulting energy savings can often pay for
the inverter in a relatively short time.
Q. The term “inverter” is a little confusing, since we also use “drive” and “amplifier” to
describe the electronic unit that controls a motor. What does “inverter” mean?
A. The terms are used somewhat interchangeably in industry. Nowadays, the terms
drive, variable-frequency drive, variable-speed drive, and inverter are generally used
to describe electronic, microprocessor-based motor speed controllers. In the past,
variable speed drive also referred to various mechanical means to vary speed. Ampli-
fier is a term almost exclusively used to describe drives for servo or stepper motors.
Q. Although the SJ300 inverter is a variable speed drive, can I use it in a fixed-speed applica-
tion?
A. Yes, sometimes an inverter can be used simply as a “soft-start” device, providing
controlled acceleration and deceleration to a fixed speed. Other functions of the
SJ300 may be useful in such applications, as well. However, using a variable speed
drive can benefit many types of industrial and commercial motor applications, by
providing controlled acceleration and deceleration, high torque at low speeds, and
energy savings over alternative solutions.
Q. Can I use an inverter and AC induction motor in a positioning application?
A. That depends on the required precision, and the slowest speed the motor must turn
and still deliver torque. The SJ300 inverter will deliver 200% rated torque while
turning the motor at only 0.5 Hz. DO NOT use an inverter if you need the motor to
stop and hold the load position without the aid of a mechanical brake (use a servo or
stepper motion control system).
Q. Does the optional digital operator interface or the PC software (DOP Professional)
provide features beyond what is available from the keypad on the unit?
A. Yes. However, note first that the same set of parameters and functions are equally
accessible from either the unit’s keypad or from remote devices. The DOP Profes-
sional PC software lets you save or load inverter configurations to or from a disk file.
And, the hand-held digital operator provides hard-wired terminals, a safety require-
ment for some installations.
Q. Why does the manual or other documentation use terminology such as “200V class”
instead of naming the actual voltage, such as “230 VAC?”
A. A specific inverter model is set at the factory to work across a voltage range particular
to the destination country for that model. The model specifications are on the label on
the side of the inverter. A European 200V class inverter (“EU” marking) has different
parameter settings than a USA 200V class inverter (“US” marking). The initialization
procedure (see “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–9) can set up the
inverter for European or US commercial voltage ranges.
Q. Why doesn’t the motor have a neutral connection as a return to the inverter?
A. The motor theoretically represents a “balanced Y” load if all three stator windings
have the same impedance. The Y connection allows each of the three wires to alter-
nately serve as input or return on alternate half-cycles.
Q. Does the motor need a chassis ground connection?
A. Yes, for several reasons. Most importantly, this provides protection in the event of a
short in the motor that puts a hazardous voltage on its housing. Secondly, motors
exhibit leakage currents that increase with aging. Lastly, a grounded chassis generally
emits less electrical noise than an ungrounded one.
Frequently Asked Questions
Geting Started
1–18
Q. What type of motor is compatible with the Hitachi inverters?
A. Motor type – It must be a three phase AC induction motor. Use an inverter-grade
motor that has 800V insulation for 200V class inverters, or 1600V insulation for
400V class.
Motor size – In practice, it’s better to find the right size motor for your application;
then look for the inverter to match the motor.
NOTE: There may be other factors that will affect motor selection, including heat dissipation,
motor operating speed profile, enclosure type, and cooling method.
Q. How many poles should the motor have?
A. Hitachi inverters can be configured to operate motors with 2, 4, 6, or 8 poles. The
greater the number of poles, the slower the top motor speed will be, but it will have
higher torque at the base speed.
Q. Will I be able to add dynamic (resistive) braking to my Hitachi SJ300 drive after the
initial installation?
A. Yes. Models SJ300-004XXX through SJ300-110XXX have built-in dynamic braking
units. You can add an external resistor to these models to improve braking perfor-
mance. Models SJ300-150XXX through SJ300-1500XXX require you to add an
external braking unit. The braking resistor connects to the external braking unit for
those models. More information on dynamic braking is located in Chapter 5.
Q. How will I know if my application will require resistive braking?
A. For new applications, it may be difficult to tell before you actually test a motor/drive
solution. In general, some applications can rely on system losses such as friction to
serve as the decelerating force, or otherwise can tolerate a long decel time. These
applications will not need dynamic braking. However, applications with a combina-
tion of a high-inertia load and a required short decel time will need dynamic braking.
This is a physics question that may be answered either empirically or through exten-
sive calculations.
Q. Several options related to electrical noise suppression are available for the Hitachi invert-
ers. How can I know if my application will require any of these options?
A. The purpose of these noise filters is to reduce the inverter electrical noise so the
operation of nearby electrical devices is not affected. Some applications are governed
by particular regulatory agencies, and noise suppression is mandatory. In those cases,
the inverter must have the corresponding noise filter installed. Other applications may
not need noise suppression, unless you notice electrical interference with the opera-
tion of other devices.
Q. The SJ300 features a PID loop feature. PID loops are usually associated with chemical
processes, heating, or process industries in general. How could the PID loop feature be
useful in my application?
A. You will need to determine the particular main variable in your application the motor
affects. That is the process variable (PV) for the motor. Over time, a faster motor
speed will cause a faster change in the PV than a slow motor speed will. By using the
PID loop feature, the inverter commands the motor to run at the optimal speed
required to maintain the PV at the desired value for current conditions. Using the PID
loop feature will require an additional sensor and other wiring, and is considered an
advanced application.
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
In This Chapter.... page
— Orientation to Inverter Features........................................................ 2
— Basic System Description ................................................................. 5
— Step-by-Step Basic Installation ......................................................... 6
— Powerup Test .................................................................................. 21
— Using the Front Panel Keypad........................................................ 23
2
Orientation to Inverter Features
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–2
Orientation to Inverter Features
Unpacking and
Inspection
Please take a few moments to unpack your new SJ300 inverter and perform these steps:
1. Look for any damage that may have occurred during shipping.
2. Verify the contents of the box include:
a. One SJ300 inverter
b. One Instruction Manual (supplied by printed book for –FU/–FR models, supplied on
CR-ROM for –FE models)
c. One SJ300 Quick Reference Guide
d. One packet of desiccant—discard (not for human consumption)
3. Inspect the specifications label on the front or side of the inverter. Make sure it matches the
product part number you ordered.
Main Physical
Features
The SJ300 Series inverters vary in size according to the current output rating and motor size for
each model number. All feature the same basic keypad and connector interface for consistent
ease of use. The inverter construction has a heat sink at the back of the housing. The fans
enhance heat sink performance. Mounting holes are pre-drilled in the heat sink for your conve-
nience. Never touch the heat sink during or just after operation; it can be very hot.
The electronics housing and front panel are built onto the front of the heat sink. The front panel
has three levels of physical access designed for convenience and safety:
•First-level access – for basic use of inverter and editing parameters during powered opera-
tion (power is ON)
•Second-level access – for wiring the inverter power supply or motor (power is OFF)
•Third-level access – for accessing the expansion bay for adding/removing expansion boards
(power is OFF)
1. First-level Access - View the unit just as it
came from the box as shown. The
OPE-SRE or OPE-S digital operator
keypad comes installed in the inverter. The
four-digit display can show a variety of
performance parameters. LEDs indicate
whether the display units are Hertz, Volts,
Amperes, or kW. Other LEDs indicate
Power (external), and Run/Stop Mode and
Program/Monitor Mode status. Membrane
keys Run and Stop/Reset, and a Min/Max
frequency control knob (OPE-SRE only)
control motor operation. These controls
and indicators are usually the only ones
needed after the inverter installation is
complete.
The FUNC., , , and STR keys
allow an operator to change the inverter’s
functions and parameter values, or to select
the one monitored on the 4-digit display.
Note that some parameters may not be
edited if the inverter is in Run mode.
12
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–3
2. Second-level access - First, ensure no
power source of any kind is connected to
the inverter. If power has been
connected, wait five minutes after
powerdown and verify the Charge Lamp
indicator is OFF to proceed. Then locate
the recessed retention screw at the
bottom of the main front panel. Use a
small Phillips screwdriver to remove the
screw. Press the two latch release areas
near the “SJ300” label as shown, and
simultaneously slide the lower front
downward to release for removal.
Notice the large power terminals at the bottom of the wiring area. The rubber grommets
below the power terminals are for wire entry/exit to the power source and motor. Never
operate the inverter with the front panel removed.
The control terminals connect logic or analog signals for control and monitoring of the
inverter. The nearby alarm relay provides both normally-open and normally-closed logic for
interface to an external alarm. The alarm circuit may carry hazardous live voltages even
when the main power to the inverter is OFF. So, never directly touch any terminal or circuit
component.
WARNING: Be sure to wait five minutes after powerdown and verify the charge lamp indica-
tor is OFF to proceed. Otherwise there is the risk of electric shock.
Press here and slide cover downward
Retention screw
Wire entry/exit plate
Logic Connector
Power terminals
Charge lamp indicator
Orientation to Inverter Features
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–4
3. Third-level access - The SJ300
provides for field installation of
interface circuits. These circuits are
on expansion cards, to be installed in
the expansion bay. To access the
expansion bay, you will need to
remove the upper front panel. Use
the latch to release the digital
operator (the panel filler plate may
remain). Remove the two retention
screws the bottom corners of the
upper front panel. Lift up at the
bottom, then disengage the two
hinge latches at the top.
The expansion bay has two sites for
adding expansion cards. Each card
connects via the interface connector,
and mounts using three standoff
screw locations. Further details on
accessories are in Chapter 5. You
may also refer to the instruction
manual that comes with each type of
expansion card.
The following sections will describe the system design and guide you through a step-by-step
installation process. After the section on wiring, this chapter will show how to use the front
panel keys to access functions and edit parameters.
Latch to release digital operator
Retention screws
Expansion bay Expansion connectors
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–5
Basic System Description
A motor control system will obviously include a motor and inverter, as well as a breaker or
fuses for safety. If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just to get started,
that’s all you may need for now. But a system can also have a variety of additional components.
Some can be for noise suppression, while others may enhance the inverter’s braking perfor-
mance. The figure and table below show a system with all the optional components you may
need in your finished application.
NOTE: Some components are required for regulatory agency compliance (see Chapter 5 and
Appendix D).
Thermal switch
Breaker,
MCCB or
GFI
Name Function
Breaker / discon-
nect
A molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), ground
fault interrupter breaker (GFI), or a fused
disconnect device. NOTE: The installer must
refer to the NEC and local codes to ensure safety
and compliance.
Input side
AC Reactor
This is useful in suppressing harmonics induced
on the power supply lines, or when the main
power voltage imbalance exceeds 3% (and
power source capacity is more than 500 kVA), or
to smooth out line fluctuations. It also improves
the power factor.
Radio noise filter Electrical noise interference may occur on
nearby equipment such as a radio receiver. This
magnetic choke filter helps reduce radiated noise
(can also be used on output).
EMI filter (for CE
applications, see
Appendix D)
This filter reduces the conducted noise in the
power supply wiring between the inverter and
the power distribution system. Connect it to the
inverter primary (input side).
Radio noise filter
(use in non-CE
applications)
This capacitive filter reduces radiated noise from
the main power wires in the inverter input side.
DC link choke The choke suppresses harmonics generated by
the inverter. However, it will not protect the
input diode bridge rectifier.
Braking resistor Braking components are useful for increasing
the inverter’s control torque for high duty-cycle
(ON-OFF) applications, and improving the
decelerating capability.
Braking unit
Radio noise filter Electrical noise interference may occur on
nearby equipment such as a radio receiver. This
magnetic choke filter helps reduce radiated noise
(can also be used at input).
Output side
AC reactor
This reactor reduces the vibrations in the motor
caused by the inverter’s switching waveform, by
smoothing the waveform to approximate
commercial power quality. It is also useful to
reduce harmonics when wiring from the inverter
to the motor is more than 10m in length.
LCR filter Sine wave shaping filter for output side.
Power source
Inverter
Motor
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
RST
GND
UVW
RB
R0
T0
PD(+1)
P(+)
N(–)
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–6
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
This section will guide you through the following basic steps of installation:
1. Study the warnings associated with mounting the inverter.
2. Select a suitable mounting location.
NOTE: If the installation is in an EU country, study the EMC installation guidelines in
Appendix D.
3. Cover the inverter’s top ventilation openings to prevent debris from falling inside.
4. Check the inverter mounting dimensions for footprint and mounting hole locations.
5. Study the caution and warning messages associated with wiring the inverter.
6. Connect wiring for the inverter power input.
7. Connect wiring to the motor.
8. Uncover the inverter’s ventilation openings that were covered in Step 3.
9. Perform a powerup test.
10. Make observations and check your installation.
Step 1: Study the following caution messages associated with mounting the inverter. This is the
time when mistakes are most likely to occur that will result in expensive rework, equipment
damage, or personal injury.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on flame-resistant material such as a steel plate. Other-
wise, there is the danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the inverter. Otherwise, there is
the danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in the inverter housing,
such as wire clippings, spatter from welding, metal shavings, dust, etc. Otherwise, there is the
danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a place that can bear the weight according to the
specifications in the text (Chapter 1, Specifications Tables). Otherwise, it may fall and cause
injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not subject to vibration.
Otherwise, it may fall and cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged or has missing parts.
Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a well-ventilated room that does not have direct
exposure to sunlight, a tendency for high temperature, high humidity or dew condensation, high
levels of dust, corrosive gas, explosive gas, inflammable gas, grinding-fluid mist, salt air, etc.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
1
Choosing a
Mounting
Location
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–7
Step 2: To summarize the caution messages—you will need to find a solid, non-flammable,
vertical surface that is in a relatively clean and dry environment. In order to ensure enough
room for air circulation around the inverter to aid in cooling, maintain the specified clearance
around the inverter specified in the diagram.
CAUTION: Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the inverter and to provide
adequate ventilation. Otherwise, the inverter may overheat and cause equipment damage or fire.
Step 3: Before proceeding to the wiring section, it’s a
good time to temporarily cover the inverter’s ventila-
tion openings. Paper and masking tape are all that is
needed. This will prevent harmful debris such as wire
clippings and metal shavings from entering the
inverter during installation.
Please observe this checklist while mounting the
inverter:
1. The ambient temperature must be in the range of
-10 to 40°C. If the range will be up to 50°C
(maximum rating), you will need to refer to
“Derating Curves” on page 1–11.
2. Keep any other heat-producing equipment as far
away from the inverter as possible.
3. When installing the inverter in an enclosure,
maintain the clearance around the inverter and
verify that its ambient temperature is within speci-
fication when the enclosure door is closed.
4. Do not open the main front panel door at any time
during operation.
2
Ensure Adequate
Ventilation
SJ300
5 cm (1.97”)
minimum
10 cm (3.94”)
minimum
5 cm (1.97”)
minimum
10 cm (3.94”)
minimum Exhaust
Air intake
Clear area
3
Keep Debris Out
of Inverter Vents
Cover the ventilation slots,
both sides
C
over
th
e
f
an ou
tl
e
t
ven
t
s
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–8
Step 4: Locate the applicable drawing on the following pages for your inverter.
Dimensions are given in millimeters (inches) format. Larger models come equipped with
NEMA1 adapter for wire entry for U.S. models only as shown (LFU and HFU).
NOTE: Be sure to use lock washers or other means to ensure screws do not loosen
due to vibration.
4
Check Inverter
Dimensions
150(5.91)
130(5.12)
241(9.49)
255(10.04)
2 − 6(0.24)
130(5.12)
143(5.63)
7(0.28)
62(2.44)
140(5.51)
2 − φ 6(0.24)
3 − φ 20(0.79)
Model
SJ300 -004LFU
-007LFU/HFE, HFU
-015LFU/HFE, HFU
-022LFU/HFE, HFU
-037LFU/HFE, HFU
-055LFU/HFE, HFU
Air intake
Exhaust
210(8.27)
2 − φ 7(0.28)
246(9.69)
189(7.44)
260(10.24)
7(0.28)
2 − 7(0.28)
189(7.44)
203(7.99)
82(3.23)
170(6.69)
3 − φ 25(0.98)
Model
SJ300 -075LFU/HFE, HFU
-110LFU/HFE, HFU
Air intake
Exhaust
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–9
Dimensional drawings, continued...
250(9.84)
2 − φ 7(0.28)
229(9.02)
376(14.80)
390(15.35)
4 − φ 29.5(1.16)
244(9.61)
229(9.02)
9.5(0.37)
83(3.27) 190(7.48)
2 − 7(0.28)
Model
SJ300
-150LFU/HFE, HFU
-185LFU/HFE, HFU
-220LFU/HFE, HFU
Air intake
Exhaust
540(21.26)
265(10.43)
2 - f 10(0.39)
510(20.08)
307(12.09)
195(7.68)
2 - 10(0.39)
100(3.94)
130(5.12)
74(2.91)
Model
SJ300 -300LFU/HFE, HFU
Optional adapterfor NEMA1 rating Air intake
Exhaust
310(12.20)
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–10
Dimensional drawings, continued...
300(11.81)
520(20.47)
2 − φ 12(0.47)
2 − 12(0.47)
550(21.65)
386(15.20)
390(15.35)
110(4.33)
90(3.54)
250(9.84)
Model
SJ300 -370LFU/HFE, HFU
-450LFU/HFE, HFU
Optional adapter
for NEMA1 rating
Air intake
Exhaust
-550HFE, HFU
80(3.15)
380(14.96)
2 − φ 12(0.47)
670(26.38)
2 − 12(0.47)
700(27.56)
476(18.74)
480(18.90)
100(3.94)
104(4.09)
70(2.76)
250(9.84)
Model
SJ300 -550LFU
Optional adapter
for NEMA1 rating
Air intake
Exhaust
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–11
Dimensional drawings, continued...
Model
SJ300 -750HFE, HFU
-900HFE, HFU
700(27.56)
670(26.38)
300(11.81)
390(15.34)
270(10.63)
2 − φ 12(0.47)
2 − 12(0.47)
Air intake
Exhaust
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–12
Dimensional drawings, continued...
Model
SJ300 -1100HFE, HFU
-1320HFE
-1500HFU
740(29.13)
710(27.95)
380(14.96)
2 − φ 12(0.47)
2 − 12(0.47)
480(18.90)
270(10.63)
Air intake
Exhaust
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–13
Step 5: The wiring enters the inverter through
the entry/exit plate as shown to the right. The
rubber grommets have a solid, thin membrane,
so that unused ones continue to seal the opening.
To create an opening, use a sharp knife and
carefully cut an “X” in the center of the
grommet as shown. Be especially careful to
avoid cutting into the thick outer ring, so that the
wiring will have a cushion from contacting the
metal plate.
NOTE: Some inverter models will have a
wiring box for NEMA rating compliance. Make
sure the wire entry to the NEMA box also has
protective cushion from chaffing of insulation.
Before proceeding, please study the caution and warning messages below.
WARNING: “Use 60/75°C Cu wire only” or equivalent.
WARNING: “Open Type Equipment.” For models SJ300–750H to SJ300–1500H.
WARNING: “A Class 2 circuit wired with Class 1 wire” or equivalent.
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 240 V maximum.” For models with suffix L.
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum.” For models with suffix H.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Be sure to ground the unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock
and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified personnel. Otherwise,
there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Implement wiring after checking that the power supply is OFF. Otherwise,
you may incur electric shock and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Do not connect wiring to an inverter or operate an inverter that is not
mounted according the instructions given in this manual. Otherwise, there is a danger of elec-
tric shock and/or injury to personnel.
5
Prepare for
Wiring
Cut grommet(s) for
use as shown
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–14
Determining Wire
and Fuse Sizes
This section includes tables for 200V class and 400V class inverters (on the next page). The
following notes will help you read the tables in this section:
• Locate the row corresponding to the motor size and particular inverter in your application.
The maximum motor current determines the recommended wire sizes.
• The length column specifies that some inverters can optionally use a smaller wire gauge if
the wires are shorter than 10m and the inverter is located in an enclosure.
• Power Lines columns include wires connecting to terminals [R, S, T, U, V, W, P, PD, and N].
Only power input and motor leads will be fused: [R, S, T, U, V, and W]. The breaker ratings
(GFI—ground fault interrupter) are slightly higher than fuse ratings to allow for nominal
surges without tripping.
• The chassis ground columns list the Hitachi-recommended AWG and the minimal AWG for
UL conformity.
• The optional external braking resistor wiring only applies to a few models that have a built-
in braking unit. The other models use an optional external braking unit.
• Parallel wires increase effective wire gauge, and are denoted by “||” in the tables.
• Signal Lines, not listed in these tables, connect to the removable logic connector. The recom-
mended wire gauge for all wiring to the logic connector is 28 AWG (0.75 mm2). Be sure to
use shielded wire for any analog signals.
* See notes for wiring tables on the following page.
Motor
Output
200V
Inverter
Models
Wiring *1
Power Lines *3 Chassis Ground Brake Res.
HP kW AW G mm2
Fuse
(UL-
rated,
class J,
600V)
Breaker
(GFI
type) *2
AW G ,
rec.
AW G ,
UL mm2AW G mm2
1/2 0.4 SJ300–004LFU 20 1.25 10A 5A 16 14 1.25 20 1.25
1 0.75 SJ300–007LFU 18 1.25 10A 10A 16 14 1.25 18 1.25
2 1.5 SJ300–015LFU 14 2 10A 15A 16 14 1.25 14 2
3 2.2 SJ300–022LFU 14 2 15A 20A 16 14 1.25 14 2
5 3.7 SJ300–037LFU 10 3.5 20A 30A 10 12 3.5 10 3.5
7.5 5.5 SJ300–055LFU 8 5.5 30A 50A 8 10 5.5 8 5.5
10 7.5 SJ300–075LFU 6 8 40A 60A 8 10 8 8 5.5
15 11 SJ300–110LFU 4 14 60A 75A 4 10 14 8 5.5
20 15 SJ300–150LFU 2 22 80A 100A 3 8 22 — —
25 18.5 SJ300–185LFU 4 || 4 14 || 14 100A 100A 3 8 22 — —
30 22 SJ300–220LFU 4 || 4 14 || 14 125A 150A 2 8 30 — —
40 30 SJ300–300LFU 2 || 2 22 || 22 150A 200A 2 6 30 — —
50 37 SJ300–370LFU 2 || 2 30 || 30 175A 225A 1/0 6 38 — —
60 45 SJ300–450LFU 1 || 1
(75°C)
38 || 38 225A 225A 3/0 6 38 — —
75 55 SJ300–550LFU 2/0 || 2/0 60 || 60 250A 350A 3/0 4 60 — —
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–15
Determining wire and fuse sizes, continued...
Note 1: Field wiring must be made by a UL-listed and CSA certified ring lug terminal
connector sized for the wire gauge involved. The connector must be fixed by using
the crimping tool specified by the connector manufacturer.
Note 2: Be sure to consider the capacity of the circuit breaker to be used.
Note 3: Be sure to use a larger wire gauge if power line length exceeds 66 ft (20m).
Motor
Output
400V
Inverter
Models
Wiring *1
Power Lines *3 Chassis Ground Brake Res.
HP kW AW G mm2
Fuse
(UL-
rated,
class J,
600V)
Breaker
( GFI
type) *2
AW G ,
rec.
AW G ,
UL mm2AW G mm2
1 0.75 SJ300–007HFU/E 20 1.25 10A 5A 16 14 1.25 20 1.25
2 1.5 SJ300–015HFU/E 18 2 10A 10A 16 14 1.25 18 2
3 2.2 SJ300–022HFU/E 16 2 10A 10A 16 14 1.25 16 2
5 4.0 SJ300–040HFU/E 14 2 15A 15A 16 14 1.25 14 2
7.5 5.5 SJ300–055HFU/E 12 2 15A 30A 14 14 2 12 2
10 7.5 SJ300–075HFU/E 10 3.5 20A 30A 10 12 3.5 10 3.5
15 11 SJ300–110HFU/E 8 5.5 30A 50A 8 10 5.5 8 5.5
20 15 SJ300–150HFU/E 6 8 40A 60A 8 10 8 — —
25 18.5 SJ300–185HFU/E 6 14 50A 60A 4 10 14 — —
30 22 SJ300–220HFU/E 4 14 60A 75A 4 10 14 — —
40 30 SJ300–300HFU/E 3 22 70A 100A 3 10 22 — —
50 37 SJ300–370HFU/E 4 || 4 14 || 14 90A 100A 3 8 22 — —
60 45 SJ300–450HFU/E 1 (75°C) 38 125A 150A 1 8 22 — —
75 55 SJ300–550HFU/E 2 || 2 22 || 22 125A 175A 1 6 30 — —
100 75 SJ300–750HFU/E 1 || 1
(75°C)
30 || 30 175A 225A 1/0 6 50 — —
125 90 SJ300–900HFU/E 1 || 1
(75°C)
38 || 38 200A 225A 3/0 6 80 — —
150 110 SJ300–1100HFU/E 1/0 || 1/0 50 || 50 250A 350A 3/0 4 80 — —
175 132 SJ300–1320HFE 3/0 || 3/0 80 || 80 300A 350A 4/0 4 100 — —
200 150 SJ300–1500HFU 3/0 || 3/0 80 || 80 300A 350A 4/0 4 100 — —
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–16
Terminal
Dimensions and
Torque Specs
The following tables list the screw size of terminal and recommended torque for tightening for
each of the SJ300 inverter models (400V models are on the next page).
CAUTION: Fasten the screws with the specified fastening torque in the table below. Check for
any loosening of screws. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
Note 1: The recommended ring lug connector listing consists of wire size – screw size
format. The wire sizes are in AWG or mm2 format. For AWG wire sizes, bolt sizes
for the ring lug centers are: #10, #12, 1/4”, 5/16”, and 1/2”. For metric wire sizes,
bolt sizes for the ring lug centers are: 6 = 6M, 8 = 8M, 10 = 10M.
TIP: AWG = American Wire Gauge. Smaller numbers represent increasing wire thickness.
kcmil = 1,000 circular mils, a measure of wire cross-sectional area
mm2 = square millimeters, a measure of wire cross-sectional area
Input
Volt ag e
Motor
Output 200V
Inverter Models
Screw size
of terminal
Ring lug connector *1 Torque
HP kW (AWG-bolt) (mm2–bolt) ft-lbs (N-m)
200V
1/2 0.4 SJ300-004LFU M4 20–#10 1.25–4 1.1 1.5
1 0.75 SJ300-007LFU M4 20–#10 1.25–4 1.1 1.5
2 1.5 SJ300-015LFU M4 14–#10 2–4 1.1 1.5
3 2.2 SJ300-022LFU M4 14–#10 2–4 1.1 1.5
5 3.7 SJ300-037LFU M4 10–#10 3.5–4 1.1 1.5
7.5 5.5 SJ300-055LFU M5 8–#12 5.5–5 1.8 2.5
10 7.5 SJ300-075LFU M5 8–#12 8–5 1.8 2.5
15 11 SJ300-110LFU M6 4–1/4 14–6 3.6 4.9
20 15 SJ300-150LFU M6 2–1/4 22–6 3.6 4.9
25 18.5 SJ300-185LFU M6 4–1/4 14–6 3.6 4.9
30 22 SJ300-220LFU M8 4–5/16 14–8 6.5 8.8
40 30 SJ300-300LFU M8 2–5/16 22–8 6.5 8.8
50 37 SJ300-370LFU M8 1–5/16 30–8 6.5 8.8
60 45 SJ300-450LFU M10 1/0–1/2 38–10 10.1 13.7
75 55 SJ300-550LFU M10 2/0–1/2 60–10 10.1 13.7
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–17
Terminal dimensions and torque specs, continued...
Note 1: The recommended ring lug connector listing consists of wire size – screw size
format. The wire sizes are in AWG or mm2 format. For AWG wire sizes, bolt sizes
for the ring lug centers are: #10, #12, 1/4”, 5/16”, and 1/2”. For metric wire sizes,
bolt sizes for the ring lug centers are: 6 = 6M, 8 = 8M, 10 = 10M.
Input
Vol ta ge
Motor
Output 400V
Inverter Models
Screw size
of terminal
Ring lug connector *1 Torque
HP kW (AWG-bolt) (mm2–bolt) ft-lbs (N-m)
400V
1 0.75 SJ300-007HFU/E M4 20–#10 1.25–4 1.1 1.5
2 1.5 SJ300-015HFU/E M4 14–#10 2–4 1.1 1.5
3 2.2 SJ300-022HFU/E M4 14–#10 2–4 1.1 1.5
5 4.0 SJ300-040HFU/E M4 14–#10 2–4 1.1 1.5
7.5 5.5 SJ300-055HFU/E M5 14–#12 2–5 1.8 2.5
10 7.5 SJ300-075HFU/E M5 10–#12 3.5–5 1.8 2.5
15 11 SJ300-110HFU/E M6 8–1/4 5.5–6 3.6 4.9
20 15 SJ300-150HFU/E M6 6–1/4 8–6 3.6 4.9
25 18.5 SJ300-185HFU/E M6 4–1/4 14–6 3.6 4.9
30 22 SJ300-220HFU/E M6 4–1/4 14–6 3.6 4.9
40 30 SJ300-300HFU/E M6 2–1/4 22–6 3.6 4.9
50 37 SJ300-370HFU/E M6 4–1/4 14–6 3.6 4.9
60 45 SJ300-450HFU/E M8 1/0–5/16 38–8 6.5 8.8
75 55 SJ300-550HFU/E M8 2–5/16 22–8 6.5 8.8
100 75 SJ300-750HFU/E M8 1–1/2 30–10 6.5 8.8
125 90 SJ300-900HFU/E M10 1/0–1/2 38–10 10.1 13.7
150 110 SJ300-110HFU/E M10 1/0–1/2 50–10 10.1 13.7
175 132 SJ300-1320HFE M10 2/0–1/2 80–10 10.1 13.7
200 150 SJ300-1500HFU M10 2/0–1/2 80–10 10.1 13.7
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–18
Step 6: In this step, you will connect wiring to
the input of the inverter. All models have the
same power connector terminals [R(L1)],
[S(L2)], and [T(L3)] for three-phase input. The
three phases may be connected in any order, as
they are isolated from chassis ground and do
not determine motor direction of rotation.
Please refer to the specifications label (on
the front or side of the inverter) for the
acceptable input voltage ranges!
NOTE: The wiring example to the right shows
an SJ300-037LFU inverter. The terminal
locations will vary, depending on the inverter
model (see below). Note the use of ring lug
connectors for a secure connection.
Please use the terminal arrangement below
corresponding to your inverter model.
6
Wire the Inverter
Input to a Supply
R
(L1)
V
(T2)
U
(T1)
W
(T3)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
PD
(+1)
RB
(RB)
P
(+)
N
(–) (G) (G)
R0
(R0)
T0
(T0)
R
(L1)
V
(T2)
U
(T1)
W
(T3)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
PD
(+1)
RB
(RB)
P
(+)
N
(–) (G) (G)
R0
(R0)
T0
(T0)
R
(L1)
V
(T2)
U
(T1)
W
(T3)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
PD
(+1)
P
(+)
N
(–) (G)(G)
R0
(R0)
T0
(T0)
R
(L1)
V
(T2)
U
(T1)
W
(T3)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
PD
(+1)
P
(+)
N
(–)
(G)(G)
R0
(R0)
T0
(T0)
–004LFU, –007 to –055LFU/ HFE, HFU
–150LFU, 185LFU, –300LFU, –370LFU,
–150 to –550HFE, HFU
–220LFU, –450LFU, –550LFU,
–750 to –1100HFE, HFU
–1320HFE, –1500HFU
–075LFU/HFE, HFU
–110LFU/HFE, HFU
Jumper
bar
Jumper
bar
Jumper
bar
Jumper
bar
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–19
NOTE: An inverter powered by a portable or emergency diesel power generator may result in a
distorted power waveform, overheating the generator. In general, the generator capacity should
be at least five times that of the inverter (kVA).
CAUTION: Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifications:
• Three phase 200 to 240V 50/60Hz
• Three phase 380 to 480V 50/60Hz
CAUTION: Be sure not to power a three-phase-only inverter with single phase power. Other-
wise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure not to connect an AC power supply to the output terminals. Otherwise,
there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of injury and/or fire.
CAUTION: Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the main power supply:
Adjustable frequency inverters with CE-filters (RFI-filter) and shielded (screened) motor
cables have a higher leakage current toward Earth GND. Especially at the moment of switching
ON this can cause an inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupter breakers. Because of the recti-
fier on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall the switch-off function
through small amounts of DC current. Please observe the following:
• Use only short time-invariant and pulse current-sensitive ground fault interrupter
breakers with higher trigger current.
• Other components should be secured with separate ground fault interrupter breakers.
• Ground fault interrupter breakers in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an
absolute protection against electric shock.
CAUTION: Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the main power supply to the inverter.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
CAUTION: For motor leads, ground fault interrupter breakers and electromagnetic contac-
tors, be sure to size these components properly (each must have the capacity for rated current
and voltage). Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
Power Output
RST
T1 T2 T3
UVW
L1 L3
NOTE:
L1, L2, L3:
Three-phase 200 to 240V 50/60 Hz
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50/60 Hz
L2
Power Input
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–20
Step 7: The process of motor selection is beyond the scope of this manual. However, it must be
a three-phase AC induction motor. It should also come with a chassis ground lug. If the motor
does not have three power input leads, stop the installation and verify the motor type. Other
guidelines for wiring the motor include:
• Use an inverter-grade motor for maximum motor life (1600V insulation).
• For standard motors, use an output filter if the wiring between the inverter and motor
exceeds 10 meters in length.
Simply connect the motor to the terminals
[U/T1], [V/T2], and [W/T3] indicated on
the inverter to the right. This is a good time
to connect the chassis ground lug on the
drive as well. The motor chassis ground
must also connect to the same point. Use a
star ground (single-point) arrangement, and
never daisy-chain the grounds (point-to-
point).
Use the same wire gauge on the motor and
chassis ground wiring as you used on the
power input wiring in the previous step.
After completing the wiring:
• Check the mechanical integrity of each
wire crimp and terminal connection.
• Replace the front panel and secure the
retention screw firmly.
Logic Control
Wiring
After completing the initial installation and powerup test in this chapter, you may need to wire
the logic signal connector for your application. For new inverter users/applications, we highly
recommend that you first complete the powerup test in this chapter without adding any logic
control wiring. Then you will be ready to set the required parameters for logic control as
covered in Chapter 4, Operations and Monitoring.
Step 8: After mounting and wiring the inverter,
remove any protective material covering the
inverter ventilation openings from Step 3. This
includes covers over the side ventilation ports
as well as the fan outlet area.
CAUTION: Failure to remove all vent opening
covers before electrical operation may result in
damage to the inverter.
7
Wire the Inverter
Output to Motor
To Powe r
Source
To MotorTo Chassis
Ground
8
Uncover the
Inverter Vents
Uncover the ventilation slots,
both sides
Uncover the fan outlet vents
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–21
Powerup Test
Step 9: After wiring the inverter and motor, you’re ready to do a powerup test. The procedure
that follows is designed for the first-time use of the drive. Please verify the following conditions
before conducting the powerup test:
• You have followed all the steps in this chapter up to this step.
• The inverter is new, and is securely mounted to a non-flammable vertical surface
• The inverter is connected to a power source and motor.
• No additional wiring of inverter connectors or terminals has been done.
• The power supply is reliable, and the motor is a known working unit, and the motor
nameplate ratings match the inverter ratings.
• The motor is securely mounted, and is not connected to any load.
Goals for the
Powerup Test
If there are any exceptions to the above conditions at this step, please take a moment to take any
measures necessary to reach this basic starting point. The specific goals of this powerup test
are:
1. Verify that the wiring to the power supply and motor is correct.
2. Demonstrate that the inverter and motor are generally compatible.
3. Give a brief introduction to the use of the built-in operator keypad.
The powerup test gives you an important starting point to ensure a safe and successful applica-
tion of the Hitachi inverter. We highly recommend performing this test before proceeding to the
other chapters in this manual.
Pre-test and
Operational
Precautions
The following instructions apply to the powerup test, or to any time the inverter is powered and
operating. Please study the following instructions and messages before proceeding with the
powerup test.
1. The power supply must have fusing suitable for the load. Check the fuse size chart
presented in Step 5, if necessary.
2. Be sure you have access to a disconnect switch for the drive input power if necessary.
However, do not turn OFF power to the inverter during its operation unless it is an
emergency.
3. Turn the inverter’s front panel potentiometer (if it exists) to the MIN position (fully counter-
clockwise).
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not to touch them.
Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high speed.
Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the
inverter. Otherwise, there is the danger of injury.
9
Perform the
Powerup Test
Powerup Test
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–22
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default
setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective
manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval.
Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage and/or injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Check the following before and during the powerup test. Otherwise, there is the
danger of equipment damage.
• Is the shorting bar between the [P] and [PD] terminals installed? DO NOT power or
operate the inverter if the jumper is removed.
• Is the direction of the motor rotation correct?
• Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration?
• Were the rpm and frequency meter readings as expected?
• Were there any abnormal motor vibrations or noise?
Powering the
Inverter
If you have followed all the steps, cautions and warnings up to this point, you’re ready to apply
power. After doing so, the following events should occur:
•The POWER LED will illuminate.
• The numeric (7-segment) LEDs will display a test pattern, then stop at
0.0
.
•The Hz LED will be ON.
If the motor starts running unexpectedly or any other problem occurs, press the STOP key. Only
if necessary should you remove power to the inverter as a remedy.
NOTE: If the inverter has been previously powered and programmed, the LEDs (other than the
POWER LED) may illuminate differently than as indicated above. If necessary, you can initial-
ize all parameters to the factory default settings. See “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on
page 6–9.
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–23
Using the Front Panel Keypad
Front Panel
Introduction
Please take a moment to familiarize yourself with the keypad layout shown in the figure below.
The display is used in programming the inverter’s parameters, as well as monitoring specific
parameter values during operation. Many functions are applicable only during the initial instal-
lation, while others are more useful for maintenance or monitoring.
Parameter Editing
and Controls
The front panel controls and indicators are described as follows:
•Run/Stop LED – ON when the inverter output is ON and the motor is developing torque,
and OFF when the inverter output is OFF (Stop Mode).
•Program/Monitor LED – This LED is ON when the inverter is ready for parameter editing
(Program Mode). It is normally OFF when the parameter display is monitoring data
(Monitor Mode). However, the PRG LED will be ON whenever you are monitoring the
value of parameter D001. (When the keypad is enabled as the frequency source via
A001=02, you can edit the inverter frequency directly from D001 monitor display by using
the Up/Down keys.)
•Run Key Enable LED – is ON when the inverter is ready to respond to the Run key, OFF
when the Run key is disabled.
•Run Key – Press this key to run the motor (the Run Enable LED must be ON first). Parame-
ter F004, Keypad Run Key Routing, determines whether the Run key generates a Run FWD
or Run REV command.
•Stop/Reset Key – Press this key to stop the motor when it is running (uses the programmed
deceleration rate). This key will also reset an alarm that has tripped.
•Potentiometer (OPE–SRE only) – allows an operator to directly set the motor speed when
the potentiometer is enabled for output frequency control.
•Potentiometer Enable LED – ON when the potentiometer is enabled for value entry.
(OPE–SRE only).
•Parameter Display – a 4-digit, 7-segment display for parameters and function codes.
•Display Units: Hertz/Volts/Amperes/kW/% – These LEDs indicate the units associated
with the parameter display. When the display is monitoring a parameter, the appropriate
LED is ON. In the case of kW units, both Volts and Amperes LEDs will be ON. An easy
way to remember this is that kW = (V x A)/1000.
•Power LED – This LED is ON when the power input to the inverter is ON.
•Alarm LED – This LED is ON when an alarm condition has tripped the inverter. Clearing
the alarm will turn this LED OFF again. See Chapter 6 for details on clearing alarms.
Hz
POWER
A
RUN
PRG
RUN STOP
RESET
MIN MAX
HITACHI
FUNC
12
%
ALARM
STR
VkW
Run/Stop LED
Program/Monitor LED
Run Key Enable LED
Run Key
Power LED
Alarm LED
Display Units LEDs
Hertz
Volts or Amperes
(kW = both ON)
Percent
Parameter Display
Potentiometer Enable LED
Potentiometer
Stop/Reset Key
50.0
Using the Front Panel Keypad
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–24
•Function Key – This key is used to navigate
through the lists of parameters and functions
for setting and monitoring parameter values.
•Up/Down ( , ) Keys – Use these
keys alternately to move up or down the lists
of parameter and functions shown in the
display, and increment/decrement values.
•Store ( ) Key – When the unit is in
Program Mode and the operator has edited a
parameter value, press the Store key to write
the new value to the EEPROM. This param-
eter is then displayed at powerup by default.
If you want to change the powerup default,
navigate to a new parameter value and press
the Store key.
Keys, Modes, and
Parameters
Purpose of the keypad is to provide a way to change modes and parameters. The term function
applies to both monitoring modes and parameters. These are all accessible through function
codes that are primarily 3 or 4-character codes. The various functions are separated into related
groups identifiable by the left-most character, as the table shows.
For example, function “A004” is the base frequency setting for the motor, typically 50 Hz or
60 Hz. To edit the parameter, the inverter must be in Program Mode (PGM LED will be ON).
You use the front panel keys to first select the function code “A004.” After displaying the value
for “A004,” use the Up/Down ( or ) keys to edit the value.
NOTE: The inverter 7-segment display shows lower case “b” and “d”, meaning the same as the
upper case letters “B” and “D” used in this manual (for uniformity “A to F”).
The inverter automatically switches into Monitor
Mode when you access “D” Group functions. It
switches into Program Mode when you access
any other group, because they all have editable
parameters. Error codes use the “E” Group, and
appear automatically when a fault event occurs.
Refer to “Monitoring Trip Events, History, &
Conditions” on page 6–5 for error code details.
Function
key
Up/Down
keys
Store
key
Hz
POWER
A
RUN
PRG
RUN STOP
RESET
MIN MAX
HITACHI
FUNC
12
%
ALARM
STR
VkW
50.0
12
STR
Function
Group Type (Category) of Function Mode to Access PGM LED
Indicator
“D” Monitoring functions Monitor or
“F” Main profile parameters Program
“A” Standard functions Program
“B” Fine tuning functions Program
“C” Intelligent terminal functions Program
“H” Motor constant functions Program
“P” Expansion card functions Program
“U” User-selectable menu functions Monitor
“E” Error codes — —
12
“D” Group
“A” Group
“B” Group
“C” Group
“H” Group
“P” Group
“U” Group
“F” Group
MONITOR PROGRAM
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–25
Keypad
Navigational Map
The SJ300 Series inverter drives have many programmable functions and parameters. Chapter 3
will cover these in detail, but you need to access just a few items to perform the powerup test.
The menu structure makes use of function codes and parameter codes to allow programming
and monitoring with only a 4-digit display and a few keys and LEDs. So, it is important to
become familiar with the basic navigational map of parameters and functions in the diagram
below. You can later use this map as a reference.
12
2
1
Write
data to
EEPROM,
store as
powerup
default
Increment/
decrement
value
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
Select ParameterSelect Function
Display Data
2
Return to
parameter
list
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
Edit Parameter
FUNC.
FUNC.
FUNC.
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
do90
U–––
P–––
H–––
C–––
b–––
A–––
Uo1 2
Uo01
Po49
Po01
ho72
ho01
c1 23
co01
b126
bo01
a1 32
ao01
123.4
0.00
do01
Fo04
Fo01
FUNC.
FUNC.
FUNC.
2
1
Po49
d001
FUNC.
STR
FUNC.
D002–D090
Edit
0.00
D001
Edit
PRG LED
PRG LED
Increment/
decrement
value
12
FUNC.
Write data
to F001,
store D001
as power-
up default
STR
FUNC.
STR
Store as
powerup
default
Monitor Mode Program Mode
Using the Front Panel Keypad
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–26
Selecting
Functions and
Editing Parame-
ters
In order to run the motor for the powerup test, this section will show how to:
• select the inverter’s maximum output frequency to the motor
• select the keypad potentiometer as the source of motor speed command
• select the keypad as the source of the RUN command
• set the number of poles for the motor
• enable the RUN command
The following series of programming tables are designed for successive use. Each table uses
the previous table’s final state as the starting point. Therefore, start with the first and continue
programming until the last one. If you get lost or concerned that some of the other parameters
settings may be incorrect, refer to “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–9.
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default
setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective
manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval.
Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage.
Setting the Motor Base Frequency -The motor is designed to operate at a specific AC
frequency. Most commercial motors are designed for 50/60 Hz operation. First, check the
motor specifications. Then follow the steps in the table below to verify the setting or correct for
your motor. DO NOT set it for greater than 50/60 Hz unless the motor manufacturer specifi-
cally approves operation at the higher frequency.
TIP: If you need to scroll through a function or parameter list, press and hold the or
key to auto-increment through the list.
Action Display Func./Parameter
Press the key. Monitor functions
Press the or keys until -> “A” Group selected
Press the key. First “A” parameter
Press the key twice. Base frequency setting
Press the key.
or
Default value for base frequency
US = 60 Hz, Europe = 50 Hz
Press the or key as needed. Set to your motor specs (your
display may be different)
Press the key. Stores parameter, returns to “A”
Group list
FUNC
d001
12
A–––
FUNC
A001
1
A003
FUNC
60
50
12
60
STR A003
12
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–27
Select the Potentiometer for Speed Command - The motor speed may be controlled from the
following sources:
• Potentiometer on front panel keypad (if present)
• Control terminals
• Remote panel
Then follow the steps in the table below to select the potentiometer for the speed command (the
table resumes action from the end of the previous table).
Select the Keypad for the RUN Command - The RUN command causes the inverter to accel-
erate the motor to the selected speed. You can program the inverter to respond to either the
control terminal signal or the keypad RUN key. Follow the steps in the table below to select the
front panel RUN key as the source for the RUN Command (the table resumes action from the
end of the previous table).
NOTE: When you press the STR key in the last step above (and the display = 02), the Run
Enable LED above the RUN switch on the keypad will turn ON. This is normal, and does not
mean the motor is trying to run. It means that the RUN key is now enabled.
DO NOT press the RUN key at this time—finish out the programming exercise first.
Action Display Func./Parameter
Press the key twice. Speed command source setting
Press the key. 0 = potentiometer
1 = control terminals (default)
2 = keypad
Press the key. 0 = potentiometer (selected)
Press the key. Stores parameter, returns to “A”
Group list
Action Display Func./Parameter
Press the key. Run command source
Press the key. 1 = control terminals (default)
2 = keypad
Press the key. 2 = keypad (selected)
Press the key. Stores parameter, returns to “A”
Group list
2
A001
FUNC
01
2
00
STR A001
1
A002
FUNC
01
1
02
STR A002
Using the Front Panel Keypad
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–28
Configure the Inverter for the Number of Motor Poles- The number of magnetic poles of a
motor is determined by the motor’s internal winding arrangement. The specifications label on
the motor usually indicates its number of poles. For proper operation, verify the parameter
setting matches the motor poles. Many industrial motors have four poles, corresponding to the
default setting in the inverter.
Follow the steps in the table below to verify the motor poles setting and change it if necessary
(the table resumes action from the end of the previous table.)
This step concludes the parameter setups for the inverter. You are almost ready to run the motor
for the first time!
TIP: If you became lost during any of these steps, first observe the state of the PRG LED. Then
study the “Keypad Navigational Map” on page 2–25 to determine the current state of the
keypad controls and display. As long as you do not press the STR key, no parameters will be
changed by keypad entry errors. Note that power cycling the inverter will not cause it to reset to
a particular programming state.
The next section will show you how to monitor a particular parameter from the display. Then
you will be ready to run the motor.
Action Display Func./Parameter
Press the key. “A” Group selected
Press the key three times. “H” Group selected
Press the key. First “H” parameter
Press the key five times. Motor poles parameter
Press the key. 2 = 2 poles
4 = 4 poles (default)
6 = 6 poles
8 = 8 poles
Press the or key as needed. Set to match your motor (your
display may be different)
Press the key. Stores parameter, returns to “H”
Group list
FUNC
A–––
1
h–––
FUNC
h001
1
h004
FUNC
4
12
4
STR h004
SJ300 Inverter
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–29
Monitoring
Parameters with
the Display
After using the keypad for parameter
editing, it’s a good idea to switch the
inverter from Program Mode to Monitor
Mode. This will turn out the PRG LED, and
the Hertz, Volt, Ampere, or % LED
indicates the display units.
For the powerup test, monitor the motor speed indirectly by viewing the inverter’s output
frequency. The output frequency must not be confused with base frequency (50/60 Hz) of the
motor, or the carrier frequency (switching frequency of the inverter, in the kHz range). The
monitoring functions are in the “D” list, located near the top left of the diagram in the “Keypad
Navigational Map” on page 2–25.
Output frequency (speed) monitor - Resuming the keypad programming from the previous
table, follow the steps in the table below.
When the
d
01
function code appeared, the PRG LED went OFF. This confirms the inverter is
no longer in programming mode, even while you are selecting the particular monitoring param-
eter. After pressing the key, the display shows the current speed (is zero at this point).
Running the
Motor
If you have programmed all the parameters up to this point, you’re ready to run the motor!
First, review this checklist:
1. Verify the Power LED is ON. If not, check the power connections.
2. Verify the Run Key Enable LED is ON. If not, review the programming steps to find the
problem.
3. Verify the PRG LED is OFF. If it is ON, review the instructions above.
4. Make sure the motor is disconnected from any mechanical load.
5. Turn the potentiometer to the MIN position (completely counterclockwise).
6. Now, press the RUN key on the keypad. The RUN LED will turn ON.
7. Slowly increase the potentiometer setting in clockwise fashion. The motor should start
turning when the indicator is in the 9:00 position and beyond.
8. Press the STOP key to stop the motor rotation.
Action Display Func./Parameter
Press the key. “H” Group selected
Press the key. Output frequency selected
Press the key. Output frequency displayed
Hz
POWER
A
RUN
PRG
RUN STOP
RESET
MIN MAX
HITACHI
FUNC
12
%
ALARM
STR
VkW
50.0
FUNC
h–––
1
d001
FUNC
0.00
FUNC
Using the Front Panel Keypad
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
2–30
Step 10: Reading this section will help you make some useful observations when first running
the motor.
Error Codes - If the inverter displays an error code (LED format is “
Exx
”), see “Monitoring
Trip Events, History, & Conditions” on page 6–5 to interpret and clear the error.
Acceleration and Deceleration - The SJ300 inverter has programmable acceleration and
deceleration values. The test procedure left these at the default value, 10 seconds. You can
observe this by setting the potentiometer at about half speed before running the motor. Then
press RUN, and the motor will take 5 seconds to reach a steady speed. Press the STOP key to
see a 5 second deceleration to a stop.
State of Inverter at Stop - If you adjust the motor’s speed to zero, the motor will slow to a near
stop, and the inverter turns the outputs OFF. The high-performance SJ300 can rotate at a very
slow speed with high torque output, but not zero (must use servo systems with position
feedback for that feature). This characteristic means you must use a mechanical brake for some
applications.
Interpreting the Display - First, refer to the output frequency display readout. The maximum
frequency setting (parameter A004) defaults to 50 Hz or 60 Hz (Europe and United States,
respectively) for your application.
Example: Suppose a 4-pole motor is rated for 60 Hz operation, so the inverter is configured to
output 60 Hz at full scale. Use the following formula to calculate the RPM.
The theoretical speed for the motor is 1800 RPM (synchronous speed). However, an induction
motor cannot generate torque unless its shaft turns at a slightly different speed. This difference
is called slip. So it’s common to see a rated speed of approximately 1750 RPM on a 60 Hz, 4-
pole motor. Using a tachometer to measure shaft speed, you can see the difference between the
inverter output frequency and the actual motor speed. The slip increases slightly as the motor’s
load increases. This is why the inverter output value is called “frequency,” since it is not exactly
equal to motor speed. You can program the inverter to display output frequency in units more
directly related to the load speed by entering a constant (discussed more in depth on
page 3–41).
Run/Stop Versus Monitor/Program Modes –
The Run LED on the inverter is ON in Run Mode,
and OFF in Stop Mode. The Program LED is ON
when the inverter is in Program Mode, and OFF for
Monitor Mode. All four mode combinations are
possible. The diagram to the right depicts the
modes and the mode transitions via keypad.
NOTE: Some factory automation devices such as PLCs have alternate Run/Program modes;
the device is in either one mode or the other. In the Hitachi inverter, however, Run Mode alter-
nates with Stop Mode, and Program Mode alternates with Monitor Mode. This arrangement
lets you program some values while the inverter is operating—providing flexibility for mainte-
nance personnel.
10
Powerup Test
Observations and
Summary
RPM Frequency 60×
Pairs of poles
---------------------------------------- Frequency 120×
# of poles
------------------------------------------- 60 120×
4
---------------------1800RPM== ==
RUN
STOP
RESET
FUNC.
Run Stop
Monitor Program
Configuring
Drive Parameters
In This Chapter.... page
— Choosing a Programming Device ..................................................... 2
— Using Keypad Devices...................................................................... 3
— “D” Group: Monitoring Functions ...................................................... 6
— “F” Group: Main Profile Parameters.................................................. 8
— “A” Group: Standard Functions ......................................................... 9
— “B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions .................................................. 29
— “C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions ....................................... 47
— “H” Group: Motor Constants Functions........................................... 62
— “P” Group: Expansion Card Functions ............................................ 65
— “U” Group: User-selectable Menu Functions .................................. 67
— Programming Error Codes.............................................................. 68
3
Choosing a Programming Device
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–2
Choosing a Programming Device
Introduction Hitachi variable frequency drives (inverters) use the latest electronics technology for getting the
right AC waveform to the motor at the right time. The benefits are many, including energy
savings and higher machine output or productivity. The flexibility required to handle a broad
range of applications has required ever more configurable options and parameters—inverters
are now a complex industrial automation component. And this can make a product seem diffi-
cult to use, but the goal of this chapter is to make this easier for you.
As the powerup test in Chapter 2 demonstrated, you do not have to program very many param-
eters to run the motor. In fact, most applications would benefit only from programming just a
few, specific parameters. This chapter will explain the purpose of each set of parameters, and
help you choose the ones that are important to your application.
If you are developing a new application for the inverter and a motor, finding the right parame-
ters to change is mostly an exercise in optimization. Therefore, it is okay to begin running the
motor with a loosely tuned system. By making specific, individual changes and observing their
effects, you can achieve a finely tuned system. And, the SJ300 Series inverters have a built-in
auto-tuning algorithm to set certain motor parameters.
Inverter
Programming
Keypads
The front panel keypad is the first and best way to get to know the inverter’s capabilities. Every
function or programmable parameter is accessible from the keypad. All keypads have the same
basic layout, but with different features. The OPE–SRE has a potentiometer knob for frequency
setting input. The SRW–0EX Read/write Copy Unit has the ability to upload (copy) or
download (write) all inverter parameter data to/from memory in the copy unit itself. This unit is
useful in transferring one inverter’s settings to another.
The following table shows various programming options, the features unique to each device,
and the cables required.
TIP: Other special-purpose keypads are available, such as ones to serve the needs of the HVAC
market (heating, ventilating & air conditioning). Please contact your Hitachi distributor for
details.
Device Part
Number
Parameter
Access
Parameter
setting
storage
Cables (for optional
external mounting)
Part
number Length
Inverter keypad,
U.S. version
OPE–SRE Monitor and
program
EEPROM in
inverter
ICS–1 1 meter
ICS–3 3 meters
Inverter keypad,
European version
OPE–S Monitor and
program
EEPROM in
inverter
Use same two cables as
above
Read/write Copy
Unit with Keypad
SRW–0EX Monitor and
program; read or
write all data
EEPROM in
inverter or in
copy unit
Use same two cables as
above
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–3
Using Keypad Devices
Inverter Front
Panel Keypad
The SJ300 Series inverter front keypad contains all the elements for both monitoring and
programming parameters. The keypad layout (OPE–SRE) is shown below. All other program-
ming devices for the inverter have a similar key arrangement and function.
Key and
Indicator Legend
•Run/Stop LED – ON when the inverter output is ON and the motor is developing torque,
and OFF when the inverter output is OFF (Stop Mode).
•Program/Monitor LED – This LED is ON when the inverter is ready for parameter editing
(Program Mode). It is normally OFF when the parameter display is monitoring data
(Monitor Mode). However, the PRG LED will be ON whenever you are monitoring the
value of parameter D001. (When the keypad is enabled as the frequency source via
A001=02, you can edit the inverter frequency directly from D001 monitor display by using
the Up/Down keys.)
•Run Key – Press this key to run the motor (the Run Enable LED must be ON first). Parame-
ter F004, Keypad Run Key Routing, determines whether the Run key generates a Run FWD
or Run REV command.
•Run Key Enable LED – is ON when the inverter is ready to respond to the Run key, OFF
when the Run key is disabled.
•Stop/Reset Key – Press this key to stop the motor when it is running (uses the programmed
deceleration rate). This key will also reset an alarm that has tripped.
•Potentiometer (OPE–SRE only) – allows an operator to directly set the motor speed when
the potentiometer is enabled for output frequency control
•Potentiometer Enable LED – ON when the potentiometer is enabled for value entry
(OPE–SRE only).
•Parameter Display – a 4-digit, 7-segment display for parameters and function codes.
•Display Units: Hertz/Volts/Amperes/kW/% - These LEDs indicate the units associated
with the parameter display. When the display is monitoring a parameter, the appropriate
LED is ON. In the case of kW units, both Volts and Amperes LEDs will be ON. An easy
way to remember this is that kW = (V x A)/1000.
•Power LED – This LED is ON when the power input to the inverter is ON.
•Alarm LED – This LED is ON when an alarm condition has tripped the inverter. Clearing
the alarm will turn this LED OFF again. See Chapter 6 for details on clearing alarms.
•Function Key – This key is used to navigate through the lists of parameters and functions
for setting and monitoring parameter values.
•Up/Down ( , ) Keys – Use these keys to alternately move up or down the lists of
parameter and functions shown in the display, and increment/decrement values.
•Store ( ) Key – When the unit is in Program Mode and the operator has edited a param-
eter value, press the Store key to write the new value to the EEPROM. This parameter is then
displayed at powerup by default. If you want to change the powerup default, navigate to a
new parameter value and press the Store key.
Run/Stop LED
Program/Monitor LED
Run Key Enable LED
Run Key
Power LED
Alarm LED
Display Units LEDs
Hertz
Volts or Amperes
(kW = both ON)
Percent
Parameter Display
Potentiometer Enable LED
Potentiometer
Stop/Reset Key
Hz
POWER
A
RUN
PRG
RUN STOP
RESET
MIN MAX
HITACHI
FUNC
12
%
ALARM
STR
VkW
50.0
12
STR
Using Keypad Devices
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–4
Keypad
Navigational Map
Whether you use the keypad on the inverter or the read-write copy unit, each navigates the same
way. The diagram below shows the basic navigational map of parameters and functions.
NOTE: The inverter 7-segment display shows lower case “b” and “d”, meaning the same as the
upper case letters “B” and “D” used in this manual (for uniformity “A to F”).
12
2
1
Write
data to
EEPROM,
store as
powerup
default
Increment/
decrement
value
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
Select ParameterSelect Function
Display Data
2
Return to
parameter
list
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
Edit Parameter
FUNC.
FUNC.
FUNC.
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
do90
U–––
P–––
H–––
C–––
b–––
A–––
Uo1 2
Uo01
Po49
Po01
ho72
ho01
c1 23
co01
b126
bo01
a1 32
ao01
123.4
0.00
do01
Fo04
Fo01
FUNC.
FUNC.
FUNC.
2
1
Po49
d001
FUNC.
STR
FUNC.
D002–D090
Edit
0.00
D001
Edit
PRG LED
PRG LED
Increment/
decrement
value
12
FUNC.
Write data
to F001,
store D001
as power-
up default
STR
FUNC.
STR
Store as
powerup
default
Monitor Mode Program Mode
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–5
Operational
Modes
The RUN and PGM LEDs tell just part of the story;
Run Mode and Program Modes are independent
modes, not opposite modes. In the state diagram to
the right, Run alternates with Stop, and Program
Mode alternates with Monitor Mode. This is a very
important ability, for it shows that a technician can
approach a running machine and change some
parameters without shutting down the machine.
The occurrence of a fault during operation will
cause the inverter to enter the Trip Mode as shown.
An event such as an output overload will cause the
inverter to exit the Run Mode and turn OFF its
output to the motor. In the Trip Mode, any request
to run the motor is ignored. You must clear the
error by pressing the Stop/Reset switch. See
“Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions”
on page 6–5.
Run Mode Edits The inverter can be in Run Mode (inverter output is controlling motor) and still allow you to
edit certain parameters. This is useful in applications that must run continuously, yet need some
inverter parameter adjustment.
The parameter tables in this chapter have a column titled “Run Mode
Edit.” An Ex mark ✘ means the parameter cannot be edited; a Check
mark ✔ means the parameter can be edited. You’ll notice in the table
example to the right the two adjacent marks: “✘ ✔”. The two marks
(that can also be “✘ ✘” or “✔ ✔”) correspond to these levels of access
to editing:
• Low-access level to Run Mode edits (indicated by left-most mark)
• High-access level to Run Mode edits (indicated by right-most mark)
The Software Lock Setting (parameter B031) determines the particular access level that is in
effect during Run Mode and access in other conditions, as well. It is the responsibility of the
user to choose a useful and safe software lock setting for the inverter operating conditions and
personnel. Please refer to “Software Lock Mode” on page 3–36 for more information.
Control
Algorithms
The motor control program in the SJ300
inverter has several sinusoidal PWM
switching algorithms. The intent is that you
select the best algorithm for the motor
characteristics in your application. Each
algorithm generates the frequency output in
a unique way. Once configured, the
algorithm is the basis for other parameter
settings as well (see “Torque Control
Algorithms” on page 3–14). Therefore,
choose the best algorithm early in your
application design process.
RUN
STOP
RESET
FUNC.
Run Stop
Monitor Program
RUN
STOP
RESET
STOP
RESET
Run Stop
Fault
Tr i p Fault
Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
✘ ✔
Output
V/f control,
constant torque
V/f control,
variable torque
V/f control, free-
setting curve
Inverter Control Algorithms
Sensorless vector
(SLV) control
SLV control,
0Hz domain
Vector control with
sensor
“D” Group: Monitoring Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–6
“D” Group: Monitoring Functions
Parameter
Monitoring
Functions
You can access important system parameter values with the “D” Group monitoring functions,
whether the inverter is in Run Mode or Stop Mode. After selecting the function code number
for the parameter you want to monitor, press the Function key once to show the value on the
display. In Functions D005 and D006 the intelligent terminals use individual segments of the
display to show ON/OFF status.
“D” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Range
and Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description
D001 Output frequency monitor Real-time display of output
frequency to motor, from 0.0 to
400.0 Hz
—0.0 to
400.0 Hz
FM 0000.00Hz
D002 Output current monitor Filtered display of output current
to motor (100 mS internal filter
time constant)
—AIout 0000.0A
D003 Rotation direction
monitor
Three different indications:
“F”. Forward
“o”. Stop
“r” Reverse
——Dir STOP
D004 Process variable (PV),
PID feedback monitor
Displays the scaled PID process
variable (feedback) value (A75 is
scale factor)
——PID-FB 0000.00%
D005 Intelligent input terminal
status
Displays the state of the intelligent
input terminals:
——IN-TM LLLLLLLLL
D006 Intelligent output terminal
status
Displays the state of the intelligent
output terminals:
——OUT-TM LLLLLL
D007 Scaled output frequency
monitor
Displays the output frequency
scaled by the constant in B86.
Decimal point indicates range:
XX.XX 0.00 to 99.99
XXX.X 100.0 to 999.9
XXXX. 1000 to 9999
XXXX 10000 to 99990
—User-
defined
F-CNV 000000.00
D012 Torque monitor Estimated output torque value,
range is -300.0 to +300.0%
—%TRQ +000%
D013 Output voltage monitor Voltage of output to motor,
range is 0.0 to 600.0V
—VAC Vout 000.0V
ON
OFF
123456
Terminal numbers
78
FW
ON
OFF
11
Terminal numbers
12
13
1415AL
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–7
Trip Event and
Programming
Error Monitoring
The trip event and history monitoring feature lets you cycle through related information using
the keypad. See “Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions” on page 6–5 for more details.
Programming errors generate an error code that begins with the special character. See
“Programming Error Codes” on page 3–68 for more information.
D014 Power monitor 0.0 to 999.9 — kW Power 000.0kW
D016 Cumulative operation
RUN time monitor
Displays total time the inverter has
been in RUN mode in hours.
Range is 0 to 9999 / 1000 to 9999/
100 to 999 (10,000 to 99,900) hrs.
—hours RUN 0000000hr
D017 Cumulative power-on
time monitor
Displays total time the inverter has
had input power (ON) in hours.
Range is:
0 to 9999 / 100.0 to 999.9 /
1000 to 9999 / 100 to 999 hrs.
—hours ON 0000000hr
“D” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Range
and Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description
“D” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Range
and Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description
D080 Trip Counter Number of trip events — — ERR COUNT 00000
D081
to
D086
Trip monitor 1 to 6 Displays trip event information — — (Trip event type)
D090 Programming error
monitor
Displays programming error code — — XXXX
“F” Group: Main Profile Parameters
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–8
“F” Group: Main Profile Parameters
The basic frequency (speed) profile is
defined by parameters contained in the
“F” Group as shown to the right. The
output frequency is set in Hz, but accel-
eration and deceleration are specified
seconds (the time to ramp from zero to
maximum frequency, or from maximum
frequency to zero). The motor direction
parameter determines whether the
keypad Run key produces a FW or RV
command. This parameter does not
affect the [FW] terminal or [RV] intelligent terminal function, which you configure separately.
Acceleration 1 and Deceleration 1 are the standard default accel and decel values for the main
profile. Accel and decel values for an alternative profile are specified by using parameters Ax92
through Ax93. The motor direction selection (F004) determines the direction of rotation as
commanded only from the keypad. This setting applies to any motor profile (1st, 2nd, or 3rd) in
use at a particular time.
Output
frequency
F001
F002 F003
t
“F” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
F001 Output frequency
setting
Standard default target
frequency that determines
constant motor speed
Range is 0 to 400 Hz
✔ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >F001 SET-Freq.
TM 0000.00Hz
2FS 0000.00Hz
3FS 0000.00Hz
TM 0000.00Hz
JG 0000.00Hz
1S 0000.00Hz
15S 0000.00Hz
OP1 0000.00Hz
OP2 0000.00Hz
RS485 0000.00Hz
F002 Acceleration (1) time
setting
Standard default accelera-
tion
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 30.0 30.0 30.0 sec. >F002 ACCEL
TIME1 0030.00s
F202 Acceleration (1) time
setting, 2nd motor
Standard default accelera-
tion, 2nd motor
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 30.0 30.0 30.0 sec. >F202 2ACCEL
TIME1 0030.00s
F302 Acceleration (1) time
setting, 3rd motor
Standard default accelera-
tion, 3rd motor
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 30.0 30.0 30.0 sec. >F302 3ACCEL
TIME1 0030.00s
F003 Deceleration (1) time
setting
Standard default decelera-
tion
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 30.0 30.0 30.0 sec. >F003 DECEL
TIME1 0030.00s
F203 Deceleration (1) time
setting, 2nd motor
Standard default decelera-
tion, 2nd motor
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 30.0 30.0 30.0 sec. >F203 2DECEL
TIME1 0030.00s
F303 Deceleration (1) time
setting, 3rd motor
Standard default decelera-
tion, 3rd motor
Range is 0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 30.0 30.0 30.0 sec. >F303 3DECEL
TIME1 0030.00s
F004 Keypad Run key routing Two options; select codes:
00 Forward
01 Reverse
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >F004 DIG-RUN
SELECT FW
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–9
“A” Group: Standard Functions
Basic Parameter
Settings
These settings affect the most fundamental behavior of the inverter—the outputs to the motor.
The frequency of the inverter’s AC output determines the motor speed. You may select from
three different sources for the reference speed. During application development you may prefer
using the potentiometer, but you may switch to an external source (control terminal setting) in
the finished application, for example.
The base frequency and maximum frequency settings interact according to the graph below
(left). The inverter output operation follows the constant V/f curve until it reaches the full-scale
output voltage. This initial straight line is the constant-torque part of the operating characteris-
tic. The horizontal line over to the maximum frequency serves to let the motor run faster, but at
a reduced torque. This is the constant-horsepower part of the characteristic. If you want the
motor to output constant torque over its entire operating range (limited to the motor nameplate
voltage and frequency rating), then set the base frequency and maximum frequency equal as
shown (below right).
NOTE: The “2nd motor” and “3rd motor” settings in the tables in this chapter store an alter-
nate set of parameters for additional motors. The inverter can use the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd set of
parameters to generate the output frequency to the motor. See “Configuring the Inverter for
Multiple Motors” on page 4–72.
Base
Frequency
Maximum
Frequency
Base frequency =
maximum frequency
A003 A004
A003
A004
t
t
00
100% 100%
V
V
Constant torque
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A001 Frequency source
setting
Six options; select codes:
00 Keypad potentiometer
01 Control terminal
02 Function F001 setting
03 RS485 serial command
04 Expansion board 1
05 Expansion board 2
✘ ✘ 01 01 02 — >A001 F-SET
SELECT TRM
A002 Run command source
setting
Five options; select codes:
01 Input terminal [FW] or
[RV] (assignable)
02 Run key on keypad, or
digital operator
03 RS485 serial command
04 Start/Stop, expansion
card #1
05 Start/Stop, expansion
card #2
✘ ✘ 01 01 02 — >A002 F/R
SELECT TRM
A003 Base frequency setting Settable from 30 Hz to the
maximum frequency
✘ ✘ 50. 60. 60. Hz >A003 F-BASE
F 0060Hz
“A” Group: Standard Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–10
NOTE: The base frequency must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency (ensure that
A003 ≤ A004).
A203 Base frequency setting,
2nd motor
Settable from 30 Hz to the
maximum frequency
✘ ✘ 50. 60. 60. Hz >A203 2F-BASE
F 0060Hz
A303 Base frequency setting,
3rd motor
Settable from 30 Hz to the
maximum frequency
✘ ✘ 50. 60. 60. Hz >A303 3F-BASE
F 0060Hz
A004 Maximum frequency
setting
Settable from 30 Hz to
400 Hz
✘ ✘ 50. 60. 60. Hz >A004 F-max
F 0060Hz
A204 Maximum frequency
setting, 2nd motor
Settable from 30 Hz to
400 Hz
✘ ✘ 50. 60. 60. Hz >A204 2F-max
F 0060Hz
A304 Maximum frequency
setting, 3rd motor
Settable from 30 Hz to
400 Hz
✘ ✘ 50. 60. 60. Hz >A304 3F-max
F 0060Hz
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–11
Analog Input
Settings
The inverter has the capability to accept external analog inputs that can command the output
frequency to the motor. Signals including voltage input (0 to +10V) at terminal [O], bipolar
input (-10 to +10V) at terminal [O2], and current input (4 to 20mA) at terminal [OI] are avail-
able. Terminal [L] serves as signal ground for the three analog inputs. The analog input settings
adjust the curve characteristics between the analog input and the frequency output.
Adjusting [O–L] characteristics – In the
graph to the right, A013 and A014 select
the active portion of the input voltage
range. Parameters A011 and A012 select
the start and end frequency of the
converted output frequency range, respec-
tively. Together, these four parameters
define the major line segment as shown.
When the line does not begin at the origin
(A011 and A013 > 0), then A015 defines
whether the inverter outputs 0Hz or the
A011-specified frequency when the
analog input value is less than the A013
setting. When the input voltage is greater
than the A014 ending value, the inverter
outputs the ending frequency specified by
A012.
Adjusting [OI–L] characteristics – In
the graph to the right, A103 and A104
select the active portion of the input
current range. Parameters A101 and A102
select the start and end frequency of the
converted output frequency range, respec-
tively. Together, these four parameters
define the major line segment as shown.
When the line does not begin at the origin
(A101 and A103 > 0), then A105 defines
whether the inverter outputs 0Hz or the
A101-specified frequency when the
analog input value is less than the A103
setting. When the input voltage is greater
than the A104 ending value, the inverter
outputs the ending frequency specified by
A102.
Adjusting [O2–L] characteristics – In
the graph to the right, A113 and A114
select the active portion of the input
voltage range. Parameters A111 and
A112 select the start and end frequency of
the converted output frequency range,
respectively. Together, these four parame-
ters define the major line segment as
shown. When the input voltage is less
than the A113 input starting value, the
inverter outputs the starting frequency
specified by A111. When the input
voltage is greater than the A114 ending
value, the inverter outputs the ending
frequency specified by A112.
% input
100%
10V
0%
0V
fmax. frequency
A013 A014
A012
A011
A015=0
A015=1
% input
100%
20mA
0%
4mA
A102
fmax. frequency
A101
A103 A104
A105=0
A105=1
% input
+100%
+10V
0
A112
fmax. fwd frequency
A111
A113
A114
–100%
-10V
f
max. rev frequency
“A” Group: Standard Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–12
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A005 [AT] selection Two options; select codes:
00 Select between [O] and
[OI] at [AT]
01 Select between [O] and
[O2] at [AT]
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A005 AT
SELECT O/OI
A006 [O2] selection Three options; select codes:
00 No summing, [O2] and
[OI]
01 Sum of [O2] and [OI],
neg. sum (reverse speed
reference) inhibited
02 Sum of [O2] and [OI],
neg. sum (reverse speed
reference) allowed
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A006 O2
SELECT O2
A011 [O]–[L] input active
range start frequency
The output frequency corre-
sponding to the voltage input
range starting point
Range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A011 INPUT-O
EXS 0000.00Hz
A012 [O]–[L] input active
range end frequency
The output frequency corre-
sponding to the voltage input
range ending point
Range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A012 INPUT-O
EXE 0000.00Hz
A013 [O]–[L] input active
range start voltage
The starting point for the
voltage input range
Range is 0 to 100%
✘ ✔ 0. 0. 0. % >A013 INPUT-O
EX%S 000%
A014 [O]–[L] input active
range end voltage
The ending point for the
voltage input range
Range is 0 to 100%
✘ ✔ 100. 100. 100. % >A014 INPUT-O
EX%E 100%
A015 [O]–[L] input start
frequency enable
Two options; select codes:
00 Use A011 start value
01 Use 0 Hz
✘ ✔ 01 01 01 — >A015 INPUT-O
LEVEL 0Hz
A016 External frequency filter
time constant
Range n = 1 to 30, where n =
number of samples for avg.
✘ ✔ 8. 8. 8. Sam-
ples
>A016 INPUT
F-SAMP 08
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–13
Multi-speed and
Jog Frequency
Settings
The SJ300 inverter has the capability to store and output up to 16 preset frequencies to the
motor (A020 to A035). As in traditional motion terminology, we call this multi-speed profile
capability. These preset frequencies are selected by means of digital inputs to the inverter. The
inverter applies the current acceleration or deceleration setting to change from the current
output frequency to the new one. The first multi-speed setting is duplicated for the second
motor settings (the remaining 15 multi-speeds apply only to the first motor).
The jog speed setting is used whenever the Jog command is active. The jog speed setting range
is arbitrarily limited to 10 Hz to provide safety during manual operation. The acceleration to the
jog frequency is instantaneous, but you can choose from six modes for the best method for
stopping the jog operation.
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A019 Multi-speed operation
selection
Two options; select codes:
00 Binary; up to 16-stage
speed using 4 intelligent
terminals
01 Single-bit; up to 8-stage
speed using 7 intelligent
terminals
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A019 SPEED
SELECT BINARY
A020 Multi-speed frequency
setting
Defines the first speed of a
multi-speed profile, range is
0 to 360 Hz
A020 = Speed 1 (1st motor)
✔ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A020 SPEED
FS 0000.00Hz
A220 Multi-speed frequency
setting, 2nd motor
Defines the first speed of a
multi-speed profile for 2nd
motor, range is 0 to 360 Hz
A220 = Speed 1 (2nd motor)
✔ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A220 SPEED
2FS 0000.00Hz
A320 Multi-speed frequency
setting, 3rd motor
Defines the first speed of a
multi-speed profile for 3rd
motor, range is 0 to 360 Hz
A320 = Speed 1 (3rd motor)
✔ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A320 SPEED
3FS 0000.00Hz
A021
to
A035
Multi-speed frequency
settings
(for both motors)
Defines 15 more speeds,
range is 0 to 360 Hz.
A021 = Speed 2...
A035 = Speed 16
✔ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A021 SPEED
01S 0000.00Hz
A038 Jog frequency setting Defines limited speed for
jog, range is 0.5 to 9.99 Hz
✔ ✔ 1.00 1.00 1.00 Hz >A038 Jogging
F 01.00Hz
A039 Jog stop mode Define how end of jog stops
the motor; six options:
00 Free-run stop, jogging
disabled during motor
run
01 Controlled deceleration,
jogging disabled during
motor run
02 DC braking to stop,
jogging disabled during
motor run
03 Free-run stop, jogging
always enabled
04 Controlled deceleration,
jogging always enabled
05 DC braking to stop,
jogging always enabled
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >A039 Jogging
Mode FRS
“A” Group: Standard Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–14
Torque Control
Algorithms
The inverter generates the motor output
according to the V/f algorithm or the
sensorless vector control algorithm. Param-
eter A044 selects the inverter torque control
algorithm for generating the frequency
output, as shown in the diagram to the right
(A244 and A344 for 2nd and 3rd motors,
respectively). The factory default is 00
(constant torque V/f control).
Review the following descriptions to help
you choose the best torque control
algorithm for your application.
• The built-in V/f curves are oriented
toward developing constant torque or
variable torque characteristics (see
graphs below).
• The free-setting curve provides an even
more flexible characteristic, but it
requires more parameter settings.
• Sensorless vector control calculates an
ideal torque vector based on current
motor position, winding currents, and so
on. It is a more robust control method than the V/f control methods. However, it is more
dependent on actual motor parameters and will require you to set these values carefully or to
perform the auto-tuning procedure (see “Auto-tuning of Motor Constants” on page 4–67) to
obtain optimum performance.
• Sensorless vector control, 0Hz domain increases the low-speed torque performance (0–
2.5Hz) via an advanced Hitachi torque control algorithm. However, you will need to size the
inverter for one frame size larger than the motor for proper operation.
• Vector control with sensor requires expansion card SJ–FB encoder feedback board and a
motor shaft encoder. Choose this method when precise position/velocity control is required.
Constant and Variable Torque – The graph below (left) shows the constant torque character-
istic from 0Hz to the base frequency A003. The voltage remains constant for output frequencies
higher than the base frequency.
The graph above (right) shows the general characteristic for variable torque. The curve may be
best described in three sections, as follows:
a. The range from 0Hz to 10% of the base frequency is the constant torque characteristic.
For example, a base frequency of 60Hz ends the constant torque characteristic segment
at 6Hz.
b. The range from 10% of the base frequency to the base frequency is the variable
(reduced) torque characteristic. The voltage is output in the curve of frequency to the 1.7
power.
Output
V/f control,
constant torque
V/f control,
variable torque
V/f control, free-
setting curve
Inverter Torque Control Algorithms
Sensorless vector
(SLV) control
Sensorless vector,
0Hz domain
Vector control with
sensor
00
05
04
03
02
01
A044
Constant torque Variable torque
Maximum
frequency
Base
frequency
100%
100%
Maximum
frequency
Base
frequency
Output
voltage
Output
voltage
10% of
base
frequency
a. b. c.
00
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–15
c. After reaching the base frequency, the characteristic maintains a constant output voltage
for higher frequencies.
Using parameter A045 you can modify the voltage gain of the inverter. This is specified as a
percentage of the full-scale setting AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulation) in parameter A082.
The gain can be set from 20% to 100%. It must be adjusted in accordance with the motor speci-
fications.
Torque Boost – The Constant and
Variable Torque algorithms feature an
adjustable torque boost curve. When the
motor load has a lot of inertia or starting
friction, you may need to increase the
low frequency starting torque character-
istics by boosting the voltage above the
normal V/f ratio (shown at right). The
boost is applied from zero to 1/2 the
base frequency. You set the breakpoint
of the boost (point A on the graph) by
using parameters A042 and A043. The
manual boost is calculated as an
addition to the standard straight V/f line (constant torque curve).
Be aware that running the motor at a low speed for a long time can cause motor overheating.
This is particularly true when manual torque boost is ON or if the motor relies on a built-in fan
for cooling.
NOTE: Manual torque boost applies only to constant torque (A044=00) and variable torque
(A044=01) V/f control.
NOTE: The motor stabilization parameter H006 is effective for constant torque (A044=00) and
variable torque (A044=01) V/f control.
V/f Free-setting – The free-setting V/f inverter mode of operation uses voltage and frequency
parameter pairs to define seven points on a V/f graph. This provides a way to define a multi-
segment V/f curve that best suits your application.
The frequency settings do require that
F1 ≤ F2 ≤ F3 ≤ F4 ≤ F5 ≤ F6 ≤ F7; their
values must have this ascending order
relationship. However, the voltages V1
to V7 may either increase or decrease
from one to the next. The example to the
right shows the definition of a complex
curve by following the setting require-
ments.
Free-setting f7 (B112) becomes the
maximum frequency of the inverter.
Therefore, we recommend setting f7
first, since the initial value of all default
frequencies f1–f7 is 0Hz.
NOTE: The using of V/f free-setting operation specifies parameters that override (make
invalid) certain other parameters. The parameters that become invalid are torque boost (A041/
A241), base frequency (A003/A203/A303), and maximum frequency (A004/A204/A304). In
this case, we recommend leaving their settings at the factory default values.
f base =
60Hz
Torque boost
A042 = 10
A043 = 10%
frequency
100%
10%
0
V
A
6.0Hz 30.0Hz
Output voltage
Output
frequency
(even)
B101 to
B113
(odd)
B100 to B112
V7
V6
V5
V4
V1
V2, V3
0f1f2f3 f4f5f6f7Hz
“A” Group: Standard Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–16
The V/f free-setting endpoint f7/V7
parameters must stay within the more
basic inverter limits in order for the
specified free-setting characteristic
curve to be achieved. For example, the
inverter cannot output a higher voltage
than the input voltage or the AVR
setting voltage (Automatic Voltage
Regulation), set by parameter A082.
The graph to the right shows how the
inverter input voltage would clip (limit)
the characteristic curve if exceeded.
Sensorless Vector Control and, Sensorless Vector Control, 0Hz Domain – These advanced
torque control algorithms improve the torque performance at very low speeds:
• Sensorless Vector Control – improved torque control at output frequencies down to 0.5 Hz
• Sensorless Vector Control, 0Hz Domain – improved torque control at output frequencies
from 0 to 2.5 Hz.
These low-speed torque control algorithms must be tuned to match the characteristics of the
particular motor connected to your inverter. Simply using the default motor parameters in the
inverter will not work satisfactorily for these control methods. Chapter 4 discusses motor/
inverter size selection and how to set the motor parameters either manually or by using the
built-in auto-tuning. Before using the sensorless vector control methods, please refer to
“Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control” on page 4–65.
NOTE: When the inverter is in SLV (sensorless vector) mode, use B083 to set the carrier
frequency greater than 2.1 kHz for proper operation.
NOTE: You must disable sensorless vector operation when two or more motors are connected
(parallel operation) to the inverter.
Vector Control with Encoder Feedback – This method of torque control uses an encoder as a
motor shaft position sensor. Accurate position feedback allows the inverter to close the velocity
loop and provide very accurate speed control, even with variations in motor loads. To use
encoder feedback you will need to add an SJ–FB Encoder Feedback Card in the inverter’s
expansion bay. Please refer to “Expansion Cards” on page 5–5 in this manual or the SJ–FB
manual for details.
The following table shows the methods of torque control selection.
Output voltage
Output
frequency
(even)
B101 to
B113
(odd)
Voltage to output or AVR voltage
B100 to B112
V7
V6
0f6 f7 Hz
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A041 Torque boost method
selection
Two options:
00 Manual torque boost
01 Automatic torque boost
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A041 V-Boost
Mode MANUAL
A241 Torque boost method
selection, 2nd motor
Two options (for 2nd
motor):
00 Manual torque boost
01 Automatic torque boost
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A241 2V-Boost
Mode MANUAL
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–17
A042 Manual torque boost
value
Can boost starting torque
between 0 and 20% above
normal V/f curve, from 0 to
1/2 base frequency
✔ ✔ 1.0 1.0 1.0 — >A042 V-Boost
Code 01.0%
A242 Manual torque boost
value, 2nd motor
Can boost starting torque
between 0 and 20% above
normal V/f curve, from 0 to
1/2 base frequency
✔ ✔ 1.0 1.0 1.0 — >A242 2V-Boost
Code 01.0%
A342 Manual torque boost
value, 3rd motor
Can boost starting torque
between 0 and 20% above
normal V/f curve, from 0 to
1/2 base frequency
✔ ✔ 1.0 1.0 1.0 — >A342 3V-Boost
Code 01.0%
A043 Manual torque boost
frequency adjustment
Sets the frequency of the
V/f breakpoint A in graph
(top of previous page) for
torque boost
✔ ✔ 5.0 5.0 5.0 % >A043 V-Boost
F 05.0%
A243 Manual torque boost
frequency adjustment,
2nd motor
Sets the frequency of the
V/f breakpoint A in graph
(top of previous page) for
torque boost
✔ ✔ 5.0 5.0 5.0 % >A243 2V-Boost
F 05.0%
A343 Manual torque boost
frequency adjustment,
3rd motor
Sets the frequency of the
V/f breakpoint A in graph
(top of previous page) for
torque boost
✔ ✔ 5.0 5.0 5.0 % >A343 3V-Boost
F 05.0%
A044 V/f characteristic curve
selection, 1st motor
Six torque control modes:
00 V/f constant torque
01 V/f variable torque
02 V/f free-setting curve
03 Sensorless vector SLV
04 0Hz domain SLV
05 Vector control with
encoder feedback
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A044 Control
1st VC
A244 V/f characteristic curve
selection, 2nd motor
Six torque control modes:
00 V/f constant torque
01 V/f variable torque
02 V/f free-setting curve
03 Sensorless vector SLV
04 0Hz domain SLV
05 Vector control with
encoder feedback
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A244 2Control
2nd VC
A344 V/f characteristic curve
selection, 3rd motor
Six torque control modes:
00 V/f constant torque
01 V/f variable torque
02 V/f free-setting curve
03 Sensorless vector SLV
04 0Hz domain SLV
05 Vector control with
encoder feedback
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A344 3Control
3rd VC
A045 V/f gain setting Sets voltage gain of the
inverter from 20 to 100%
✔ ✔ 100.100.100. % >A045 V-Gain
Gain 100%
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
“A” Group: Standard Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–18
DC Braking
Settings
The DC braking feature can provide additional stopping torque when compared to a normal
deceleration to a stop. It can also ensure the motor and load are stopped before acceleration.
When decelerating – DC braking is
particularly useful at low speeds when
normal deceleration torque is minimal.
During deceleration, the inverter injects
a DC voltage into the motor windings
during deceleration below a frequency
you can specify (A052). The braking
power (A054) and duration (A055) can
both be set. You can optionally specify a
wait time before DC braking (A053),
during which the motor will free run
(coast).
When starting – You can also apply
DC braking upon the application of a
Run command, specifying both the DC
braking force level (A057) and the
duration (A058). This will serve to stop
the rotation of the motor and the load,
when the load is capable of driving the
motor. This effect, sometimes called
“windmilling,” is common in fan appli-
cations. Often, air moving in duct work
will drive the fan in a backward direc-
tion. If an inverter is started into such a backward-rotating load, over-current trips can occur.
Use DC braking as an “anti-windmilling” technique to stop the motor and load, and allow a
normal acceleration from a stop. See also the “Acceleration Pause Function” on page 3–21.
You can configure the inverter to apply DC braking at stopping only, at starting only, or both.
DC braking power (0–100%) can be set separately for stopping and starting cases.
You can configure DC braking to initiate in one of two ways:
1. Internal DC braking – Set A051=01 to enable internal braking. The inverter automatically
applies DC braking as configured (during stopping, starting, or both).
2. External DC braking – Configure an input terminal with option code 7 [DB] (see “Exter-
nal Signal for DC Injection Braking” on page 4–17 for more details). Leave A051=00,
although this setting is ignored when a [DB] input is configured. The DC braking force
settings (A054 and A057) still apply. However, the braking time settings (A055 and A058)
do not apply (see level and edge triggered descriptions below). Use A056 to select level or
edge detection for the external input.
a. Level triggered – When the [DB] input signal is ON, the inverter immediately applies
DC injection braking, whether the inverter is in Run Mode or Stop Mode. You control
DC braking time by the duration of the [DB] pulse.
b. Edge triggered – When the [DB] input transitions OFF-to-ON and the inverter is in Run
Mode, it will apply DC braking only until the motor stops... then DC braking is OFF.
During Stop Mode, the inverter ignores OFF-to-ON transitions. Therefore, do not use
edge triggered operation when you need DC braking before acceleration.
CAUTION: Be careful to avoid specifying a braking time that is long enough to cause motor
overheating. If you use DC braking, we recommend using a motor with a built-in thermistor
and wiring it to the inverter’s thermistor input (see “Thermistor Thermal Protection” on page 4–
28). Also refer to the motor manufacturer’s specifications for duty-cycle recommendations
during DC braking.
DC brakingFree runRunning
Output
voltage
A053 A055
A054
t
+
0
–
DC braking Running
Output
voltage
A058
A057
t
+
0
–
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–19
Derating of DC Braking – The inverter uses an internal carrier frequency (set by A059) to
generate a DC braking voltage (do not confuse with main inverter output carrier frequency set
by B083). The maximum DC braking force available to the inverter is more limited with higher
DC braking carrier frequency settings for A059 according to the graphs below.
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A051 DC braking enable Two options; select codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >A051 DCB
Mode OFF
A052 DC braking frequency
setting
The frequency at which DC
braking activates during
decel.
Range is 0.00 to 60.00 Hz
✘ ✔ 0.50 0.50 0.50 Hz >A052 DCB
F 00.50Hz
A053 DC braking wait time The delay after reaching the
DC braking frequency, or
[DB] signal, before DC
braking begins.
Range is 0.0 to 5.0 seconds
✘ ✔ 0.0 0.0 0.0 sec. >A053 DCB
WAIT 0.0s
A054 DC braking force during
deceleration
Variable DC braking force.
Range is from 0% to 100%
✘ ✔ 0. 0. 0. % >A054 DCB
STP-V 000%
A055 DC braking time for
deceleration
Sets the duration for DC
braking during decel. Range
is 0.0 to 60.0 seconds
✘ ✔ 0.0 0.0 0.0 sec. >A055 DCB
STP-T 00.0s
A056 DC braking / edge or
level detection for [DB]
input
Two options; select codes:
00 Edge detection
01 Level detection
✘ ✔ 01 01 01 — >A056 DCB
KIND LEVEL
A057 DC braking force for
starting
Variable DC braking force.
Range is 0 to 100%
✘ ✔ 0. 0. 0. % >A057 DCB
STA-V 000%
A058 DC braking time for
starting
Sets the duration for DC
braking before accel.
Range is 0.0 to 60.0 seconds
✘ ✔ 0.0 0.0 0.0 sec. >A058 DCB
STA-T 00.0s
A059 DC braking carrier
frequency setting
Range is 0.5 to 15 kHZ for
models up to –550xxx,
range is 0.5 to 10kHz for
750xxx to 1500xxx models
✘ ✘ 3.0 3.0 3.0 kHz >A059 DCB
CARRIER 05.0kHz
Max.braking
ratio (%)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
35791113
DC braking carrier frequency
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
3579
(10)
(22)
(34)
(46)
Max.braking
ratio (%)
DC braking carrier frequency
(10)
(20)
(40)
Models 75 – 132kW
Models 11 – 55kW
80
90
100
80
90
100
15
(75)
kHz10
(60)
kHz
“A” Group: Standard Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–20
Frequency-
related Functions
Frequency Limits – Upper and lower
limits can be imposed on the inverter
output frequency. These limits will apply
regardless of the source of the speed
reference. You can configure the lower
frequency limit to be greater than zero as
shown in the graph to the right. The upper
limit must not exceed the rating of the
motor or capability of the machinery.
Jump Frequencies – Some motors or machines exhibit resonances at particular speed(s),
which can be destructive for prolonged running at those speeds. The inverter has up to three
jump frequencies as shown in the graph. The hysteresis around the jump frequencies causes the
inverter output to skip around the sensitive frequency values.
Upper
limit
Frequency command
Lower
limit
Settable
range
A061
A062
Output frequency
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A061 Frequency upper limit
setting
Sets a limit on output
frequency less than the
maximum frequency (A004)
Range is 0.50 to 400.0 Hz
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.10 setting is enabled
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A061 LIMIT
HIGH 0000.00Hz
A261 Frequency upper limit
setting, 2nd motor
Sets a limit on output
frequency less than the
maximum frequency (A004)
Range is 0.50 to 400.0 Hz
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.10 setting is enabled
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A261 2LIMIT
HIGH 0000.00Hz
A062 Frequency lower limit
setting
Sets a limit on output
frequency greater than zero
Range is 0.50 to 400.0 Hz
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.1 setting is enabled
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A062 LIMIT
LOW 0000.00Hz
A262 Frequency lower limit
setting, 2nd motor
Sets a limit on output
frequency greater than zero
Range is 0.50 to 400.0 Hz
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.10 setting is enabled
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A262 2LIMIT
LOW 0000.00Hz
Frequency command
Jump frequencies
Output
frequency
Hysteresis values
A067
A065
A063 A064
A064
A066
A066
A068
A068
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–21
Acceleration
Pause Function
The acceleration pause function can be
used to minimize the occurrence of
over-current trips when accelerating
high inertia loads. It introduces a dwell
or pause in the acceleration ramp. You
can control the frequency at which this
dwell occurs (A069), and the duration
of the pause time (A070). This function
can also be used as an anti-windmilling
tool, when the load might have a
tendency to drive the motor in a reverse
direction while the inverter is in a Stop mode. Initiating a normal acceleration in such a situa-
tion may result in over-current trips. This function can be used to keep the inverter output
frequency and voltage at low levels long enough to bring the load to a stop, and commence
turning in the desired direction before the acceleration ramp resumes. See also “DC Braking
Settings” on page 3–18.
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A063
A065
A067
Jump (center) frequency
setting
Up to 3 output frequencies
can be defined for the output
to jump past to avoid motor
resonances (center
frequency)
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A063 JUMP
F1 0000.00Hz
>A065 JUMP
F2 0000.00Hz
>A067 JUMP
F3 0000.00Hz
A064
A066
A068
Jump (hysteresis)
frequency width setting
Defines the distance from
the center frequency at
which the jump occurs
Range is 0.0 to 10.0 Hz
✘ ✔ 0.50 0.50 0.50 Hz >A064 JUMP
W1 00.50Hz
>A066 JUMP
W2 00.50Hz
>A068 JUMP
W3 00.50Hz
Accel pause
period
Output
frequency
A070
A069
Set frequency
t
0
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A069 Acceleration pause
frequency setting
Range is 0.00 to 400.0Hz ✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A069 F-STOP
F 0000.00H
A070 Acceleration pause time
setting
Range is 0.0 to 60.0 sec. ✘ ✔ 0.0 0.0 0.0 sec. >A070 F-STOP
T 00.0s
“A” Group: Standard Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–22
PID Control When enabled, the built-in PID loop calculates an ideal inverter output value to cause a loop
feedback process variable (PV) to move closer in value to the setpoint (SP). The current
frequency command serves as the SP. The PID loop algorithm will read the analog input for the
process variable (you specify either current or voltage input) and calculate the output.
• A scale factor in A075 lets you multiply the PV by a factor, converting it into engineering
units for the process.
• Proportional, integral, and derivative gains are all adjustable.
• Optional – You can assign an intelligent input terminal the option code 23, PID Disable.
When active, this input disables PID operation. See “Intelligent Input Terminal Overview”
on page 3–49.
•See “PID Loop Operation” on page 4–71 for more information.
NOTE: The setting A073 for the integrator is the integrator’s time constant Ti, not the gain.
The integrator gain Ki = 1/Ti. When you set A073 = 0, the integrator is disabled.
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A071 PID Enable Enables PID function,
two option codes:
00 PID operation OFF
01 PID operation ON
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >A071 PID
SW OFF
A072 PID proportional gain Proportional gain has a
range of 0.2 to 5.0
✔ ✔ 1.0 1.0 1.0 — >A072 PID
P 1.0
A073 PID integral time
constant
Integral time constant has a
range of 0.0 to 3600 seconds
✔ ✔ 1.0 1.0 1.0 sec. >A073 PID
I 0001.0s
A074 PID derivative time
constant
Derivative time constant has
a range of 0.0 to 100 seconds
✔ ✔ 0.0 0.0 0.0 sec. >A074 PID
D 000.00
A075 PV scale conversion Process Variable (PV) scale
factor (multiplier), range of
0.01 to 99.99
✘ ✔ 1.00 1.00 1.00 — >A075 PID
CONV 001.00
A076 PV source setting Selects source of Process
Variable (PV), option codes:
00 [OI] terminal (current
input)
01 [O] terminal (voltage
input)
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >A076 PID
INPUT OI
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–23
Automatic
Voltag e
Regulation (AVR)
Function
The automatic voltage regulation (AVR) feature keeps the inverter output voltage at a
relatively constant amplitude during power input fluctuations. This can be useful if the installa-
tion is subject to input voltage disturbances. However, the inverter cannot boost its motor
output to a voltage higher than the power input voltage. If you enable this feature, be sure to
select the proper voltage class setting for your motor.
Energy Savings
Mode / Optimal
Accel/Decel
Energy Savings Mode – This function allows the inverter to deliver the minimum power
necessary to maintain speed at any given frequency. This works best when driving variable
torque characteristic loads such as fans and pumps. Parameter A085=01 enables this function
and A086 controls the degree of its effect. A setting of 0.0 yields slow response but high
accuracy, while a setting of 100 will yield a fast response with lower accuracy.
Optimal Accel/Decel Operation – This feature uses “fuzzy” logic to optimize acceleration
and deceleration curves in real time. It is enabled by A085=02. Optimal accel/decel operation
automatically adjusts the acceleration and deceleration times in response to changes in load or
inertia to take advantage of the maximum output current capability of the inverter. In general,
optimal accel/decel will allow for the shortest accel and decel times based on the actual load
conditions. The function continuously monitors output current and DC bus voltage to avoid
reaching their respective trip levels.
NOTE: In this mode, the settings of acceleration and deceleration times (F002 and F003) are
disregarded.
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A081 AVR function select Automatic (output) voltage
regulation, selects from
three type of AVR functions,
three option codes:
00 AVR enabled
01 AVR disabled
02 AVR enabled except
during deceleration
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A081 AVR
MODE DOFF
A082 AVR voltage select 200V class inverter settings:
200/215/220/230/240
400V class inverter settings:
380/400/415/440/460/
480
✘ ✘ 230/
400
230/
460
200/
400
V>A082 AVR
AC 230
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A085 Operation mode
selection
Three options:
00 Normal operation
01 Energy-saver operation
02 Optimal accel/decel
operation
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A085 RUN
MODE NOR
A086 Energy saving mode
tuning
Range is 0.0 to 100 sec. ✔ ✔ 50.050.050.0 sec.>A086 RUN
ECO 0050.0s
“A” Group: Standard Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–24
Optimal Accel/Decel Operation, continued...
The acceleration time is controlled to maintain output current below the level set by the
Overload Restriction Function if enabled (Parameters B021/B024, B022/B025, and B023/
B026). If Overload Restriction is not enabled, then the current limit used is 150% of the
inverter’s rated output current.
The deceleration time is controlled so that the output current is maintained below 150% of the
inverter’s rated current, and the DC bus voltage is maintained below the OV Trip level (358V or
770V).
NOTE: DO NOT use Optimal Accel/Decel (A085 = 02) when an application...
• has a requirement for constant acceleration or deceleration
• has a load inertia more than (approx.) 20 times the motor inertia
• uses internal or external regenerative braking
• uses any of the vector control modes (A044 = 03, 04, or 05). This function is ONLY
compatible with V/F control.
NOTE: If the load exceeds the rating of the inverter, the acceleration time may be increased.
NOTE: If using a motor with a capacity that is one size smaller than the inverter rating, enable
the Overload Restriction function (B021/B024) and set the Overload Restriction Level (B022/
B025) to 1.5 times the motor nameplate current.
NOTE: Be aware that the acceleration and deceleration times will vary, depending on the
actual load conditions during each individual operation of the inverter.
Second
Acceleration and
Deceleration
Functions
The SJ300 inverter features two-stage acceleration and deceleration ramps. This gives flexibil-
ity in the profile shape. You can specify the frequency transition point, the point at which the
standard acceleration (F002) or deceleration (F003) changes to the second acceleration (A092)
or deceleration (A093). These profile options are also available for the second motor settings
and third motor settings. All acceleration and deceleration times are time to ramp from zero
speed to full speed or full speed to zero speed. Select a transition method via A094 as depicted
below. Be careful not to confuse the second acceleration/deceleration settings with settings for
the second motor!
Accel 1
Accel 2
2CH
input
Accel 1
Accel 2
Frequency
transition point
A095
A094=00 A094=01
t
t
frequencyfrequency
0
0
1
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–25
NOTE: For A095 and A096 (and for 2nd motor settings), if you set a very rapid Acc1 or Dec1
time (less than 1.0 second), the inverter may not be able to change rates to Acc2 or Dec2 before
reaching the target frequency. In that case, the inverter decreases the rate of Acc1 or Dec1 in
order to achieve the second ramp to the target frequency.
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A092 Acceleration (2) time
setting
Duration of 2nd segment of
acceleration, range is:
0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 15.015.015.0 sec.>A092 ACCEL
TIME2 0015.00s
A292 Acceleration (2) time
setting, 2nd motor
Duration of 2nd segment of
acceleration, 2nd motor,
range is: 0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 15.015.015.0 sec.>A292 2ACCEL
TIME2 0015.00s
A392 Acceleration (2) time
setting, 3rd motor
Duration of 2nd segment of
acceleration, 2nd motor,
range is: 0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 15.015.015.0 sec.>A392 3ACCEL
TIME2 0015.00s
A093 Deceleration (2) time
setting
Duration of 2nd segment of
deceleration, range is:
0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 15.015.015.0 sec.>A093 DECEL
TIME2 0015.00s
A293 Deceleration (2) time
setting, 2nd motor
Duration of 2nd segment of
deceleration, 2nd motor,
range is: 0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 15.015.015.0 sec.>A293 2DECEL
TIME2 0015.00s
A393 Deceleration (2) time
setting, 3rd motor
Duration of 2nd segment of
deceleration, 2nd motor,
range is: 0.01 to 3600 sec.
✔ ✔ 15.015.015.0 sec.>A393 3DECEL
TIME2 0015.00s
A094 Select method to switch
to Acc2/Dec2 profile
Two options for switching
from1st to 2nd accel/decel:
00 2CH input from terminal
01 transition frequency
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A094 ACCEL
CHANGE TM
A294 Select method to switch
to Acc2/Dec2 profile,
2nd motor
Two options for switching
from1st to 2nd accel/decel:
00 2CH input from terminal
01 transition frequency (2nd
motor)
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A294 ACCEL
CHANGE TM
A095 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency
transition point
Output frequency at which
Accel1 switches to Accel2,
range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 Hz >A095 ACCEL
CHFr 0000.00Hz
A295 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency
transition point, 2nd
motor
Output frequency at which
Accel1 switches to Accel2,
range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
(2nd motor)
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 Hz >A295 2ACCEL
CHFr 0000.00Hz
A096 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
transition point
Output frequency at which
Decel1 switches to Decel2,
range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 Hz >A096 DECEL
CHFr 0000.00Hz
A296 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
transition point, 2nd
motor
Output frequency at which
Decel1 switches to Decel2,
range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
(2nd motor)
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 Hz >A296 2DECEL
CHFr 0000.00Hz
“A” Group: Standard Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–26
Accel/Decel
Characteristics
Standard (default) acceleration and deceleration is linear with time. The inverter CPU can also
calculate other curves shown in the graphs below. The sigmoid, U-shape, and reverse U-shape
curves are useful for favoring the load characteristics in particular applications. Curve settings
for acceleration and deceleration are independently selected via parameters A097 and A098,
respectively. You can use the same or different curve types for acceleration and deceleration.
time
Output frequency
time
Output frequency
time
Output frequency
time
Output frequency
time
Output frequency
time
Output frequency
time
Output frequency
time
Output frequency
Linear Sigmoid U-shape Reverse U-shape
Accel
A97
Decel
A98
00Set value
Curve
01 02 03
Linear acceleration
and deceleration for
general-purpose use
Avoid jerk on start/stop
for elevators; use for
delicate loads on con-
veyors
Tension control for winding applications, web
presses, roller/accumulators
Ty p i c a l
applications
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A097 Acceleration curve
selection
Set the characteristic curve
of Accel1 and Accel2, four
options:
00 Linear
01 S-curve
02 U-shape
03 Reverse U-shape
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A097 ACCEL
LINE Linear
A098 Deceleration curve
selection
Set the characteristic curve
of Decel1 and Decel2, four
options:
00 Linear
01 S-curve
02 U-shape
03 Reverse U-shape
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >A098 DECEL
LINE Linear
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–27
The acceleration and deceleration curves can deviate from a straight line to a varying degree.
Parameters A131 and A132 control the amount of deviation for the acceleration and decelera-
tion curves respectively. The following graphs show intermediate output frequency points as a
percentage of the target frequency, for 25%, 50%, and 75% acceleration time intervals.
time
Output frequency
25 50 75
% of target
time
Output frequency
25 50 75
% of target
time
Output frequency
25 50 75
% of target
3.1
17.6
82.4
96.9
100 100 100
99.6
93.8
87.5
68.4
64.6
35.0
65.0
35.4
31.6
12.5
6.25
0.39
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A131 Acceleration curve
constants setting
Sets the curve deviation
from straight-line accelera-
tion in ten levels:
01 smallest deviation
10 largest deviation
✘ ✔ 02 02 02 — >A131 ACCEL
GAIN 02
A132 Deceleration curve
constants setting
Sets the curve deviation
from straight-line decelera-
tion in ten levels:
01 smallest deviation
10 largest deviation
✘ ✔ 02 02 02 — >A132 DECEL
GAIN 02
“A” Group: Standard Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–28
Additional
Analog Input
Settings
The parameters in the following table adjust the input characteristics of the analog inputs.
When using the inputs to command the inverter output frequency, these parameters adjust the
starting and ending ranges for the voltage or current, as well as the output frequency range.
Related characteristic diagrams are located in “Analog Input Settings” on page 3–11.
“A” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
A101 [OI]–[L] input active
range start frequency
The output frequency corre-
sponding to the current input
range starting point.
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
✘ ✔ 00.0 00.0 00.0 Hz >A101 INPUT-OI
EXS 0000.00Hz
A102 [OI]–[L] input active
range end frequency
The output frequency corre-
sponding to the current input
range ending point.
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
✘ ✔ 00.0 00.0 00.0 Hz >A102 INPUT-OI
EXE 0000.00Hz
A103 [OI]–[L] input active
range start current
The starting point for the
current input range.
Range is 0 to 100%
✘ ✔ 20. 20. 20. % >A103 INPUT-OI
EX%S 020%
A104 [OI]–[L] input active
range end current
The ending point for the
current input range.
Range is 0 to 100%
✘ ✔ 100. 100. 100. % >A104 INPUT-OI
EX%E 100%
A105 [OI]–[L] input start
frequency enable
Two options:
00 Use A101 start value
01 Use 0Hz
✘ ✔ 01 01 01 Hz >A105 INPUT-OI
LEVEL 0Hz
A111 [O2]–[L] input active
range start frequency
The output frequency corre-
sponding to the bipolar
voltage input range starting
point.
Range is –400. to 400. Hz
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A111 INPUT-O2
EXS +000.00Hz
A112 [O2]–[L] input active
range end frequency
The output frequency corre-
sponding to the bipolar
voltage input range ending
point.
Range is –400. to 400. Hz
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >A112 INPUT-O2
EXE +000.00Hz
A113 [O2]–[L] input active
range start voltage
The starting point for the
bipolar voltage input range.
Range is –100 to 100%
✘ ✔ -100. -100. -100. % >A113 INPUT-O2
EX%S -100%
A114 [O2]–[L] input active
range end voltage
The ending point for the
bipolar voltage input range.
Range is –100 to 100%
✘ ✔ 100. 100. 100. % >A114 INPUT-O2
EX%E +100%
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–29
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
The “B” Group of functions and parameters adjust some of the more subtle but useful aspects
of motor control and system configuration.
Automatic
Restart Mode and
Phase Loss
The restart mode determines how the inverter will resume operation after a fault causes a trip
event. The four options provide advantages for various situations. Frequency matching allows
the inverter to read the motor speed by virtue of its residual magnetic flux and restart the output
at the corresponding frequency. The inverter can attempt a restart a certain number of times
depending on the particular trip event:
• Over-current trip, restart up to 3 times
• Over-voltage trip, restart up to 3 times
• Under-voltage trip, restart up to 16 times
When the inverter reaches the maximum number of restarts (3 or 16), you must power-cycle the
inverter to reset its operation.
Other parameters specify the allowable under-voltage level and the delay time before restarting.
The proper settings depend on the typical fault conditions for your application, the necessity of
restarting the process in unattended situations, and whether restarting is always safe.
Input
power
Motor
speed
Power failure
Inverter
output
Power failure > allowable power
fail time (B002), inverter trips
Input
power
Motor
speed
Inverter
output
Power failure < allowable power fail
time (B002), inverter resumes
Power failure
Retry wait time
Allowable
power fail time
Allowable
power fail time
free-runningfree-running
B002
B003
B002
tt00
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
B001 Selection of automatic
restart mode
Select inverter restart
method, four option codes:
00 Alarm output after trip,
automatic restart
disabled
01 Restart at 0Hz
02 Resume operation after
frequency matching
03 Resume previous freq.
after freq. matching, then
decelerate to stop and
display trip info
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b001 IPS
POWER ALM
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–30
CAUTION: When a loss of phase occurs, increased ripple current will markedly reduce main
capacitor life over time. Diode bridge failure can also result. If phase loss occurs under load,
the inverter could be damaged. Please pay particular attention to the setting of function B006.
Electronic
Thermal Overload
Alarm Setting
The thermal overload detection protects
the inverter and motor from overheating
due to an excessive load. It uses a current/
inverse time curve to determine the trip
point. The thermal overload alarm [THM]
is the resulting intelligent output.
First, use B013 to select the torque
characteristic that matches your load.
This allows the inverter to utilize the best
thermal overload characteristic for your
application.
B002 Allowable under-
voltage power failure
time
The amount of time a power
input under-voltage can
occur without tripping the
power failure alarm. If
under-voltage exists longer
than this time, the inverter
trips, even if the restart
mode is selected. If it exists
less than this time retry will
be attempted. Range is 0.3 to
1.0 sec.
✘ ✔ 1.0 1.0 1.0 sec. >b002 IPS
TIME 1.0s
B003 Retry wait time before
motor restart
Time delay after a trip
condition goes away before
the inverter restarts the
motor.
Range is 0.3 to 100 seconds.
✘ ✔ 1.0 1.0 1.0 sec. >b003 IPS
WAIT 001.0s
B004 Instantaneous power
failure / under-voltage
trip alarm enable
Three option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable
02 Disable during stop and
ramp to stop
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b004 IPS
TRIP OFF
B005 Number of restarts on
power failure / under-
voltage trip events
Two option codes:
00 Restart 16 times
01 Always restart
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b005 IPS
RETRY 16
B006 Phase loss detection
enable
Two option codes:
00 Disable – no trip on
phase loss
01 Enable – trip on phase
loss
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b006 PH-FAIL
SELECT OFF
B007 Restart frequency
threshold
When the frequency of the
motor is less than this value,
the inverter will restart at
0Hz.
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >b007 IPS
F 0000.00Hz
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
Output frequency
Constant torque
Reduced
torque
B013=01
B013=00
Trip current
reduction
factor
x 1.0
x 0.8
x 0.6
0 5 20 60 120 Hz
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–31
The torque developed in a motor is directly proportional to the current in the windings, which is
also proportional to the heat generated (and temperature, over time). Therefore, you must set
the thermal overload threshold in terms of current (amperes) with parameter B012. The range is
50% to 120% of the rated current for each inverter model. If the current exceeds the level you
specify, the inverter will trip and log an event (error E5) in the history table. The inverter turns
the motor output OFF when tripped. Separate settings are available for the second and third
motors (if applicable), as shown in the table below.
For example, suppose you have inverter model
SJ300-110LFE. The rated motor current is 46A.
The setting range is (0.2 * 46) to (1.2 *46), or
9.2A to 55.2A. For a setting of B012 = 46A
(current at 100%), the figure to the right shows
the curve.
The electronic thermal characteristic adjusts the
way the inverter calculates thermal heating,
based on the type of load connected to the motor,
as set by parameter B013.
CAUTION: When the motor runs at lower
speeds, the cooling effect of the motor’s internal
fan decreases.
The table below shows the torque profile settings. Use the one that matches your load.
Reduced Torque Characteristic – The example below shows the effect of the reduced torque
characteristic curve (for example motor and current rating). At 20Hz, the output current is
reduced by a factor of 0.8 for given trip times.
Function
Code Function/Description Data or Range
B012 / B212
/ B312
Electronic thermal setting (calculated
within the inverter from current output)
Range is 0.2 * rated current to
1.2 * rated current
Function Code Data Function/Description
B013 / B213 / B313
00 Reduced torque
01 Constant torque
02 Free-setting
Tr i p
time (s)
Trip current at 60 Hz
60
0.5
0
53.4 69 92
A
116% 150% 200%
Tr i p
time (s)
Reduced trip current at 20 Hz
Trip current
reduction
factor
x 1.0
x 0.8
x 0.6
0
520 60
Hz A
60
0.5
0
73.642.7 55.2
92.8% 120% 160%
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–32
Constant Torque Characteristic – Selecting the constant torque characteristic for the example
motor gives the curves below. At 2.5 Hz, the output current is reduced by a factor of 0.9 for
given trip times.
Free Thermal Characteristic - It is possible to set the electronic thermal characteristic using a
free-form curve defined by three data points, according to the table below.
The left graph below shows the region for possible free-setting curves. The right graph below
shows an example curve defined by three data points specified by B015 – B020.
Suppose the electronic thermal setting (B012) is set to 44 Amperes. The left graph below shows
the effect of the free setting torque characteristic curve. For example, at (B017) Hz, the output
current level to cause overheating in a fixed time period is reduced by a factor of (B018). The
right graph below shows the reduced trip current levels in those conditions for given trip times.
Function
Code Name Description Range
B015 / B017 /
B019
Free-setting electronic
thermal frequency 1, 2, 3
Data point coordinates for Hz axis
(horizontal) in the free-form curve
0 to 400Hz
B016 / B018 /
B020
Free setting electronic
thermal current 1, 2, 3
Data point coordinates for Ampere
axis (vertical) in the free-form curve
0.0 = (disable)
0.1 to 1000.
Tr i p
time (s)
Reduced trip current at 2.5 Hz
Trip current
reduction
factor
x 1.0
x 0.9
x 0.8
0
2.5 5 60
Hz A
60
0.5
0
82.847.8 62.1
104% 135% 180%
Output
current (A)
Setting range
max. freq.
B020
B018
B016
B015 B017 B019 Ax04
Trip current
reduction
factor
Output freq.
x 1.0
x 0.8
0
5400
Hz Hz
0
Tr i p
time (s)
(x) = B018 value x 116%
(y) = B018 value x 120%
(z) = B018 value x 150%
Reduced trip current at (B017) Hz
60
0
0.5
(x) (y) (z) A
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–33
Any intelligent output terminal may be programmed to indicate a thermal warning [THM].
Parameter C061 determines the warning threshold. Please see “Thermal Warning Signal” on
page 4–55 for more details.
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
B012 Level of electronic
thermal setting
Set a level between 50% and
120% of the inverter rated
current
✘ ✔ rated current for
each inverter model
%>b012 E-THM
LEVEL 0016.5A
B212 Level of electronic
thermal setting, 2nd
motor
Set a level between 50% and
120% of the inverter rated
current
✘ ✔ rated current for
each inverter model
%>b212 2E-THM
LEVEL 0016.5A
B312 Level of electronic
thermal setting, 3rd
motor
Set a level between 50% and
120% of the inverter rated
current
✘ ✔ rated current for
each inverter model
%>b312 3E-THM
LEVEL 0016.5A
B013 Electronic thermal
characteristic
Select from three curves,
option codes:
00 Reduced torque
01 Constant torque
02 V/f free-setting
✘ ✔ 01 01 00 — >b013 E-THM
CHAR CRT
B213 Electronic thermal
characteristic, 2nd
motor
Select from three curves,
option codes:
00 Reduced torque
01 Constant torque
02 V/f free-setting
✘ ✔ 01 01 00 — >b213 2E-THM
CHAR CRT
B313 Electronic thermal
characteristic, 3rd motor
Select from three curves,
option codes:
00 Reduced torque
01 Constant torque
02 V/f free-setting
✘ ✔ 01 01 00 — >b313 3E-THM
CHAR CRT
B015 Free setting, electronic
thermal frequency (1)
Range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz ✘ ✔ 0. 0. 0. Hz >b015 E-THM
F1 0000Hz
B016 Free setting, electronic
thermal current (1)
Range is 0.0 to 1000. A ✘ ✔ 0.0 0.0 0.0 A >b016 E-THM
A1 0000.0A
B017 Free setting, electronic
thermal frequency (2)
Range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz ✘ ✔ 0. 0. 0. Hz >b017 E-THM
F2 0000Hz
B018 Free setting, electronic
thermal current (2)
Range is 0.0 to 1000. A ✘ ✔ 0.0 0.0 0.0 A >b018 E-THM
A2 0000.0A
B019 Free setting, electronic
thermal frequency (3)
Range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz ✘ ✔ 0. 0. 0. Hz >b019 E-THM
F3 0000Hz
B020 Free setting, electronic
thermal current (3)
Range is 0.0 to 1000. A ✘ ✔ 0.0 0.0 0.0 A >b020 E-THM
A3 0000.0A
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–34
Overload
Restriction
If the inverter’s output current exceeds a
preset current level you specify during
acceleration or constant speed, the
overload restriction feature automati-
cally reduces the output frequency to
restrict the overload. This feature does
not generate an alarm or trip event. You
can instruct the inverter to apply
overload restriction only during
constant speed, thus allowing higher
currents for acceleration. Or, you may
use the same threshold for both acceler-
ation and constant speed. In the case of
controlled deceleration, the inverter monitors both output current and DC bus voltage. The
inverter will increase output frequency to try to avoid a trip due to over-current or over-voltage
(due to regeneration).
When the inverter detects an overload, it must decelerate the motor to reduce the current until it
is less than the threshold. You can choose the rate of deceleration that the inverter uses to lower
the output current.
Motor
Current
Output
Frequency
B023
B022
t
restriction area
0t
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
B021 Overload restriction
operation mode
Select the operating mode
during overload conditions,
four options, option codes:
00 Disabled
01 Enabled for acceleration
and constant speed
02 Enabled for constant
speed only
03 Enabled for accel, decel,
and constant speed
✘ ✔ 01 01 01 — >b021 OLOAD
1MODE ON
B022 Overload restriction
setting
Sets the level for overload
restriction, between 50%
and 200% of the rated
current of the inverter,
setting resolution is 1% of
rated current
✘ ✔ rated current times
1.50
A>b022 OLOAD
1LEVEL 0024.8A
B023 Deceleration rate at
overload restriction
Sets the deceleration rate
when inverter detects
overload, range is 0.1 to
30.0, resolution is 0.1.
✘ ✔ 1.00 1.00 1.00 sec. >b023 OLOAD
1CONST 01.00
B024 Overload restriction
operation mode (2)
Select the operating mode
during motor overload
conditions, four options,
option codes:
00 Disabled
01 Enabled for acceleration
and constant speed
02 Enabled for constant
speed only
03 Enabled for accel, decel,
and constant speed
✘ ✔ 01 01 01 — >b024 OLOAD
2MODE ON
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–35
NOTE: Two sets of overload restriction parameters are available. The set that is in use may be
selected by means of an intelligent input terminal (see “Overload Restriction” on page 4–35).
B025 Overload restriction
setting (2)
Sets the level for overload
restriction (2), between 50%
and 200% of the rated
current of the inverter,
setting resolution is 1% of
rated current
✘ ✔ rated current times
1.50
A>b025 OLOAD
2LEVEL 0024.8A
B026 Deceleration rate at
overload restriction (2)
Sets the deceleration rate (2)
when inverter detects
overload, range is 0.1 to
30.0, resolution is 0.1.
✘ ✔ 1.00 1.00 1.00 sec. >b026 OLOAD
2CONST 01.00
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–36
Software Lock
Mode
The software lock function keeps personnel from accidentally changing parameters in the
inverter memory. Use B031 to select from various protection levels.
The table below lists all combinations of B031 option codes and the
ON/OFF state of the [SFT] input. Each Check ✔ or Ex ✘ indicates
whether the corresponding parameter(s) can be edited. The Standard
Parameters column below lists Low and High level access for some
lock modes. These refer to the parameter tables throughout this
chapter, each of which includes a column titled Run Mode Edit as
shown to the right. The two marks (Check ✔ or Ex ✘) under the “Lo
Hi” subtitle indicate whether Low-level and/or High-level access
applies to each parameter as defined in the table below. In some lock modes, you can edit only
F001 and the Multi-speed parameter group that includes A020, A220, A320, A021–A035, and
A038 (Jog). However, it does not include A019, Multi-speed operation selection. The editing
access to B031 itself is unique, and is specified in the right-most two columns below.
NOTE: Since the software lock function B031 is always accessible when the motor is stopped,
this feature is not the same as password protection used in other industrial control devices.
NOTE: To disable parameter editing when using B031 lock modes 00 and 01, assign the [SFT]
function to one of the intelligent input terminals. See “Software Lock” on page 4–25.
B031
Lock
Mode
[SFT]
Intelligent
Input
Standard Parameters F001 and
Multi-speed B031
Stop Run Stop or Run Stop Run
00 OFF ✔Low-level ✔✔✘
ON ✘✘ ✘ ✔✘
01 OFF ✔Low-level ✔✔✘
ON ✘✘ ✔ ✔✘
02 (ignored) ✘✘ ✘ ✔✘
03 (ignored) ✘✘ ✔ ✔✘
10 (ignored) ✔High-level ✔✔✔
Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
✘ ✔
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–F
(Jpn)
B031 Software lock mode
selection
Prevents parameter changes
in five options:
00 Low-level access, [SFT]
input blocks all edits
01 Low-level access, [SFT]
input blocks edits
(except F001 and Multi-
speed parameters)
02 No access to edits
03 No access to edits except
F001 and Multi-speed
parameters
10 High-level access,
including B031
✘ ✔ 01 01 01 — >b031 S-LOCK
Mode MD1
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–37
Miscellaneous
Settings
The miscellaneous settings include scaling factors, initialization modes, and others. This
section covers some of the most important settings you may need to configure.
Function Code Display Restriction – The inverter has the (optional) capability to suppress the
display and editing of certain parameters. Use B037 to select the display options. The purpose
of this feature is to hide particular secondary parameters that become unused or not applicable
based on more fundamental parameter settings. For example, setting A001 = 01 configures the
inverter to get its frequency command from the front keypad potentiometer. In this case, the
inverter will not use the analog inputs nor their adjustment parameters for an external frequency
command.
For example, you can set B037=01 to have the inverter suppress the displaying of all analog
input parameters when A001=01, as shown in the first row of the following table.
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
B034 Run/power-on warning
time
Range is 0 to 65,530 hours ✘ ✔ 0. 0. 0. hrs. >b034 TIME
WARN 00000
B035 Rotational direction
restriction
Three option codes:
00 Enable for both dir.
01 Enable for forward only
02 Enable for reverse only
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >b035 LIMIT
F/R FREE
B036 Reduced voltage start
selection
Seven option codes:
00 Short
01, 02, 03, 04, 05 (middle)
06 Long
✘ ✔ 06 06 06 — >b036 RVS
ADJUST 06
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–F
(Jpn)
B037 Function code display
restriction
Three option codes:
00 Display all
01 Display only utilized
functions (see table
below)
02 Display user-selected
functions only (con-
figure with U01 to U12)
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b037 DISP
Mode ALL
Function
Code Data Resulting Non-displayed
Functions (when B37 = 01) Notes
A001 01 A005, A006, A011 – A016,
A101 – A114, C081 – C083,
C121 – C123
[O], [OI], [O2] terminal
functions
A002 01, 03, 04,
05
B087 Stop key function
A019 00 A028 – A035 Multi-speed function
C001 – C008 02, 03, 04,
05
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–38
Function
Code Data Resulting Non-displayed
Functions (when B37 = 01) Notes
A044, A244 02 B100 – B113 Control methods
A051 01 A052 – A059 DC braking
A071 01 A072 – A076, C044 PID function
A094 01 A095 – A096 2-stage adjustable frequency
A294 01 A0295 – A296
B013, B213,
B313
02 B015 – B020 Electric thermal characteris-
tic
B021 01, 02 B022, B023 Overload restriction
B024 01, 02 B025, B026 Overload restriction 2
B095 01, 02 B090 – B096 Dynamic braking function
C001 – C008
06 A038, A039 Jogging
08
F202, F203, A203, A204, A220,
A241 – A244, A261, A262,
A292 – A296, B212, B213, H202
– H206, H220 – H224, H230 –
H234, H250 – H252, H260
2nd motor control
11 B088 Free-run stop
17 F302, F303, A303, A304, A320,
A342 – A344, A392, A393,
B312, B313, H306
3rd motor control
18 C102 Reset
27, 28, 29 C101 UP/DWN
A044 00, 01 A041 – A043 Torque boost function
04 H060 0Hz domain SLV limiter
A244 00, 01 A241 – A243 Torque boost function
04 H260 0Hz SLV limiter
A044
03, 04, 05 B040 – B046, H001, H070 –
H072, H002, H005, H020 –
H024, H030 – H034, H050 –
H052, H060
Vector control
A244
03, 04 B040 – B046, H001, H070 –
H072, H202, H205, H220 –
H224, H230 – H234, H250 –
H252, H260
Vector control
A097 01, 02, 03 A131 Acceleration pattern constant
A098 01, 02, 03 A132 Deceleration pattern constant
B098 01, 02 B099, C085 Thermistor function
B050 01 B051 – B054 Instantaneous power failure
B120 01 B121 – B126 External brake control
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–39
Function
Code Data Resulting Non-displayed
Functions (when B37 = 01) Notes
C021 – C025,
C026
02, 06 C042, C043 Frequency arrival signal
03 C040, C041 Overload advance notice
07 C055 – C058 Over-torque
21 C063 Zero-speed detection signal
24, 25 C045, C046 Frequency arrival signal
26 C011 Overload advance notice 2
H002 00 H020 – H024 Motor constant
01, 02 H030 – H034 Motor constant (auto-tuning)
H202 00 H220 – H224 Motor constant
01, 02 H023 – H0234 Motor constant (auto-tuning)
P010 01 P011 – P023, P025 – P027 Expansion card function
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
B040 Torque limit selection Five option codes:
00 4-quadrant mode
01 Selected by 2 input
terminals (see p. 4–37)
02 From analog [O2] input
(0 to 10V = 0 to 200%)
03 From expansion card 1
04 From expansion card 2
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b040 TRQ-LIMIT
Mode 4-SET
B041 Torque limit (1)
(forward-driving in 4-
quadrant mode)
Range is 0 to 200%
(torque limit disabled)
✘ ✔ 150.150.150. % >b041 RQ-LIMIT
LEVEL1 150%
B042 Torque limit (2)
(reverse-regenerating in
4-quadrant mode)
Range is 0 to 200%
(torque limit disabled)
✘ ✔ 150.150.150. % >b042 TRQ-LIMIT
LEVEL2 150%
B043 Torque limit (3)
(reverse-driving in 4-
quadrant mode)
Range is 0 to 200%
(torque limit disabled)
✘ ✔ 150.150.150. % >b043 TRQ-LIMIT
LEVEL3 150%
B044 Torque limit (4)
(forward-regenerating
in 4-quadrant mode)
Range is 0 to 200%
(torque limit disabled)
✘ ✔ 150.150.150. % >b044 TRQ-LIMIT
LEVEL4 150%
B045 Torque limit LADSTOP
enable
Temporarily stops accel/
decel ramps during torque
limit. Available for SLV, 0
Hz domain, or vector control
with feedback mode.
Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b045 TRQ-LIMIT
SELECT OFF
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–40
Controlled Deceleration at Power Loss – When enabled, this feature permits the inverter to
control final motor deceleration upon loss of inverter input power. First, you must make a
wiring change to the inverter. See “Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss” on
page 4–4 for complete instructions including wiring and signal timing diagrams for using the
controlled deceleration at power loss feature.
After making the wiring change, use function B050 to enable the feature. Use B051 to deter-
mine the point at which a decaying DC bus voltage will trigger the controlled deceleration. Use
parameter B054 to specify an initial step-wise deceleration at power loss, and B053 to specify
the duration of the linear deceleration.
During the controlled deceleration the inverter itself acts as a load to decelerate the motor. With
either a high-inertia load or a short deceleration time (or both), it is possible that the inverter
impedance will not be low enough to continue linear deceleration and avoid an over-voltage
condition on the DC bus. Use parameter B052 to specify a threshold for the over-voltage. In
this case, the inverter pauses deceleration (runs at constant speed). When the DC bus decays
again below the threshold, linear deceleration resumes. The pause/resume process will repeat as
necessary until the DC bus energy is depleted (under-voltage condition occurs).
B046 Reverse Run protection
enable
Prohibits reverse motor
rotation. Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b046 LIMIT
PREV OFF
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
B050 Controlled deceleration
and stop on power loss
Allows inverter control
using regenerative energy to
decelerate after loss of input
power (requires jumper
change)
Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >b050 IPS-DECEL
Mode OFF
B051 DC bus voltage trigger
level during power loss
Sets trigger for controlled
deceleration and stop on
power loss function.
Range is 0.0 to 1000.V
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 VDC >b051 IPS-DECEL
V1 0000.0Vdc
B052 Over-voltage threshold
during power loss
Sets over-voltage threshold
for controlled deceleration
function.
Range is 0.0 to 1000.V
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 VDC >b052 IPS-DECEL
V2 0000.0Vdc
B053 Deceleration time
setting during power
loss
Range is 0.01 to 99.99 sec. /
100.0 to 999.9 sec. /
1000 to 3600 sec.
✘ ✘ 1.00 1.00 1.00 sec. >b053 IPS-DECEL
TIME 0001.00s
B054 Initial output frequency
decrease during power
loss
Sets the initial decrease in
output frequency upon
power loss.
Range is 0.00 to 10.00 Hz
✘ ✘ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >b054 IPS-DECEL
DEC-F 00.00Hz
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–41
Miscellaneous functions, continued...
B083: Carrier frequency adjustment – The internal switching frequency of the inverter
circuitry (also called the chopper frequency). It is called the carrier frequency because the
lower AC output frequency of the inverter “rides” the carrier. The faint, high-pitched sound
you hear when the inverter is in Run Mode is characteristic of switching power supplies in
general. The carrier frequency is adjustable from 500 Hz to 15 kHz (the upper limit varies,
depending on the inverter rating). The audible sound decreases at the higher frequencies, but
RFI noise and leakage current may be increased. Refer to the specification derating curves in
Chapter 1 to determine the maximum allowable carrier frequency setting for your particular
inverter and environmental conditions.
NOTE: When the inverter is in sensorless vector mode, use B083 to set the carrier frequency
greater than 2.1 kHz for proper operation.
NOTE: The carrier frequency setting must stay within specified limits for inverter-motor appli-
cations that must comply with particular regulatory agencies. For example, a European CE-
approved application requires the inverter carrier to be less than 5 kHz.
B084, B085: Initialization codes – These functions allow you to restore the factory default
settings. Please refer to “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–9.
B086: Frequency display scaling – You can convert the output frequency monitor on D001 to
a scaled number (engineering units) monitored at function D007. For example, the motor may
run a conveyor that is monitored in feet per minute. Use this formula:
Scaled output frequency (D007) Output frequency (D001) Factor (B086)×=
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
B080 [AM] terminal analog
meter adjustment
Adjust 8-bit gain to analog
meter connected to terminal
[AM], range is 0 to 255
✔ ✔ 180 180 180 — >b080 AM-MONITOR
ADJUST 180
B081 [FM] terminal analog
meter adjustment
Adjust 8-bit gain to analog
meter connected to terminal
[FM], range is 0 to 255
✔ ✔ 60 60 60 — >b081 FM-MONITOR
ADJUST 060
B082 Start frequency adjust-
ment
Sets the starting frequency
for the inverter output, range
is 0.10 to 9.99 Hz
✘ ✔ 0.50 0.50 0.50 Hz >b082 fmin
F 00.50Hz
B083 Carrier frequency
setting
Sets the PWM carrier (inter-
nal switching frequency)
Range is 0.5 to 15.0 kHz, or
0.5 to 10 kHz when derated
✘ ✔ 5.0 5.0 5.0 kHz >b083 CARRIER
F 05.0kHz
B084 Initialization mode
(parameters or trip
history)
Select the type of initializa-
tion to occur, three option
codes:
00 Trip history clear
01 Parameter initialization
02 Trip history clear and
parameter initialization
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >b084 INITIAL
MODE TRP
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–42
B085 Country code for initial-
ization
Select default parameter
values for country on initial-
ization, four option codes:
00 Japan version
01 Europe version
02 US version
03 reserved (do not set)
✘ ✘ 01 02 00 — >b085 INITIAL
SELECT USA
B86 Frequency scaling
conversion factor
Specify a constant to scale
D007 to display in engineer-
ing units.
Range is 0.1 to 99.9
✔ ✔ 1.0 1.0 1.0 — >b086 F-CONV
Gain 001.0
B087 STOP key enable Select whether the STOP
key on the keypad is enabled
(req. A002=01, 03, 04, or
05). Two option codes:
00 Enable
01 Disable
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b087 STOP-SW
SELECT ON
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–43
B091/B088: Stop Mode / Restart Mode Configuration – You can configure how the inverter
performs a standard stop (each time Run FWD and REV signals turn OFF). Setting B091 deter-
mines whether the inverter will control the deceleration, or whether it will perform a free-run
stop (coast to a stop). When using the free-run stop selection, it is imperative to also configure
how you want the inverter to resume control of motor speed. Setting B088 determines whether
the inverter will ensure the motor always resumes at 0 Hz, or whether the motor resumes from
its current coasting speed (also called frequency matching). The Run command may turn OFF
briefly, allowing the motor to coast to a slower speed from which normal operation can resume.
In most applications a controlled deceleration is desirable, corresponding to B091=00.
However, applications such as HVAC fan control will often use a free-run stop (B091=01). This
practice decreases dynamic stress on system components, prolonging system life. In this case,
you will typically set B088=01 in order to resume from the current speed after a free-run stop
(see diagram below, right). Note that using the default setting, B088=00, can cause trip events
when the inverter attempts to force the load quickly to zero speed.
NOTE: Other events can cause (or be configured to cause) a free-run stop, such as power loss
(see “Automatic Restart Mode and Phase Loss” on page 3–29), and inverter trip events in
general (see “Miscellaneous Functions” on page 3–61). If all free-run stop behavior is impor-
tant to your application (such as HVAC), be sure to configure each event accordingly.
Some additional parameters further configure all instances of a free-run stop. Parameter B003,
Retry Wait Time Before Motor Restart, sets the minimum time the inverter will free-run. For
example, if B003 = 4 seconds (and B091=01) and the cause of the free-run stop lasts 10
seconds, the inverter will free-run (coast) for a total of 14 seconds before driving the motor
again. Parameter B007, Restart Frequency Threshold, sets the motor frequency at which the
inverter will no longer resume and accelerate, instead resuming from 0 Hz (complete stop).
Motor
speed
[FW, RV]
Zero-frequency start Motor
speed
Resume from current speed
wait time
[FW, RV]
B003
B088=01B088=00 Resume from 0Hz
B091=01 Stop Mode = free-run stop
B091=01 Stop Mode = free-run stop
tt
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
B088 Restart mode after FRS Selects how the inverter
resumes operation when the
free-run stop (FRS) is
cancelled, two option codes:
00 Restart from 0Hz
01 Restart from frequency
detected from actual
speed of motor
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b088 RUN
FRS ZST
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–44
B090: Dynamic braking usage ratio – This parameter limits the amount of time the inverter
can use the dynamic braking accessory device without entering the Trip Mode. Please refer to
“Dynamic Braking” on page 5–6 for more information on dynamic braking accessories.
NOTE: When cooling fan control is enabled (B092=01) the inverter always turns the fan ON
for 5 minutes immediately after powerup. This will cool the inverter in case the inverter / motor
is still warm from prior running before a short power outage.
B090 Dynamic braking usage
ratio
Selects the braking duty
cycle for the dynamic
braking resistor (total brake
% ON-time per 100 sec.
interval).
Range is 0.0 to 100.0%
0%Dynamic braking
disabled
>0% Enabled, per value
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b090 BRD
%ED 000.0%
B091 Stop mode selection Selects how the inverter
stops the motor, two option
codes:
00 DEC (decelerate and
stop)
01 FRS (free run to stop)
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >b091 RUN
STOP DEC
B092 Cooling fan control
(see note below)
Two option codes:
00 Fan always ON
01 Fan ON during RUN,
OFF during STOP
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >b092 INITIAL
FAN-CTL OFF
B095 Dynamic braking
control
Three option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable during RUN only
02 Enable always
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b095 BRD
Mode OFF
B096 Dynamic braking
activation level
Range is:
330 to 380V (200V class),
660 to 760V (400V class)
✘ ✔ 360/
720
360/
720
360/
720
V>b096 BRD
LEVEL 360Vdc
B098 Thermistor for thermal
protection control
Three option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable-PTC thermistor
02 Enable-NTC thermistor
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b098 THERM
SELECT OFF
B099 Thermal protection
level setting
Thermistor resistance
threshold at which trip
occurs.
Range is 0.0 to 9999 Ohms
✘ ✔ 300030003000Ohms >b099 THERM
LEVEL 3000ohm
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–45
Free-setting
V/f Pattern
The free-setting V/f inverter mode of operation uses voltage and frequency parameter pairs to
define seven points on a V/f graph. This provides a way to define a multi-segment V/f curve
that best suits your application.
The frequency settings do require that F1 ≤ F2 ≤ F3 ≤ F4 ≤ F5 ≤ F6 ≤ F7; their values must have
this ascending order relationship. To satisfy this criterion during initial parameter editing, set
F7 (B012) and work backwards when setting these values, since the defaults are all 0 Hz.
However, the voltages V1 to V7 may either increase or decrease from one to the next. There-
fore, you may set these parameters in any order.
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
B100 Free-setting V/f
frequency (1)
V/f point 1, frequency
coordinate
✘ ✘ 0. 0. 0. Hz >b101 FREE-V/F
V1 000.0V
B101 Free-setting V/f
voltage (1)
V.F point 1, voltage coordi-
nate
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 V >b102 FREE-V/F
F1 0000Hz
B102 Free-setting V/f
frequency (2)
V/f point 2, frequency
coordinate
✘ ✘ 0. 0. 0. Hz >b103 FREE-V/F
V2 000.0V
B103 Free-setting V/f
voltage (2)
V.F point 2, voltage coordi-
nate
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 V >b104 FREE-V/F
F2 0000Hz
B104 Free-setting V/f
frequency (3)
V/f point 3, frequency
coordinate
✘ ✘ 0. 0. 0. Hz >b105 FREE-V/F
V3 000.0V
B105 Free-setting V/f
voltage (3)
V.F point 3, voltage coordi-
nate
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 V >b106 FREE-V/F
F3 0000Hz
B106 Free-setting V/f
frequency (4)
V/f point 4, frequency
coordinate
✘ ✘ 0. 0. 0. Hz >b107 FREE-V/F
V4 000.0V
B107 Free-setting V/f
voltage (4)
V.F point 4, voltage coordi-
nate
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 V >b108 FREE-V/F
F4 0000Hz
B108 Free-setting V/f
frequency (5)
V/f point 5, frequency
coordinate
✘ ✘ 0. 0. 0. Hz >b109 FREE-V/F
V5 000.0V
B109 Free-setting V/f
voltage (5)
V.F point 5, voltage coordi-
nate
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 V >b110 FREE-V/F
F5 0000Hz
B110 Free-setting V/f
frequency (6)
V/f point 6, frequency
coordinate
✘ ✘ 0. 0. 0. Hz >b111 FREE-V/F
V6 000.0V
B111 Free-setting V/f
voltage (6)
V.F point 6, voltage coordi-
nate
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 V >b112 FREE-V/F
F6 0000Hz
B112 Free-setting V/f
frequency (7)
V/f point 7, frequency
coordinate
✘ ✘ 0. 0. 0. Hz >b113 FREE-V/F
V7 000.0V
B113 Free-setting V/f
voltage (7)
V.F point 7, voltage coordi-
nate
✘ ✘ 0.0 0.0 0.0 V >b114 FREE-V/F
F7 0000Hz
“B” Group: Fine-Tuning Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–46
External Brake
Control
The brake control function in the inverter controls external braking used in systems such as
elevators. The purpose of this function is to ensure the inverter is powering the motor before
releasing external brakes that would permit the load to move or coast. This function requires the
configuration and wiring of intelligent input and output terminals. See “External Brake Control
Function” on page 4–39 for more information.
“B” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
B120 Brake Control Enable Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >b120 BRAKE
Mode OFF
B121 Brake Wait Time for
Release
Sets time delay between
arrival at release frequency
and the brake release signal.
Range is 0.00 to 5.00 sec.
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 sec. >b121 BRAKE
STA-WAIT 0.00s
B122 Brake Wait Time for
Acceleration
Sets time delay after brake
confirmation signal is
received until the inverter
begins acceleration
Range is 0.00 to 5.00 sec.
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 sec. >b122 BRAKE
ACC-WAIT 0.00s
B123 Brake Wait Time for
Stopping
Sets time delay after brake
confirmation signal turns
OFF until decelerating the
inverter to 0 Hz.
Range is 0.00 to 5.00 sec.
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 sec. >b123 BRAKE
STP-WAIT 0.00s
B124 Brake Wait Time for
Confirmation
Sets the wait time for confir-
mation after turn ON/OFF of
brake release. If confirma-
tion is not received during
the specified wait time, the
inverter will trip with an
external brake error.
Range is 0.00 to 5.00 sec.
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 sec. >b124 BRAKE
BRK-WAIT 0.00s
B125 Brake Release
Frequency Setting
Sets the frequency at which
the inverter will output the
brake release signal after
delay set by B121.
Range is 0.00 to 99.99 /
100.0 to 400.0Hz
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >b125 BRAKE
OPEN-F 000.00Hz
B126 Brake Release Current
Setting
Sets the minimum inverter
current level above which
the brake release signal will
be permitted.
Range is 0% to 200% of
rated current
✘ ✔ Rated current for
each inverter model
A>b126 BRAKE
OPEN-A 00.16.5A
[BRK] Brake release
[BOK] Brake confirmation
Inverter External Brake
System
Emergency Brake
(or alarm, etc.)
[BER] Brake error
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–47
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
The eight input terminals [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], and [8] can be configured for any of 44
different functions. The next two tables show how to configure the eight terminals. The inputs
are logical, in that they are either OFF or ON. We define these states as OFF=0, and ON=1.
The inverter comes with default options for the eight terminals. These default settings are
initially unique, each one having its own setting. Note that European and US versions have
different default settings. You can use any option on any terminal, and even use the same option
twice to create a logical OR (though usually not required).
Input Terminal
Configuration
Functions and Options –The function codes in the following table let you assign one of 44
options to any of the eight logic inputs for the SJ300 inverters. The functions C001 through
C008 configure the terminals [1] through [8] respectively. The “value” of these particular
parameters is not a scalar value, but it is a discrete number that selects one option from many
available options.
For example, if you set function C001=01, you have assigned option 01 (Reverse Run) to
terminal [1]. The option codes and the specifics of how each one works are in Chapter 4.
“C” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
C001 Terminal [1] function
44 programmable
functions available
for terminals (see
next section)
✘ ✔ 18
[RS]
18
[RS]
18
[RS]
—>C001 IN-TM
1 RS
C002 Terminal [2] function ✘ ✔ 16
[AT]
16
[AT]
16
[AT]
—>C002 IN-TM
2 AT
C003 Terminal [3] function ✘ ✔ 06
[JG]
06
[JG]
06
[JG]
—>C003 IN-TM
3 JG
C004 Terminal [4] function ✘ ✔ 11
[FRS]
11
[FRS]
11
[FRS]
—>C004 IN-TM
4 FRS
C005 Terminal [5] function ✘ ✔ 09
[2CH]
09
[2CH]
09
[2CH]
—>C005 IN-TM
5 2CH
C006 Terminal [6] function ✘ ✔ 03
[CF2]
13
[USP]
03
[CF2]
—>C006 IN-TM
6 USP
C007 Terminal [7] function ✘ ✔ 02
[CF1]
02
[CF1]
02
[CF1]
—>C007 IN-TM
7 CF1
C008 Terminal [8] function ✘ ✔ 01
[RV]
01
[RV]
01
[RV]
—>C008 IN-TM
8 RV
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–48
The input logic convention is programmable for each of the six inputs. Most inputs default to
normally open (active high), but you can select normally closed (active low) in order to invert
the sense of the logic.
NOTE: An input terminal configured for option code 18 ([RS] Reset command) cannot be
configured for normally closed operation.
“C” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
C011 Terminal [1] active state
Select logic convention,
two option codes:
00 normally open N.O.
01 normally closed N.C.
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C011 IN-TM
O/C-1 NO
C012 Terminal [2] active state ✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C012 IN-TM
O/C-2 NO
C013 Terminal [3] active state ✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C013 IN-TM
O/C-3 NO
C014 Terminal [4] active state ✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C014 IN-TM
O/C-4 NO
C015 Terminal [5] active state ✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C015 IN-TM
O/C-5 NO
C016 Terminal [6] active state ✘ ✔ 00 01 00 — >C016 IN-TM
O/C-6 NO
C017 Terminal [7] active state ✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C017 IN-TM
O/C-7 NO
C018 Terminal [8] active state ✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C018 IN-TM
O/C-8 NO
C019 Terminal [FW] active
state
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C019 IN-TM
O/C-FW NO
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–49
Intelligent Input
Terminal
Overview
Each of the eight intelligent terminals may be assigned any of the options in the following
table. When you program one of the option codes for terminal assignments C001 to C008, the
respective terminal assumes the function role of that option code. The terminal functions have a
symbol or abbreviation, which we use to label a terminal using that function. For example the
“Reverse Run” command is [RV]. The physical label on the terminal block connector is simply
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. However, schematic examples in this manual also use the terminal
function symbol (such as [RV]) to show the assigned option. The option codes for C011 to
C019 determine the active state of the logical input (active high or active low).
Summary Table - This table shows all forty-four intelligent input functions at a glance.
Detailed descriptions of these functions, related parameters and settings, and example wiring
diagrams are in “Using Intelligent Input Terminals” on page 4–11.
Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol Function Name Description
01 RV Reverse Run/Stop ON Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs reverse
OFF Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops
02 CF1 Multi-speed select,
Bit 0 (LSB)
ON Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 1
OFF Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 0
03 CF2 Multi-speed select,
Bit 1
ON Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 1
OFF Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 0
04 CF3 Multi-speed select,
Bit 2
ON Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 1
OFF Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 0
05 CF4 Multi-speed select,
Bit 3 (MSB)
ON Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 1
OFF Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 0
06 JG Jogging ON Inverter is in Run Mode, output to motor runs at jog
parameter frequency A038
OFF Inverter is in Stop Mode
07 DB External Signal for DC
Injection Braking
ON DC braking will be applied during deceleration
OFF DC braking will not be applied
08 SET Set (select) 2nd Motor
Data
ON The inverter uses 2nd motor parameters for generat-
ing frequency output to motor
OFF The inverter uses 1st (main) motor parameters for
generating frequency output to motor
09 2CH 2-stage Acceleration
and Deceleration
ON Frequency output uses 2nd-stage acceleration and
deceleration values
OFF Frequency output uses standard acceleration and
deceleration values
11 FRS Free-run Stop ON Causes output to turn OFF, allowing motor to free run
(coast) to stop
OFF Output operates normally, so controlled deceleration
stops motor
12 EXT External Trip ON When assigned input transitions OFF to ON, inverter
latches trip event and displays E12
OFF No trip event for ON to OFF transition; any recorded
trip events remain in history until Reset
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–50
13 USP Unattended Start
Protection
ON On powerup, the inverter will not resume a Run
command (mostly used in the US)
OFF On powerup, the inverter will resume a RUN
command that was active before power loss
14 CS Commercial Power
Source
ON OFF-to-ON transition signals the inverter that the
motor is already running at powerup (via bypass),
thus suppressing the inverter’s motor output in Run
Mode
OFF ON-to-OFF transition signals the inverter to apply a
time delay (B003), frequency match its output to
existing motor speed, and resume normal Run Mode
operation
15 SFT Software Lock ON The keypad and remote programming devices are
prevented from changing parameters
OFF The parameters may be edited and stored
16 AT Analog Input Voltage/
current Select
ON If A005=00, terminal [OI] is enabled for input.
If A005=01, terminal [O2] is enabled for input.
(Use terminal [L] for signal return.)
OFF Terminal [O] is enabled for voltage input
(Use terminal [L] for signal return)
17 SET3 Set (select) 3rd motor
data
ON The inverter uses 3rd motor parameters for generating
frequency output to motor
OFF The inverter uses 1st (main) motor parameters for
generating frequency output to motor
18 RS Reset Inverter ON The trip condition is reset, the motor output is turned
OFF, and powerup reset is asserted
OFF Normal power-on operation
20 STA START
(3-wire interface)
ON Starts the motor rotation
OFF No change to present motor status
21 STP STOP
(3-wire interface)
ON Stops the motor rotation
OFF No change to present motor status
22 F/R FWD, REV
(3-wire interface)
ON Selects the direction of motor rotation: ON = FWD.
While the motor is rotating, a change of F/R will start
a deceleration, followed by a change in direction.
OFF Selects the direction of motor rotation: OFF =REV.
While the motor is rotating, a change of F/R will start
a deceleration, followed by a change in direction.
23 PID PID Disable ON Temporarily disables PID loop control. Inverter
output turns OFF as long as PID Enable is active
(A071=1).
OFF Has no effect on PID loop operation, which operates
normally if PID Enable is active (A071 = 1).
Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol Function Name Description
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–51
24 PIDC PID Reset ON Resets the PID loop controller. The main conse-
quence is that the integrator sum is forced to zero.
OFF No effect on PID loop controller
26 CAS Control gain setting ON Selects alternate parameters H070 to H072 for the
source of the internal speed loop gain
OFF Selects parameters H050 to H052 (or H250 to H252
for 2nd motor) for the source of internal speed loop
gain
27 UP Remote Control
UP Function (motor-
ized speed pot.)
ON Accelerates (increases output frequency) motor from
current frequency
OFF No change to output frequency
28 DWN Remote Control
DOWN Function
(motorized speed pot.)
ON Decelerates (decreases output frequency) motor from
current frequency
OFF No change to output frequency
29 UDC Remote Control Data
Clearing
ON Clears the UP/DWN frequency memory by forcing it
to equal the set frequency parameter F001. Setting
C101 must be set=00 to enable this function to work.
OFF UP/DWN frequency memory is not changed
31 OPE Operator Control ON Forces the source of the output frequency setting
(A001) and the source of the RUN command (A002)
to be from the digital operator
OFF Source of output frequency set by (A001) and source
of run command set by (A002) is used
32 SF1 Multispeed bit 1 ON Logical 1
OFF Logical 0
33 SF2 Multispeed bit 2 ON Logical 1
OFF Logical 0
34 SF3 Multispeed bit 3 ON Logical 1
OFF Logical 0
35 SF4 Multispeed bit 4 ON Logical 1
OFF Logical 0
36 SF5 Multispeed bit 5 ON Logical 1
OFF Logical 0
37 SF6 Multispeed bit 6 ON Logical 1
OFF Logical 0
38 SF7 Multispeed bit 7 ON Logical 1
OFF Logical 0
Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol Function Name Description
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–52
39 OLR Overload restriction ON Selects current overload parameter set 2
(B024, B025, B026)
OFF Selects current overload parameter set 1
(B021, B022, B023)
40 TL Torque limit enable ON Enables torque limit feature
OFF Disables all torque limit sources. Defaults to 200% of
inverter rated torque output.
41 TRQ1 Torque limit selection,
bit 1 (LSB)
ON Logical 1
OFF Logical 0
42 TRQ2 Torque limit selection,
bit 2 (MSB)
ON Logical 1
OFF Logical 0
43 PPI Proportional /
Proportional/Integral
mode selection
ON Selects Proportional-only control
OFF Selects Proportional-Integral control
44 BOK Brake confirmation
signal
ON Indicates external brake has released (used only for
external brake control function)
OFF Indicates the external brake has not yet released
45 ORT Orientation (home
search)
ON The encoder is in the home (oriented) position
OFF The encoder position is not in the home position
46 LAC LAC: LAD cancel ON Disables the Linear Accel / Decel (LAD) mode
OFF Normal Linear Accel / Decel mode
47 PCLR Position deviation reset ON Clears the position deviation by setting the actual
position equal to the desired position
OFF Position count operates normally
48 STAT Pulse train position
command input enable
ON Enables the pulse train control of motor
OFF Disables pulse train control of motor
no — Not selected ON (input ignored)
OFF (input ignored)
Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol Function Name Description
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–53
Output Terminal
Configuration
The inverter provides configuration for logic (discrete) and analog outputs, shown in the table
below.
NOTE: *Terminals [11] – [13] or [11] – [14] are automatically configured as AC0 – AC2 or
AC0 – AC3 when C62 is configured to enable alarm code output.
The output logic convention is programmable for terminals [11] – [15], and the alarm relay
terminals. The open-collector output terminals [11] – [15] default to normally open (active
low), but you can select normally closed (active high) for the terminals in order to invert the
sense of the logic. You can invert the logical sense of the alarm relay output as well.
“C” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
C021 Terminal [11] function *
22 programmable
functions available
for logic (discrete)
outputs (see next
section)
✘ ✔ 01
[FA1]
01
[FA1]
01
[FA1]
—>C021 OUT-TM
11 FA1
C022 Terminal [12] function * ✘ ✔ 00
[RUN]
00
[RUN]
00
[RUN]
—>C022 OUT-TM
12 RUN
C023 Terminal [13] function * ✘ ✔ 03
[OL]
03
[OL]
03
[OL]
—>C023 OUT-TM
13 OL
C024 Terminal [14] function * ✘ ✔ 07
[OTQ]
07
[OTQ]
07
[OTQ]
—>C024 OUT-TM
14 OTQ
C025 Terminal [15] function ✘ ✔ 08
[IP]
08
[IP]
08
[IP]
—>C025 OUT-TM
15 IP
C026 Alarm relay terminal
function
✘ ✔ 05
[AL]
05
[AL]
05
[AL]
—>C026 OUT-TM
AL AL
C027 [FM] signal selection
8 programmable
functions available
for analog outputs
(see after next
section)
✘ ✔ 00
output
freq.
00
output
freq.
00
output
freq.
—>C027 FM-MONITOR
KIND A-F
C028 [AM] signal selection ✘ ✔ 00
output
freq.
00
output
freq.
00
output
freq.
—>C028 AM-MONITOR
KIND A-F
C029 [AMI] signal selection ✘ ✔ 00
output
freq.
00
output
freq.
00
output
freq.
—>C029 AMI-MON
KIND A-F
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–54
Output Summary Table - This table shows all twenty-two functions for the logic output
terminals [11] – [15] at a glance. Detailed function descriptions, related parameters, settings,
and example wiring diagrams are in “Using Intelligent Output Terminals” on page 4–42.
“C” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
C031 Terminal [11] active
state
Select logic convention,
two option codes:
00 normally open N.O.
01 normally closed N.C.
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C031 OUT-TM
O/C-11 NO
C032 Terminal [12] active
state
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C032 OUT-TM
O/C-12 NO
C033 Terminal [13] active
state
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C033 OUT-TM
O/C-13 NO
C034 Terminal [14] active
state
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C034 OUT-TM
O/C-14 NO
C035 Terminal [15] active
state
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C035 OUT-TM
O/C-15 NO
C036 Alarm relay terminal
active state
✘ ✔ 01 01 01 — >C036 OUT-TM
O/C-AL NC
Output Function Summary Table
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol Function Name Description
00 RUN Run signal ON Inverter is in Run Mode, motor running
OFF Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stopped
01 FA1 Frequency arrival type
1 – constant speed
ON when output to motor is at the standard set frequency
F001
OFF when output to motor is not at the set frequency F001
02 FA2 Frequency arrival type
2 – over-frequency
ON when output to motor is at or above the FA threshold
1(C042) during accel
OFF when the output to motor is below the FA threshold 1
(C043) during decel
03 OL Overload advance
notice signal (1)
ON when output current is more than the set threshold for
the overload signal (set with C041)
OFF when output current is less than the set threshold for
the overload signal
04 OD Output deviation for
PID control
ON when PID error is more than the set threshold for the
deviation signal
OFF when PID error is less than the set threshold for the
deviation signal
05 AL Alarm signal ON when the alarm condition has been met and not reset
OFF when the alarm had not tripped since the previous
power cycle or since the previous keypad reset
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–55
06 FA3 Frequency arrival type
3 – at frequency
ON when output to motor is at the FA threshold 1 (C042)
during accel, or at C043 during decel
OFF when the output to motor is not at either the FA
threshold 1 (C042) during accel or at C043 during
decel
07 OTQ Over-torque signal ON when the over-torque feature is enabled and the motor
is generating excess torque
OFF when the over-torque feature is disabled or the motor
is not generating excess torque
08 IP Instantaneous power
failure signal
ON when the inverter input power has decreased below
the acceptable input voltage level
OFF when the inverter input power is within rated range
09 UV Under-voltage signal ON when the inverter input power has decreased below
the acceptable input voltage level
OFF when the inverter input power is within rated range
10 TRQ In torque limit ON when the output torque exceeds level set for the
particular torque/frequency quadrant in effect during
operation
OFF when the output torque is less than the level set for the
operating quadrant
11 RNT Operation time over ON when the inverter Run time exceeds the limit set by
Run/power-on warning time (B034)
OFF when the inverter Run time is less than the limit set by
Run/power-on warning time (B034)
12 ONT Plug-in time over ON when the inverter plug-in time exceeds the set limit
OFF when the inverter plug-in time is less than the limit
13 THM Thermal alarm signal ON when the thermal limit for the motor is exceeded
OFF when the thermal limit is not exceeded
19 BRK Brake release signal ON when the inverter signals the external braking system
to release (open) its brake
OFF when the inverter is not driving the motor, and needs
the external brake engaged
20 BER Brake error signal ON when the output current is less than the set releasing
current
OFF when the braking function is not in use, or when the
output current to the motor is correct and it is safe to
release the brake
21 ZS Zero speed detect ON when the encoder pulses of the motor has stopped
OFF when motor rotation causes encoder pulses
22 DSE Speed deviation
maximum
ON when the velocity error exceeds the error threshold
defined for the encoder input
OFF when the velocity error is less than the error threshold
defined for the encoder input
Output Function Summary Table
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol Function Name Description
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–56
Analog Summary Table - The following table shows all eight functions available for assign-
ment to the three analog output terminals [FM], [AM], [AMI] at a glance. Detailed descrip-
tions, related parameters and settings, and example wiring diagrams are in “Analog Output
Operation” on page 4–62.
23 POK Positioning completion ON when the load position is at the target
OFF when the load position is not yet at the target
24 FA4 Frequency arrival type
4 – over-frequency (2)
ON when output to motor is at or above the FA threshold
2 (C045) during accel
OFF when the output to motor is below the FA threshold 2
(C046) during decel
25 FA5 Frequency arrival type
5 – at frequency (2)
ON when output to motor is at the FA threshold 2 (C045)
during accel, or at C046 during decel
OFF when the output to motor is not at either the FA
threshold 2 (C045) during accel or at C046 during
decel
26 OL2 Overload notice
advance signal (2)
ON when output current is more than the set threshold for
the overload signal
OFF when output current is less than the set threshold for
the overload signal
Output Function Summary Table
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol Function Name Description
Analog Output Function Summary Table
Option
Code Function Name Description Corresponding Signal
Range
00 Output frequency Actual motor speed, represented by PWM
signal
0 to max. frequency in Hz
01 Output current Motor current (% of maximum rated output
current), represented by PWM signal
0 to 200%
02 Output torque Rated output torque 0 to 200%
03 Digital output
frequency
Output frequency (available only at FM
output)
0 to max. frequency in Hz
04 Output voltage Rated output voltage to motor 0 to 100%
05 Input power Rated input power 0 to 200%
06 Electronic thermal
overload
Percentage of electronic overload attained 0 to 100%
07 LAD frequency Internal ramp generator frequency 0 to max. frequency in Hz
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–57
Output Function
Adjustment
Parameters
The following parameters work in
conjunction with the intelligent output
function, when configured. The
overload level parameter (C041) sets the
motor current level at which the
overload signal [OL] turns ON. The
range of settings is from 0% to 200% of
the rated current for the inverter. This
function is for generating an early
warning logic output, without causing
either a trip event or a restriction of the
motor current (those effects are avail-
able on other functions).
The frequency arrival signal, [FA1] to
[FA5], is intended to indicate when the
inverter output has reached (arrived at)
the target frequency. You can adjust the
timing of the leading and trailing edges
of the signal via two parameters specific
to acceleration and deceleration ramps,
C042 and C043.
The Error for the PID loop is the magni-
tude (absolute value) of the difference
between the Setpoint (desired value)
and Process Variable (actual value). The
PID output deviation signal [OD]
(output terminal function option code
04) indicates when the error magnitude
has exceeded a magnitude you define.
Motor
current
Overload
signal
C041
t
1
0
Output
frequency
Arrival
signal
C042 C043
t
1
0
PID Error
(PV-SP)
Deviation
Signal
C044
t
1
0
SP
“C” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
C040 Overload signal output
mode
Choose when the overload
signal is enabled; two option
codes:
00 During accel/decel
01 During constant speed
✘ ✔ 01 01 01 — >CO40 OL
Mode CRT
C041 Overload level setting Range is 0.00 * rated current
to 2.00 * rated current
✘ ✔ Rated current for
each inverter
A>C041 OL
LEVEL 0016.5A
C042 Frequency arrival
setting for acceleration
Sets the frequency arrival
setting threshold for the
output frequency during
acceleration
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >C042 ARV
ACC 0000.00Hz
C043 Arrival frequency
setting for deceleration
Sets the frequency arrival
setting threshold for the
output frequency during
deceleration
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >C043 ARV
DEC 0000.00Hz
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–58
C044 PID deviation level
setting
Sets the PID loop error
threshold |SP - PV|
(absolute value) to trigger
intelligent output [OD].
Range is 0.0 to 100%,
resolution is 0.1%
✘ ✔ 3.0 3.0 3.0 % >C044 PID
LEVEL 003.0%
C045 Frequency arrival
setting for acceleration
(2)
Range is 0.0 to 99.99 /
100.0 to 400.0 Hz
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >C045 ARV
ACC2 0000.00Hz
C046 Frequency arrival
setting for deceleration
(2)
Range is 0.0 to 99.99 /
100.0 to 400.0 Hz
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >C046 ARV
DEC2 0000.00Hz
C055 Over-torque (forward-
driving) level setting
Threshold for intelligent
output terminal [OTQ],
quadrant I. Range is:
0 to 200%, up to –550xxx;
0 to 180%, –750 to 1500xxx
✘ ✔ 100. 100. 100. % >C055 OV-TRQ
FW-V 100%
C056 Over-torque (reverse
regenerating) level
setting
Threshold for intelligent
output terminal [OTQ],
quadrant II. Range is:
0 to 200%, up to –550xxx;
0 to 180%, –750 to 1500xxx
✘ ✔ 100. 100. 100. % >C056 OV-TRQ
RV-R 100%
C057 Over-torque (reverse
driving) level setting
Threshold for intelligent
output terminal [OTQ],
quadrant III. Range is:
0 to 200%, up to –550xxx;
0 to 180%, –750 to 1500xxx
✘ ✔ 100. 100. 100. % >C057 OV-TRQ
RV-V 100%
C058 Over-torque (forward
regenerating) level
setting
Threshold for intelligent
output terminal [OTQ],
quadrant IV. Range is:
0 to 200%, up to –550xxx;
0 to 180%, –750 to 1500xxx
✘ ✔ 100. 100. 100. % >C058 OV-TRQ
FW-R 100%
C061 Electronic thermal
warning level setting
Sets the threshold for intelli-
gent output [THM].
Range is 0 to 100%
✘ ✔ 80. 80. 80. % >C061 E-THM
WARN 080%
C062 Alarm code output Allows binary alarm codes
to be output to intelligent
terminals.
Three option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable – 3-bit code
02 Enable – 4-bit code
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C062 AL-CODE
SELECT OFF
C063 Zero speed detection
level
Range is 0.00 to 99.99 /
100.0 Hz
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 Hz >C063 ZS
LEVEL 000.00Hz
“C” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–59
Serial
Communications
The following table configures the communications port of the SJ300 inverter. You can have up
to thirty-two devices on the serial communications network. The inverters are slaves and the
computer or digital operator is the master. Thus, all inverters on the serial connection must use
the same baud rate, data length, parity, and stop bits. However, each device on the serial
network must have a unique node address. See “Serial Communications” on page B–1 for more
information.
“C” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
C070 Data command method Four option codes:
02 Digital operator
03 RS485
04 Expansion card #1
05 Expansion card #2
✘ ✘ 02 02 02 — >C070 PARAM
SELECT REM
C071 Communication speed
selection
Five option codes:
02 (Test)
03 2400bps
04 4800bps
05 9600bps
06 19200bps
✘ ✔ 04 04 04 bps >C071 RS485
BAU 4800bps
C072 Node allocation Set the address of the
inverter on the network.
Range is 1 to 32.
✘ ✔ 1. 1. 1. — >C072 RS485
ADDRESS 01
C073 Communication data
length selection
Two option codes:
07 7-bit data
08 8-bit data
✘ ✔ 777—
>C073 RS485
BIT 7BIT
C074 Communication parity
selection
Three option codes:
00 No parity
01 Even parity
02 Odd parity
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C074 RS485
PARITY NO
C075 Communication stop bit
selection
Two option codes:
01 1 stop bit
02 2 stop bits
✘ ✔ 111—
>C075 RS485
STOPBIT 1BIT
C078 Communication wait
time
Time the inverter waits after
receiving a message before it
transmits. Range is 0.0 to
1000 ms
✘ ✔ 0. 0. 0. — >C078 RS485
WAIT 0000ms
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–60
Analog Signal
Calibration
Settings
The functions in the following table configure the signals for the analog output terminals. Note
that these settings do not change the current/voltage or sink/source characteristics – only the
zero and span (scaling) of the signals.
NOTE: Settings C081, C082, C083, C121, C122, C123 are factory-calibrated for each inverter.
Do not change these settings unless absolutely necessary. Note that if you restore factory
defaults for all parameters, these settings will not change.
“C” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
C081 [O] input span calibra-
tion
Range is 0 to 65530 ✔ ✔ Factory-calibrated — >C081 O-ADJUST
TOP 02119
C082 [OI] input span calibra-
tion
Range is 0 to 65530 ✔ ✔ Factory-calibrated — >C082 OI-ADJUST
TOP 02512
C083 [O2] input span calibra-
tion
Range is 0 to 65530 ✔ ✔ Factory-calibrated — >C083 O2-ADJUST
TOP 02818
C085 Thermistor input tuning Range is 0.0 to 1000 ✔ ✔ 105.0 105.0 105.0 —>C085 THERM
ADJUST 0105.0
C086 [AM] terminal offset
tuning
Range is 0.0 to 10.0V ✔ ✔ 0.0 0.0 0.0 V >C086 AM-MONITOR
OFFSET 00.0V
C087 [AMI] terminal meter
tuning
Range is 0.0 to 250% ✔ ✔ 80. 80. 80. % >C087 AMI-MON
ADJUST 080
C088 [AMI] terminal offset
tuning
Range is 0 to 20mA ✔ ✔ Factory-calibrated mA >C088 AMI-MON
OFFSET 04.0mA
C121 [O] input zero calibra-
tion
Range is 0 to 6553 (65530) ✔ ✔ Factory-calibrated — >C121 O-ADJUST
ZERO 00000
C122 [OI] input zero calibra-
tion
Range is 0 to 6553 (65530) ✔ ✔ Factory-calibrated — >C122 OI-ADJUST
ZERO 00000
C123 [O2] input zero calibra-
tion
Range is 0 to 6553 (65530) ✔ ✔ Factory-calibrated — >C123 O2-ADJUST
ZERO 03622
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–61
Miscellaneous
Functions
The following table contains miscellaneous functions not in other function groups.
C102/C103: Reset Mode / Restart Mode – The reset mode selection, set via parameter C102,
determines how the inverter responds to the [RS] intelligent input signal or keypad Stop/Reset
key in a trip condition. The options allow you to cancel the trip on either the OFF-to-ON or
ON-to-OFF transition of [RS], and if desired, stop the inverter if it is in Run Mode. A trip event
causes the inverter output to the motor to turn OFF immediately. If in Run Mode when the trip
occurred, the inverter and motor will enter free-run stop (coasting) operation. In some applica-
tions, the motor and load will still be coasting when the inverter returns to normal Run Mode
operation. For that situation, you can configure the inverter output (C103=00) to resume opera-
tion from 0 Hz and accelerate normally. Or, you can configure the inverter (C103=01) to
resume operation from the current speed of the motor (frequency matching)—often used in
applications such as HVAC.
“C” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
C091 Debug mode enable Two option codes:
00 Display
01 No display
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C091 INITIAL
DEBG OFF
C101 Up/Down memory
mode selection
Controls speed setpoint for
the inverter after power
cycle. Two option codes:
00 Clear last frequency
(return to default
frequency F001)
01 Keep last frequency
adjusted by UP/DWN
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C101 UP/DWN
DATA NO-STR
“C” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
C102 Reset mode selection Determines response to
Reset input [RST].
Three option codes:
00 Cancel trip state at input
signal ON transition,
Stops inverter if in Run
Mode
01 Cancel trip state at signal
OFF transition, Stops
inverter if in Run Mode
02 Cancel trip state at input
signal ON transition, no
effect if in Run Mode.
✔ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C102 RESET
SELECT ON
C103 Restart mode after reset Two option codes:
00 Restart at 0 Hz
01 Resume operation after
frequency matching
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >C103 RESET
f-Mode ZST
C111 Overload setting (2) Range is 0.00 times rated
current to 2.00 times rated
current
✘ ✔ Rated current for
each inverter model
A>C111 OL
LEVEL2 0016.5A
“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–62
“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions
Introduction The “H” Group parameters configure the
inverter for the motor characteristics. You
must manually set H003 and H004 values
to match the motor. Most of the remaining
parameters are related to vector control, and
are in use only when function A044 is set
for one of the vector control modes as
shown in the diagram. The procedure in
“Auto-tuning of Motor Constants” on
page 4–67 automatically sets all the param-
eters related to vector control. If you
configure the inverter to use vector control,
we highly recommend letting the auto-
tuning procedure derive the values for you.
If you want to reset the parameters to the
factory default settings, use the procedure
in “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on
page 6–9.
NOTE: The auto-tuning procedure and related warning messages are in “Auto-tuning of Motor
Constants” on page 4–67. Please read these before trying to auto-tune the motor parameters.
Output
V/f control,
constant torque
V/f control,
variable torque
V/f control, free-
setting curve
Inverter Torque Control Algorithms
Sensorless vector
(SLV) control
Sensorless vector,
0Hz domain
Vector control with
sensor
00
05
04
03
02
01
A044
“H” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
H001 Auto-tuning Setting Three states for auto-tuning
function, option codes:
00 Auto-tuning OFF
01 Auto-tune (measure
motor resistance and
inductance, without
rotating)
02 Auto-tune (rotate motor)
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >H001 AUX
AUTO NOR
H002 Motor data selection,
1st motor
Select one of three motor
parameter sets, 3 options:
00 Standard motor data
01 Auto-tuning data
02 Adaptive tuning data
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >H002 AUX
DATA NOR
H202 Motor data selection,
2nd motor
Select one of three motor
parameter sets, 3 options:
00 Standard motor data
01 Auto-tuning data
02 Adaptive tuning data
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >H202 2AUX
DATA NOR
H003 Motor capacity, 1st
motor
Select 0.2 to 75.0kW for
models up to –550xxx,
0.2 to 160.0kW for models
–750xxx to –1500xxx
✘ ✘ Factory set kW >H003 AUX
K 003.70kW
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–63
“H” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
H203 Motor capacity, 2nd
setting
Select 0.2 to 75.0kW for
models up to –550xxx,
0.2 to 160.0kW for models
–750xxx to –1500xxx
✘ ✘ Factory set kW >H203 2AUX
K 003.70kW
H004 Motor poles setting, 1st
motor
Four selections:
2 / 4 / 6 / 8
✘ ✘ 444Poles
>H004 AUX
P 4P
H204 Motor poles setting, 2nd
motor
Four selections:
2 / 4 / 6 / 8
✘ ✘ 444Poles
>H204 2AUX
P 4P
H005 Motor speed constant,
1st motor
Motor proportional gain
constant (factory set),
range is 0.01 to 99
✔ ✔ 1.590 1.590 1.590 —>H005 AUX
KP 1.590
H205 Motor speed constant,
2nd motor
Motor proportional gain
constant (factory set)
range is 0 to 99
✔ ✔ 1.590 1.590 1.590 —>H205 2AUX
KP 1.590
H006 Motor stabilization
constant, 1st motor
Motor constant (factory set),
range is 0 to 255
✔ ✔ 100. 100. 100. — >H006 AUX
KCD 00100
H206 Motor stabilization
constant, 2nd motor
Motor constant (factory set),
range is 0 to 255
✔ ✔ 100. 100. 100. — >H206 2AUX
KCD 00100
H306 Motor stabilization
constant, 3rd motor
Motor constant (factory set),
range is 0 to 255
✔ ✔ 100. 100. 100. — >H306 3AUX
KCD 00100
H020 Motor constant R1, 1st
motor
Range is 0.000 to 65.53,
0.000 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
Ohm >H020 AUX
R1 00.489ohm
H220 Motor constant R1, 2nd
motor
Range is 0.000 to 65.53,
0.000 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
Ohm >H220 2AUX
R1 00.000ohm
H021 Motor constant R2, 1st
motor
Range is 0.000 to 65.53,
0.000 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
Ohm >H021 AUX
R2 00.355ohm
H221 Motor constant R2, 2nd
motor
Range is 0.000 to 65.53,
0.000 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
Ohm >H221 2AUX
R2 00.355ohm
H022 Motor constant L, 1st
motor
Range is 0.00 - 655.3 mH,
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 - 655.3
✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
mH >H022 AUX
L 005.12mH
H222 Motor constant L, 2nd
motor
Range is 0.00 - 655.3 mH,
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 - 655.3
✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
mH >H222 2AUX
L 005.12mH
H023 Motor constant I0, 1st
motor
Range is 0.00 to 655.3 A
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 - 655.3
✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
A>H023 AUX
I0 008.02A
H223 Motor constant I0, 2nd
motor
Range is 0.00 to 655.3 A,
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 - 655.3
✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
A>H223 2AUX
I0 008.02A
H024 Motor Constant J, 1st
motor
Ratio (unit-less), range is
1.0 to 1000
✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
—>H024 AUX
J 000.055
“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–64
H224 Motor constant J,
2nd motor
Ratio (unit-less), range is
1.0 to 1000
✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
—>H224 2AUX
J 000.055
H030 Auto-tuned motor
constant R1, 1st motor
Auto-tuning data ✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
Ohm >H030 AUX
A-R1 00.489ohm
H230 Auto-tuned motor
constant R1, 2nd motor
Auto-tuning data ✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
Ohm >H230 2AUX
A-R1 00.489ohm
H031 Auto-tuned motor
constant R2, 1st motor
Auto-tuning data ✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
Ohm >H031 AUX
A-R2 00.355ohm
H231 Auto-tuned motor
constant R2, 2nd motor
Auto-tuning data ✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
Ohm >H231 2AUX
A-R2 00.355ohm
H032 Auto-tuned motor
constant L, 1st motor
Auto-tuning data ✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
mH >H032 AUX
A-L 005.12mH
H232 Auto-tuned motor
constant L, 2nd motor
Auto-tuning data ✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
mH >H232 2AUX
A-L 005.12mH
H033 Auto-tuned motor
constant I0, 1st motor
Auto-tuning data ✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
A>H033 AUX
A-I0 008.02A
H233 Auto-tuned motor
constant I0, 2nd motor
Auto-tuning data ✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
A>H233 2AUX
A-I0 008.02A
H034 Auto-tuned motor
constant J, 1st motor
Auto-tuning data ✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
—>H034 AUX
A-J 0000.055
H234 Auto constant J,
2nd motor
Auto-tuning data ✘ ✘ According to
inverter rating
—>H234 2AUX
A-J 0000.055
H050 PI proportional gain for
1st motor
Range is 0.0 to 99.9 / 100.0
to 999.9 / 1000%
✔ ✔ 100 100 100 % >H050 AUX
KSP 0100.0%
H250 PI proportional gain for
2nd motor
Range is 0.0 to 99.9 / 100.0
to 999.9 / 1000%
✔ ✔ 100 100 100 % >H250 2AUX
KSP 0100.0%
H051 PI integral gain for 1st
motor
Range is 0.0 to 99.9 / 100.0
to 999.9 / 1000%
✔ ✔ 100 100 100 % >H051 AUX
KSI 0100.0%
H251 PI integral gain for 2nd
motor
Range is 0.0 to 99.9 / 100.0
to 999.9 / 1000%
✔ ✔ 100 100 100 % >H251 2AUX
KSI 0100.0%
H052 P proportional gain
setting for 1st motor
Range is 0.00 to 10.00 ✔ ✔ 1.00 1.00 1.00 — >H052 AUX
KSPP 001.00
H252 P proportional gain
setting for 2nd motor
Range is 0.00 to 10.00 ✔ ✔ 1.00 1.00 1.00 — >H252 2AUX
KSPP 001.00
H060 0Hz SLV limit for 1st
motor
Range is 0.0 to 100.0% ✔ ✔ 100. 100. 100. % >H060 AUX
0SLV-LMT 100.0%
H260 0Hz SLV limit for 2nd
motor
Range is 0 to 100.0% ✔ ✔ 100. 100. 100. % >H260 2AUX
0SLV-LMT 100.0%
H070 Terminal selection PI
proportional gain setting
Range is 0 to 99.9 / 100.0 to
999.9 / 1000%
✔ ✔ 100.0 100.0 100.0 %>H070 AUX
CH-KSP 0100.0%
H071 Terminal selection PI
integral gain setting
Range is 0 to 99.9 / 100.0 to
999.9 / 1000%
✔ ✔ 100.0 100.0 100.0 %>H071 AUX
CH-KSI 0100.0%
H072 Terminal selection P
proportional gain setting
Range is 0.00 to 10.00 ✔ ✔ 1.00 1.00 1.00 — >H072 AUX
CH-KSPP 001.00
“H” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–65
“P” Group: Expansion Card Functions
The two (optional) expansion cards for the SJ300 have associated configuration data. The
following table defines the functions and their value ranges. Please refer to the expansion card
manual for more details.
“P” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
P001 Operation mode on
expansion card 1 error
Two option codes:
00 Trip (stop motor)
01 Continuous operation
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >P001 OPTION1
SELECT TRP
P002 Operation mode on
expansion card 2 error
Two option codes:
00 Trip (stop motor)
01 Continuous operation
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >P002 OPTION2
SELECT TRP
P010 Feedback option enable Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >P010 FEEDBACK
SELECT OFF
P011 Encoder pulse-per-
revolution (PPR) setting
Range is 128 to 65000
pulses per revolution
✘ ✘ 1024 1024 1024 pulse >P011 FEEDBACK
ENC-P 01024pls
P012 Control pulse setting Selects between automatic
speed regulation (ASR) and
automatic position regula-
tion (APR) modes.
Two option codes:
00 ASR mode
01 APR mode
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >P012 FEEDBACK
CONTROL ASR
P013 Pulse input mode setting Pulse input mode setting.
Three option codes:
00 quadrature
01 count and direction
02 separate forward and
reverse pulse trains
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >P013 FEEDBACK
PULSE MD0
P014 Home search stop
position setting
Range is 0 to 4095 pulses ✘ ✔ 0. 0. 0. — >P014 FEEDBACK
POS 0000pls
P015 Home search speed
setting
Range is 0.00 to 99.99 /
100.0 to 120.0Hz
✘ ✔ 5.00 5.00 5.00 Hz >P015 FEEDBACK
FC 005.00Hz
P016 Home search direction
setting
Two option codes:
00 Forward
01 Reverse
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >P016 FEEDBACK
TURN FW
P017 Home search comple-
tion range setting
Range is 0 to 10,000 pulses ✘ ✔ 555pulse
>P017 FEEDBACK
L 00005pls
P018 Home search comple-
tion delay time setting
Range is 0.00 to 9.99
seconds
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 sec. >P018 FEEDBACK
TW 000.00s
P019 Electronic gear set
position selection
Two option codes:
00 Position feedback side
01 Position command side
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >P019 FEEDBACK
EGRP FB
P020 Electronic gear ratio
numerator setting
Range is 1 to 9999 ✘ ✔ 1. 1. 1. — >P020 FEEDBACK
EGR-N 00001
P021 Electronic gear ratio
denominator setting
Range is 1 to 9999 ✘ ✔ 1. 1. 1. — >P021 FEEDBACK
EGR-D 00001
“P” Group: Expansion Card Functions
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–66
NOTE: Parameters P044 to P049 are available only in inverters with manufacturing code
x8K xxxxxx xxxxx or later. The manufacturing code is printed on the product specifications
labels, located on the front and side of the inverter housing.
P022 Feed-forward gain
setting
Range is 0.00 top 99.99 /
100.0
✘ ✔ 0.00 0.00 0.00 — >P022 FEEDBACK
FFWG 000.00
P023 Position loop gain
setting
Range is 0.00 to 99.99 /
100.0
✘ ✔ 0.50 0.50 0.50 — >P023 FEEDBACK
G 000.50
P025 Temperature compensa-
tion thermistor enable
Allows for motor-mounted
thermistor to calibrate
output to motor temperature
Two option codes:
00 Disable
01 Enable
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >P025 FEEDBACK
R2-ADJ OFF
P026 Over-speed error
detection level setting
Range is 0.0 to 150.0% ✘ ✔ 135.0 135.0 135.0 %>P026 FEEDBACK
0SPD 135.0%
P027 Speed deviation error
detection level setting
Range is 0.00 to 99.99 /
120Hz
✘ ✔ 7.50 7.50 7.50 — >P027 FEEDBACK
NER 007.50Hz
P031 Accel/decel time input
selection
Three options:
00 Inverter
01 Expansion card 1
02 Expansion card 2
✘ ✘ 00 00 00 — >P031 ACC/DEC
SELECT REM
P032 Positioning command
input selection
Three options:
00 Inverter
01 Expansion card 1
02 Expansion card 2
✘ ✔ 00 00 00 — >P032 P-SET
SELECT REM
P044 DeviceNet comm
watchdog timer
Range is 0.00 99.99 seconds ✘ ✘ 1.00 1.00 1.00 — >P044 DEVICENET
TIMER 01.00s
P045 Inverter action on
DeviceNet comm error
Five options:
00 Trip
01 Decelerate and trip
02 Hold last speed
03 Free run stop
04 Decelerate and stop
✘ ✘ 01 01 01 — >P045 DEVICENET
T-OUT FTP
P046 DeviceNet polled I/O:
Output instance number
Three settings:
20, 21, 100
✘ ✘ 21 21 21 — >P046 DEVICENET
O-AS-INS 021
P047 DeviceNet polled I/O:
Input instance number
Three settings:
70, 71, 101
✘ ✘ 71 71 71 — >P047 DEVICENET
O-AS-INS 071
P048 Inverter action on
DeviceNet idle mode
Five options:
00 Trip
01 Decelerate and trip
02 Hold last speed
03 Free run stop
04 Decelerate and stop
✘ ✘ 01 01 01 — >P048 DEVICENET
IDLE FTP
P049 DeviceNet motor poles
setting for RPM
Range is 00 to 38 (even
numbers only)
✘ ✘ 0 0 0 poles >P049 DEVICENET
P 00P
“P” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–67
“U” Group: User-selectable Menu Functions
The user-selectable menu functions allow you to configure (select) any twelve of the other
functions in the inverter and place them together in a convenient list. This feature provides
quick access for the most-used functions needed for your application. Each U Group function
can serve as a pointer to any of the other parameters. You do not have to use the Store key to
retain each association; just scroll to the desired standard parameter for each U Group function
and leave it. The setting can point to a monitor-only parameter (such as D001), or point to
editable parameters (such as A001). In the case of pointing to an editable functions, you use the
Up/Down keys to change the value and the Store key to accept the change into memory—the
same procedure as a normal parameter edit.
TIP: Function B037 selects which parameter groups are displayed. If you want to limit the
displayed parameters to only the U Group functions, set B037=02.
“U” Function Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
Defaults
Units SRW Display
Func.
Code Name Description –FE
(CE)
–FU
(UL)
–FR
(Jpn)
U001
User-selected function “no” (disabled), or any of
the functions D001 to P049
✘ ✔ no no no — >U001 USER
1 no
U002 ✘ ✔ no no no — >U002 USER
2 no
U003 ✘ ✔ no no no — >U003 USER
3 no
U004 ✘ ✔ no no no — >U004 USER
4 no
U005 ✘ ✔ no no no — >U005 USER
5 no
U006 ✘ ✔ no no no — >U006 USER
6 no
U007 ✘ ✔ no no no — >U007 USER
7 no
U008 ✘ ✔ no no no — >U008 USER
8 no
U009 ✘ ✔ no no no — >U009 USER
9 no
U010 ✘ ✔ no no no — >U010 USER
10 no
U011 ✘ ✔ no no no — >U011 USER
11 no
U012 ✘ ✔ no no no — >U012 USER
12 no
Programming Error Codes
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–68
Programming Error Codes
The SJ300 inverter operator keypad displays a special code (begins with the character) to
indicate a programming error. Programming errors exist when one parameter conflicts with the
meaningful range permitted by related parameter(s). Note that particular real-time frequency
(speed) input levels can cause a conflict in some situations. After a conflict exists, the error
code will appear on the display, or you can view it later with D090 in Monitor Mode. Also, the
PGM LED on the display will flash ON/OFF when programming. These indications are
automatically cleared when the parameter is corrected to the allowed range.
Programming Error
Code
Parameter out of bounds Boundary defined by...
Code Description <, > Code Description
001 201 A061 / A261 Frequency upper limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor
> A004 /
A204 /
A304
Maximum frequency;
1st, 2nd, 3rd motor
002 202 A062 / A262 Frequency lower limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor
>
004 204 304 A003 / A203 /
A303
Base frequency setting;
1st, 2nd, 3rd motor
>
005 205 305 F001,
A020 / A220 /
A320
Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd, 3rd motor
>
006 206 306 A021 to A035 Multi-speed freq. settings >
012 212 A062 / A262 Frequency lower limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor
> A061 / A261 Frequency upper limit setting;
1st, 2nd motor
015 215 F001,
A020 / A220
Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd motor
>
016 216 A021 to A035 Multi-speed freq. settings >
021 221 A061 / A261 Frequency upper limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor
< A062 / A262 Frequency lower limit setting;
1st, 2nd motor
025 225 F001,
A020 / A220
Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd motor
<
031 231 A061 / A261 Frequency upper limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor
< B082 Start frequency adjustment
032 232 A062 / A262 Frequency lower limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor
<
035 235 335 F001,
A020 / A220 /
A320
Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd, 3rd motor
<
036 A021 to A035 Multi-speed freq. settings <
037 A038 Jog frequency setting <
085 285 385 F001,
A020 / A220 /
A320
Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd, 3rd motor
>f-x,
<f+x
A063 ± A064
A065 ± A066
A067 ± A068
Jump (center) frequency ±
jump (hysteresis) frequency
width setting
(See note after table)
086 A021 to A035 Multi-speed freq. settings >f-x,
<f+x
SJ300 Inverter
Configuring Drive
Parameters
3–69
NOTE: Set frequency (speed) values are not permitted to be inside the jump frequency ranges,
if defined. When a frequency reference value from a real-time source (such as keypad potenti-
ometer or analog input) are inside a jump frequency range, the actual speed is automatically
forced to equal the lowest point of the jump range.
Programming Error
Code
Parameter out of bounds Boundary defined by...
Code Description <, > Code Description
091 291 A061 / A261 Frequency upper limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor
> B112 Free-setting V/f frequency (7)
092 292 A062 / A262 Frequency lower limit
setting; 1st, 2nd motor
>
095 295 F001,
A020 / A220
Output frequency setting,
Multi-speed freq. setting;
1st, 2nd motor
>
096 A021 to A035 Multi-speed freq. settings >
110 B100, B102,
B104, B106,
B108, B110
Free V/f frequency >
B102, B104,
B106, B108,
B110
Free V/f frequency > B100 Free-setting V/f frequency (1)
B100 Free V/f frequency < B102 Free-setting V/f frequency (2)
B104, B106,
B108, B110
Free V/f frequency >
B100, B102 Free V/f frequency < B104 Free-setting V/f frequency (3)
B106, B108,
B110
Free V/f frequency >
B100, B102,
B104
Free V/f frequency < B106 Free-setting V/f frequency (4)
B108, B110 Free V/f frequency >
B100, B102,
B104, B106
Free V/f frequency < B108 Free-setting V/f frequency (5)
B110 Free V/f frequency >
B100, B102,
B104, B106,
B108
Free V/f frequency < B110 Free-setting V/f frequency (6)
120 B017, B019 Free-setting electronic
thermal frequency
< B015 Free-setting, electronic
thermal frequency (1)
B015 Free-setting electronic
thermal frequency
> B017 Free-setting, electronic
thermal frequency (2)
B019 Free-setting electronic
thermal frequency
<
B015, B017 Free-setting electronic
thermal frequency
> B019 Free-setting, electronic
thermal frequency (3)
Operations
and Monitoring
In This Chapter.... page
— Introduction ....................................................................................... 2
— Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss........................ 4
— Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices ........................................... 7
— Using Intelligent Input Terminals..................................................... 11
— Using Intelligent Output Terminals .................................................. 42
— Analog Input Operation................................................................... 59
— Analog Output Operation ................................................................ 62
— Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control .................................... 65
— PID Loop Operation ........................................................................ 71
— Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors.................................... 72
4
Introduction
Operations
and Monitoring
4–2
Introduction
The previous material in Chapter 3 gave a reference listing of all the programmable functions
of the inverter. We suggest that you first scan through the listing of inverter functions to gain a
general familiarity. This chapter will build on that knowledge in the following ways:
1. Related functions – Some parameters interact with or depend on the settings in other
functions. This chapter lists “required settings” for a programmable function to serve as a
cross-reference and an aid in showing how functions interact.
2. Intelligent terminals – Some functions rely on an input signal from control logic terminals
or generate output signals in other cases.
3. Electrical interfaces – This chapter shows how to make connections between the inverter
and other electrical devices.
4. Auto-tuning – The SJ300 inverter has the ability to run a calibration procedure in which it
takes measurements of the motor’s electrical characteristics. This chapter shows how to run
the auto-tuning procedure to help the inverter run the motor more smoothly and efficiently.
5. PID Loop Operation – The SJ300 has a built-in PID loop that calculates the optimal
inverter output frequency to control an external process. This chapter shows the parameters
and input/output terminals associated with PID loop operation.
6. Multiple motors – A single SJ300 inverter may be used with two or more motors in some
types of applications. This chapter shows the electrical connections and inverter parameters
involved in multiple-motor applications.
The topics in this chapter can help you decide the features that are important to your applica-
tion, and how to use them. The basic installation covered in Chapter 2 concluded with the
powerup test and running the motor. Now, this chapter starts from that point and shows how to
make the inverter part of a larger control or automation system.
Cautions for
Operating
Procedures
Before continuing, please read the following Caution messages.
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not to touch them.
Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high speed.
Be sure check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the
inverter. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default
setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective
manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval.
Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage.
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–3
Warnings for
Operating
Procedures
Before continuing, please read the following Warning messages.
WARNING: Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing the front case. While
the inverter is energized, be sure not to open the front case. Otherwise, there is the danger of
electric shock.
WARNING: Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands. Otherwise, there is
the danger of electric shock.
WARNING: While the inverter is energized, be sure not to touch the inverter terminals even
when the motor is stopped. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
WARNING: If the Retry Mode is selected, the motor may suddenly restart after a trip stop. Be
sure to stop the inverter before approaching the machine (be sure to design the machine so that
safety for personnel is secure even if it restarts.) Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
WARNING: If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time, the inverter may restart
operation after the power supply recovers if the Run command is active. If a restart may pose
danger to personnel, so be sure to use a lock-out circuit so that it will not restart after power
recovery. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
WARNING: The Stop Key is effective only when the Stop function is enabled. Be sure to
enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency stop. Otherwise, it may cause injury to
personnel.
WARNING: During a trip event, if the alarm reset is applied and the Run command is present,
the inverter will automatically restart. Be sure to apply the alarm reset only after verifying the
Run command is OFF. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
WARNING: Be sure not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to put any conductive
object into it. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.
WARNING: If power is turned ON when the Run command is already active, the motor will
automatically start and injury may result. Before turning ON the power, confirm that the RUN
command is not present.
WARNING: When the Stop key function is disabled, pressing the Stop key does not stop the
inverter, nor will it reset a trip alarm.
WARNING: Be sure to provide a separate, hard-wired emergency stop switch when the appli-
cation warrants it.
Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss
Operations
and Monitoring
4–4
Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss
With the default SJ300 inverter configuration, a sudden power loss will cause the inverter to
shut down immediately. If running at the time, the motor and load will coast to a stop. And
without power, the inverter’s alarm output will not activate. This default performance may be
fine for applications with loads such as fans and pumps. However, some loads may require
controlled decelerations upon power loss, or you may want an alarm signal upon power loss.
This section describes how to harness regenerative energy so that the motor/load actually
powers the inverter long enough to control a final deceleration and power the alarm output.
The diagram below shows the default configuration. Chapter 2 covered wiring the power source
to the inverter input and the inverter output to the motor. By default, the inverter’s internal
control circuit gets its power from two phases (R and T) from the input. The user-accessible
2-wire jumper (R–R0 and T–T0) connects input power to the control circuit.
To provide power to the control circuit after input power loss, you must change the control
circuit wiring as shown below (steps provided on following page).
U
V
W
Motor
R
S
T
T
R
R0
T0
Power source,
3-phase
2-wire
jumper
P
PD
RB
N
To optional
braking resistor /
braking unit
Control
circuit
Rectifier Inverter
Converter DC bus
+
–
+
–
J51
Ferrite
filter
SJ300
AL0
AL2
AL1
To external
alarm circuit or
interface
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
U
V
W
Motor
R
S
T
T
R
R0
T0
Power source,
3-phase
2-wire
jumper,
20AWG
P
PD
RB
N
To optional
braking resistor /
braking unit
Control
circuit
Rectifier Inverter
Converter DC bus
+
–
+
–
J51
Ferrite
filter
SJ300
AL0
AL2
AL1
To external
alarm circuit or
interface
L1
L2
L3
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–5
Follow the steps to implement the wiring change shown in the previous diagram.
1. Remove the 2-wire jumper J51 (terminals [R0] and [T0] to connector J51).
2. Procure several inches of multi-strand 20 AWG (0.5mm2) or slightly heavier wire.
3. Connect a wire to terminal [R0] that is long enough to connect to terminal [P] (do not
connect to [P] yet).
4. Connect a wire to terminal [T0] that is long enough to connect to terminal [N] (do not
connect to [N] yet).
5. Remove the ferrite filter from the original jumper wire and then slide it onto the new wires
connecting to terminals [R0] and [T0]. (Be sure to save the original jumper in a safe place.)
6. Connect the wire from [R0] to [P], and connect the wire from [T0] to [N] as shown.
More information on power loss related alarm functions, see “Instantaneous Power Failure /
Under-voltage Signal” on page 4–51.
The following table lists the functions related to the controlled deceleration at power loss
feature. After making the wiring change, use function B050 to enable the feature. Use B051 to
determine the point at which a decaying DC bus voltage will trigger the controlled deceleration.
Use parameter B054 to specify an initial step-wise deceleration at power loss, and B053 to
specify the duration of the linear deceleration. Note that this feature also affects the output
signals that indicate instantaneous power fail and under-voltage conditions (see “Instantaneous
Power Failure / Under-voltage Signal” on page 4–51).
Func.
Code Name Description Range
B050 Controlled deceleration and
stop on power loss
Allows inverter control using regen-
erative energy to decelerate after loss
of input power (requires jumper
change)
Two option codes:
00Disable
01Enable
B051 DC bus voltage trigger level
during power loss
Sets trigger for controlled decelera-
tion and stop on power loss function
0.0 to 1000.V
B052 Over-voltage threshold during
power loss
Sets over-voltage threshold for
controlled deceleration function
0.0 to 1000.V
B053 Deceleration time setting
during power loss
Deceleration time inverter uses only
at power loss
0.01 to 99.99 sec. /
100.0 to 999.9 sec. /
1000 to 3600 sec.
B054 Initial output frequency
decrease during power loss
Sets the initial decrease in output
frequency upon power loss
0.00 to 10.00 Hz
Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss
Operations
and Monitoring
4–6
The timing diagram below shows a power loss scenario and the related parameter settings.
During the controlled deceleration the inverter itself acts as a load to decelerate the motor. With
either a high-inertia load or a short deceleration time (or both), it is possible that the inverter
impedance will not be low enough to continue linear deceleration and avoid an over-voltage
condition on the DC bus. Use parameter B052 to specify a threshold for the over-voltage. In
this case, the inverter pauses deceleration (runs at constant speed). When the DC bus decays
again below the threshold, linear deceleration resumes. The pause/resume process will repeat as
necessary until the DC bus energy is depleted (under-voltage condition occurs).
NOTE: (1) Be sure to set the over-voltage threshold greater than the DC bus voltage trigger
level (B052 > B051) for proper operation.
(2) Once the power loss deceleration function starts, it will complete and stop the motor even if
input power is restored. In that case, it automatically enables the Run mode again.
DC bus (V)
Output
Frequency
Under-voltage
level
B052
B051
B054
B053
t
t
0
0
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–7
Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices
Hitachi inverters (drives) are useful in many types of applications. During installation, the
inverter keypad (or other programming device) will facilitate the initial configuration. After
installation, the inverter will generally receive its control commands through the control logic
terminals or serial interface from another controlling device. In a simple application such as
single-conveyor speed control, a Run/Stop switch and potentiometer will give the operator all
the required control. In a sophisticated application, you may have a programmable logic
controller (PLC) as the system controller with several connections to the inverter.
It is not possible to cover all the possible types of application in this manual. It will be neces-
sary for you to know the electrical characteristics of the devices you want to connect to the
inverter. Then, this section and the following sections on I/O terminal functions can help you
quickly and safely connect those devices to the inverter.
CAUTION: It is possible to damage the inverter or other devices if your application exceeds
the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a connection point.
The connections between the inverter
and other devices rely on the electrical
input/output characteristics at both ends
of each connection, shown in the
diagram to the right. The inverter can
accept either sourcing or sinking type
inputs from an external device (such as
a PLC). A terminal jumper configures
the input type, connecting the input
circuit common to the supply (+) or (–).
Detailed wiring examples are in “Using
Intelligent Input Terminals” on page 4–
11. This chapter shows the inverter’s
internal electrical component(s) at each
I/O terminal and how to interface them
with external circuits.
In order to avoid equipment damage and
get your application running smoothly,
we recommend drawing a schematic of
each connection between the inverter
and the other device. Include the
internal components of each device in
the schematic, so that it makes a
complete circuit loop.
After making the schematic, then:
1. Verify that the current and voltage
for each connection is within the
operating limits of each device.
2. Make sure that the logic sense
(active high or active low) of any
ON/OFF connection is correct.
3. Verify inputs are configured
correctly (sink/source) to interface
to interface to any external devices (PLCs, etc.).
4. Check the zero and span (curve end points) for analog connections, and be sure the scale
factor from input to output is correct.
5. Understand what will happen at the system level if any particular device suddenly loses
power, or powers up after other devices.
5
3
1
7
6
4
2
8
Other device
Input
circuit
Output
circuit
SJ300 Inverter
Input
circuit
Output
circuit
Input
circuits
Inverter
Common
PLC
PLC
P24
CM1
+
–
24VDC
Jumper
Signal
Return
Signal
Return
Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices
Operations
and Monitoring
4–8
Example Wiring
Diagram
The schematic diagram below provides a general example of logic connector wiring, in
addition to basic power and motor wiring covered in Chapter 2. The goal of this chapter is to
help you determine the proper connections for the various terminals shown below for your
specific application needs.
U
V
W
Motor
R
S
T
Expansion
Card #1
(optional)
Expansion
Card #2
(optional)
T
R
R0
T0
Power source,
3-phase
P24
PLC
FW
8
3
2
1
Forward
Reverse
Intelligent inputs,
8 terminals
CM1
24VDC
TH
FM output
monitor
Thermistor
H
O
O2
OI
L
AM
AMI
4 – 20mA
Analog GND
+
–
+
–
-10 / 0 / +10 VDC
0 – 10VDC
+
–
+10VDC
reference
250Ω
10kΩ
10kΩ
+10VDC reference
P
PD
RB
N
Braking
resistor
(optional)
SP
SN
RP
SN
RS-485 serial
communications
Jumper for
termination
Send/
receive
100Ω
Intelligent relay output
(alarm function default)
Signals for expanded
features, including
encoder feedback,
digital I/O, and
DeviceNet networking
Intelligent outputs,
5 terminals,
open-collector
CM2
11
12
13
14
15
Input
circuits
Output
circuits
FM
Braking
unit
(optional)
AM output
monitor
AMI output
monitor
Control
circuit
Recti-
fier
InverterConverter DC bus
+
–
+
–
2-wire jumper J51
Ferrite filter
SJ300
AL0
AL2
AL1
NOTE: For the wiring of intel-
ligent I/O and analog inputs,
be sure to use twisted pair /
shielded cable. Attach the
shield wire for each signal to
its respective common termi-
nal at the inverter end only.
+–
CM1
Default jumper position
for –xFU/–xFR models
(sourcing type inputs)
Default jumper position
for –xFE models
(sinking type inputs)
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–9
Specifications of
Control and Logic
Connections
The control logic connector board is removable for wiring convenience, as shown below (first,
remove two retaining screws). The small connector to the left is for serial communications.
Specifications for the logic connection terminals are in the following table:
Alarm
relay
Logic
inputs
Analog
inputs
Analog
outputs
Logic
outputs
HO2
CM2
135 3 1 14
7 6 4 2 15
AL1
AL0 AL2
11
12
8
FM
AM
OOIL
SP SN RP SN
PowerSerial
communications
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
AMI
Retaining screw locations
Termin al N ame Description Ratings and Notes
[P24] +24V power for inputs 24VDC supply, 100 mA max.
[CM1] +24V common Common for 24V supply, [FW], [TH], inputs [1] to
[8], and [FM]. (Note: Do not ground)
[PLC] Common for logic inputs Common for input terminals [1] to [8], jumper to
CM1 for sinking, jumper to P24 for sourcing
[CM2] Common for logic outputs Common for output terminals [11] to [15]
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5],
[6], [7], [8]
Intelligent (programmable)
discrete logic inputs
27VDC max. (use [P24] or an external supply refer-
enced to terminal [CM1]), 4.7kΩ input impedance
[FW] Forward/stop command 27VDC max. (use [P24] or an external supply refer-
enced to terminal [CM1]), 4.7kΩ input impedance
[11], [12], [13],
[14], [15]
Intelligent (programmable)
discrete logic outputs
Open collector type, 50mA max. ON state current,
27 VDC maximum OFF state voltage
[TH] Thermistor input Reference to [CM1], min. thermistor power 100mW
[FM] PWM output 0 to 10VDC, 1.2 mA max., 50% duty cycle
[AM] Voltage analog output 0 to 10VDC, 2 mA max.
[AMI] Current analog output 4-20 mA, nominal load impedance 250Ω
[L] Common for analog inputs Sum of [OI], [O], and [H] currents (return)
[OI] Analog input, current 4 to 19.6 mA range, 20 mA nominal
[O] Analog input, voltage 0 to 9.6 VDC range, 10VDC nominal, 12VDC
max., input impedance 10 kΩ
[H] +10V analog reference 10VDC nominal, 10 mA max.
[AL0] Relay common contact Contacts AL0–AL1, maximum loads:
250VAC, 2A; 30VDC, 8A resistive load
250VAC, 0.2A; 30VDC, 0.6A inductive load
Contacts AL0–AL2, maximum loads:
250VAC, 1A; 30VDC 1A max. resistive load
250VAC, 0.2A; 30VDC, 0.2A max. inductive load
Min. loads: 100 VAC, 10mA; 5VDC, 100mA
[AL1] Relay contact, normally
closed during RUN
[AL2] Relay contact, normally
open during RUN
Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices
Operations
and Monitoring
4–10
Terminal Listing Use the following table to locate pages for intelligent input and output material in this chapter.
Intelligent INPUTS Intelligent OUTPUTS
Symbol Code Name Page Symbol Code Name Page
RV 01 Reverse Run/Stop 4–12 RUN 00 Run signal 4–43
CF1 02 Multi-speed select, Bit 0 (LSB) 4–13 FA1 01 Freq. arrival type 1 –
constant speed
4–44
CF2 03 Multi-speed select, Bit 1 4–13
CF3 04 Multi-speed select, Bit 2 4–13 FA2 02 Freq. arrival type 2 –
over-frequency
4–44
CF4 05 Multi-speed select, Bit 3 (LSB) 4–13
JG 06 Jogging 4–16 OL 03 Overload advance notice signal 4–46
DB 07 External signal for DC injection
braking
4–17 OD 04 Output deviation for PID control 4–47
AL 05 Alarm signal 4–48
SET 08 Set (select) second motor data 4–18 FA3 06 Freq. arrival type 3 – at freq. 4–44
2CH 09 2-stage accel and decel 4–19 OTQ 07 Over-torque signal 4–50
FRS 11 Free-run stop 4–20 IP 08 Instantaneous power failure signal 4–51
EXT 12 External trip 4–21 UV 09 Under-voltage signal 4–51
USP 13 Unattended start protection 4–22 TRQ 10 In torque limit signal 4–54
CS 14 Commercial power source 4–23 RNT 11 Run time over 4–54
SFT 15 Software lock 4–25 ONT 12 Power-ON time over 4–54
AT 16 Analog input voltage/current sel. 4–26 THM 13 Thermal alarm signal 4–55
SET3 17 Set (select) 3rd motor data 4–18 BRK 19 Brake release signal 4–58
RS 18 Reset inverter 4–27 BER 20 Brake error signal 4–58
STA 20 Start (3-wire interface) 4–29 ZS 21 Zero speed detect 4–58
STP 21 Stop (3-wire interface) 4–29 DSE 22 Speed deviation maximum 4–58
F/R 22 FW, RV (3-wire interface) 4–29 POK 23 Positioning completion 4–58
PID 23 PID ON/OFF 4–30 FA4 24 Freq. arrival type 4 –
over-frequency (2)
4–44
PIDC 24 PID Reset 4–30
CAS 26 Control gain setting 4–31 FA5 25 Freq. arrival type 5 –
at frequency (2)
4–44
UP 27 Remote control Up func. 4–33
DWN 28 Remote control Down func. 4–33 OL2 26 Overload advance notice
signal (2)
4–46
UDC 29 Remote control data clearing 4–33
OPE 31 Operator control 4–34
SF1–7 32–38 Multi-speed bits 1 to 7 4–13
OLR 39 Overload restriction 4–35
TL 40 Torque limit enable 4–37
TRQ1 41 Torque limit select, bit 1 (LSB) 4–37
TRQ2 42 Torque limit select, bit 2 (MSB) 4–37
PPI 43 P / PI mode selection 4–31
BOK 44 Brake confirmation signal 4–39
ORT 45 Orientation (home search) 4–41
LAC 46 LAC: LAD cancel 4–41
PCLR 47 Position deviation reset 4–41
STAT 48 Pulse train position cmd enable 4–41
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–11
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Intelligent terminals [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], and [8] are identical, programmable inputs
for general use. The input circuits can use the inverter’s internal (isolated) +24V field supply
(P24) to power the inputs. The input circuits connect internally to [PLC] as a common point. To
use the internal supply to power the inputs, use the jumper as shown. Remove the jumper to use
an external supply, or to interface to a PLC system (or other) that has solid state outputs. If you
use an external supply or PLC system, its power return must connect to the [PLC] terminal on
the inverter to complete the input circuit.
Input Wiring
Examples
The following four input configurations are available to interface the inverter inputs to switches
or the outputs of another system, such as a PLC.
5 3 17 6 4 28
Input circuits
+–
24VDC
common
Sinking inputs,
internal supply
SJ300 inverter
531
PLC
CM1
7 6 4 28
Input circuits
+–
24VDC
common
SJ300 inverter
5 3 17 6 4 28
Input circuits
+–
24VDC
common
External
power supply
SJ300 inverter
5 3 17 6 4 28
Input circuits
+–
24VDC
common
SJ300 inverter
Sourcing inputs,
internal supply
Sinking inputs,
external supply
Sourcing inputs,
external supply
External
power supply
P24
PLC
CM1
P24
PLC
CM1
P24
PLC
CM1
P24
+
–
+
–
Jumpered for sinking
inputs (default for
–xFE models)
Jumpered for sourcing
inputs (default for
–xFU/–xFR models)
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–12
Wiring Diagram
Conventions
The input wiring diagrams in this chapter are examples only. Default and non-default input
terminal assignments are noted throughout; your particular assignments may be different. The
wiring diagrams show the –xFU/–xFR model default [P24]–[PLC] jumper position (U.S./Jpn
versions), as shown below on the left. The common (return) for inputs is [CM1] in this case.
The diagram on the right shows the default jumper position and example input wiring for –xFE
models (Europe version). For this case, the common (return) for inputs is [P24]. Be sure the
jumper position and return terminal used match your application wiring needs.
Forward Run/
Stop and Reverse
Run/Stop
Commands
When you input the Run command via the dedicated terminal [FW], the inverter executes the
Forward Run command (high) or Stop command (low). When you input the Run command via
the programmable terminal [RV], the inverter executes the Reverse Run command (high) or
Stop command (low).
NOTE: The parameter F004, Keypad Run Key Routing, determines whether the single Run
key issues a Run FWD command or Run REV command. However, it has no effect on the [FW]
and [RV] input terminal operation.
WARNING: If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already active, the motor
starts rotation and is dangerous! Before turning power ON, confirm that the external Run
command is not active.
53142
FW
TH
PLC
P24
CM1
5 3 14 2
FW
TH
PLC
P24
CM1
Default jumper
position [P24]–[PLC]
and wiring example
(used throughout this
chapter)
–xFU/–xFR models (U.S./Jpn versions): –xFE models (Europe version):
Default jumper
position [PLC]–[CM1]
and wiring example
return return
RVFW RVFW
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name State Description
— FW Forward Run/Stop ON Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs
forward
OFF Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops
01 RV Reverse Run/Stop ON Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs
reverse
OFF Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops
Val id for
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
A002 = 01
Notes:
•When the Forward Run and Reverse Run
commands are active at the same time, the
inverter enters the Stop Mode.
•When a terminal associated with either [FW]
or [RV] function is configured for normally
closed, the motor starts rotation when that
terminal is disconnected or otherwise has no
input voltage.
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see examples above.)
RVFW
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–13
Multi-Speed
Select
The inverter can store up to 16 different fixed target frequencies (speeds) in parameters A020
to A035. Binary inputs select the speed through four of the intelligent terminals configured as
binary-encoded inputs CF1 to CF4 per the table. These can be any of the eight inputs, and in
any order. You can use fewer inputs if you need eight or fewer speeds.
NOTE: When choosing a subset of speeds to use, always start at the top of the table, and with
the least-significant bit: CF1, CF2, etc.
The example with eight speeds in the figure below shows how input switches configured for
CF1 – CF3 functions can change the motor speed in real time.
Multi-speed Override Feature - The multi-speed function can selectively override the
external analog speed reference input. When the Frequency Source Setting parameter
A001=01, the control terminal inputs determine the output frequency. At the same time, the
inverter can use multi-speed select for output frequency if one or more intelligent inputs are
configured as a CF type (CF1 to CF4). When all CF input(s) are OFF, the control terminal input
determines the output frequency normally. When one or more CF input(s) are ON, then the
corresponding multi-speed setting (see the table above) overrides and becomes the output
frequency.
Multi-
speed
Input Function Multi-
speed
Input Function
CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1 CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1
Speed 0 0000Speed 8 1000
Speed 1 0001Speed 9 1001
Speed 2 0 0 1 0 Speed 10 1 0 1 0
Speed 3 0 0 1 1 Speed 11 1 0 1 1
Speed 4 0 1 0 0 Speed 12 1 1 0 0
Speed 5 0 1 0 1 Speed 13 1 1 0 1
Speed 6 0 1 1 0 Speed 14 1 1 1 0
Speed 7 0 1 1 1 Speed 15 1 1 1 1
0th
CF1
CF2
CF3
1st
2nd
6th
5th
4th
3rd
7th
Speed
Switches
Fwd Run
t
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–14
While using the multi-speed capability, you can monitor the output frequency with monitor
function D001 during each segment of a multi-speed operation.
There are two ways to program the speeds into the registers A020 to A035:
1. Standard keypad programming:
a. Select each parameter A020 to A035.
b. Press the key to view the parameter value.
c. Use the and keys to edit the value.
d. Use the key to save the data to memory.
2. Programming using the CF switches:
a. Turn the Run command OFF (Stop Mode).
b. Turn inputs ON to select desired Multi-speed. Display the value of F001 on the digital
operator.
c. Set the desired output frequency by pressing the and keys.
d. Press the key once to store the set frequency. When this occurs, F001 indicates the
output frequency of the selected Multi-speed.
e. Press the key once to confirm that the indication is the same as the set frequency.
f. Repeat operations in 2. a) to 2. e) to set the frequency of other Multi-speeds. It can be set
also by parameters A020 to A035 in the first procedure 1. a) to 1. d).
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
02 CF1 Binary speed select,
Bit 0 (LSB)
ON Bit 0, logical 1
OFF Bit 0, logical 0
03 CF2 Binary speed select,
Bit 1
ON Bit 1, logical 1
OFF Bit 1, logical 0
04 CF3 Binary speed binary
select, Bit 2
ON Bit 2, logical 1
OFF Bit 2, logical 0
05 CF4 Binary speed select,
Bit 3 (MSB)
ON Bit 3, logical 1
OFF Bit 3, logical 0
Valid fo r
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
F001, A020 to A035
A019=00
Notes:
•When programming the multi-speed settings,
be sure to press the Store key each time and
then set the next multi-speed setting. Note
that when the Store key is not pressed, no
data will be set.
•When a multi-speed setting more than
50Hz(60Hz) is to be set, it is necessary to
program the maximum frequency A004 high
enough to allow that speed.
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
Example: (Some CF inputs require input
configuration; some are default inputs—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
CF1 CF2
CF3
CF4
(LSB) (MSB)
FUNC.
12
STR
12
STR
FUNC.
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–15
The Bit Operation method of speed control uses up to seven intelligent inputs to select from up
to eight speeds. Since the all-switches-OFF combination selects the first speed, you only need
N-1 switches to select N speeds. With Bit Operation speed control, only one input is normally
active at a time. If multiple switches are ON, the lower numbered input takes precedence
(determines the speed). The table and figure below show how the input combinations work.
The following table lists the option codes for assigning [SF1 to [SF7] to the intelligent inputs.
0th
SF1
SF2
SF3
3rd
4th
2nd
5th
1st
7th
6th
Speed
Switches
Fwd Run
SF4
SF5
SF6
SF7
Multi-
speed
Input Function
SF7 SF6 SF5 SF4 SF3 SF2 SF1
Speed 0 0000000
Speed 1 —————— 1
Speed 2 ————— 1 0
Speed 3 — — — — 1 0 0
Speed 4 ———1000
Speed 5 ——10000
Speed 6 —100000
Speed 7 1000000
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Description
32 SF1 Bit-level speed select 1 Bit-level speed select, Bit 0
33 SF2 Bit-level speed select 2 Bit-level speed select, Bit 1
34 SF3 Bit-level speed select 3 Bit-level speed select, Bit 2
35 SF4 Bit-level speed select 4 Bit-level speed select, Bit 3
36 SF5 Bit-level speed select 5 Bit-level speed select, Bit 4
37 SF6 Bit-level speed select 6 Bit-level speed select, Bit 5
38 SF7 Bit-level speed select 7 Bit-level speed select, Bit 6
Valid fo r
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
F001, A020 to A035
A019=00
Notes:
•When all [SFx] inputs are OFF, the speed is
set by default to the value in F001.
•When a multi-speed setting more than
50Hz(60Hz) is to be set, it is necessary to
program the maximum frequency A004 high
enough to allow that speed.
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.) SF1SF3SF5SF7 SF2SF4SF6
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–16
Jogging
Command
The Jog input [JG] is used to command the
motor to rotate slowly in small increments
for manual operation. The speed is limited
to 10 Hz. The frequency for the jogging
operation is set by parameter A038. Jogging
does not use an acceleration ramp. There-
fore setting the jogging frequency A038 too
high will cause inverter tripping.
A jog command may arrive while the motor
is running. You can program the inverter to
either ignore or respond to a jog command
in this case by using function A039. The
type of deceleration used to end a motor jog
is also selectable by programming function A039. Six jog mode options are defined below:
In the left example diagram below, the Jog command is ignored. In the right example diagram,
a jog command interrupts a Run mode operation. However, if the Jog command turns ON
before the [FW] or [RV] terminal turns ON, the inverter output turns OFF.
Jogging During Motor Operation
Jog Deceleration Method
Disabled, A039= Enabled, A039=
00 03 Free-run stop (coasting)
01 04 Deceleration (normal level) and stop
02 05 Use DC braking and stop
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
06 JG Jogging ON Enters Jog Mode if enabled (see above)
OFF Jog is OFF
Valid fo r
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
A002= 01, A038 > B082,
A038 > 0, A039=00 to 05
Notes:
•Jogging is not performed when the value of
A038 jogging frequency is smaller than the
start frequency B082 or the value is 0 Hz.
•Be sure to turn ON [FW] or [RV] after the
[JG] input turns ON for a jog operation.
•When setting A039 to 02 or 05, you must also
set the DC braking parameters.
[JG]
[FW]
Jog decel type
[RV]
Output
frequency
A038
A039
t
[JG]
[FW]
Output
frequency A039=00, 01, 02
Decelerating stop (00) shown
[JG]
[FW]
Output
frequency A039=03, 04, 05
Free-run stop (05) shown
A038 A038
t
t
531
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see page 4–12.)
JG
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–17
External Signal
for DC Injection
Braking
When the terminal [DB] is turned ON, the
DC braking [DB] feature is enabled. Set the
following parameters when the external DC
braking terminal is to be used:
• A053 – DC braking delay time setting.
The range 0.0 to 5.0 seconds.
• A054 – DC braking force setting. The
range is 0 to 100%.
The scenarios to the right help show how
DC braking works in various situations.
1. Scenario 1 – The [FW] Run or [RV]
Run terminal is ON. When the [DB]
terminal turns ON, DC braking is
applied. When the [DB] terminal turns
OFF again, the inverter output ramps to
the previous frequency.
2. Scenario 2 – The Run command is
applied from the operator keypad. When
the [DB] terminal turns ON, DC braking
is applied. When the [DB] terminal
turns OFF again, the inverter output
remains OFF.
3. Scenario 3 – The Run command is
applied from the operator keypad. When
the [DB] terminal turns ON, DC braking
is applied after the delay time set by
A053 expires. The motor is in a free-
running (coasting) condition during this
delay time. When the [DB] terminal
turns OFF again, the inverter output
remains OFF.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
07 DB External Signal for
DC Injection
Braking
ON applies DC injection braking during
deceleration
OFF does not apply DC injection braking
during deceleration
Val id for
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
A053, A054
Notes:
•Do not use the [DB] input continuously or for
a long time when the DC braking force
setting A054 is high (depends on the motor
application).
•Do not use the [DB] feature for continuous or
high duty cycle as a holding brake. The [DB]
input is designed to improve stopping perfor-
mance. Use a mechanical brake for holding a
stop position.
Output
frequency
[FW, RV]
[DB]
Scenario 1
Output
frequency
Run command
from operator)
Scenario 2
Output
frequency
Scenario 3
[DB]
Run command
from operator)
[DB]
A053
t
t
t
delay
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
DB
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–18
Set Second or
Third Motors
If you assign the [SET] or [SET3] functions to an intelligent input terminal, you can select
between two or three sets of motor parameters. You may assign one or both of these functions.
These second and third parameters store alternate sets of motor characteristics. When terminal
[SET] or [SET3] is turned ON, the inverter will use the second or third set of parameters
accordingly, generating the frequency output to the motor. When changing the state of the
[SET] or [SET3] input terminal, the change will not take effect until the inverter is stopped.
When you turn ON the [SET] or [SET3] input, the inverter operates per the second or third set
of parameters, respectively. When the terminal is turned OFF, the output function returns to the
original settings (first set of motor parameters). Refer to “Configuring the Inverter for Multiple
Motors” on page 4–72 for details.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
08 SET Set 2nd Motor ON causes the inverter to use the 2nd set of
motor parameters for generating the
frequency output to motor
OFF causes the inverter to default to the 1st
(main) set of motor parameters for gener-
ating the frequency output to motor
17 SET3 Set 3rd Motor ON causes the inverter to use the 3rd set of
motor parameters for generating the
frequency output to motor
OFF causes the inverter to default to the 1st
(main) set of motor parameters for gener-
ating the frequency output to motor
Val id for
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
(none)
Notes:
•If the terminal state is changed while the
inverter is running, the inverter continues
using the current set of parameters until the
inverter is stopped.
•If both SET and SET3 are ON at the same
time, SET prevails and the 2nd motor param-
eters are in effect.
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
SET
SET3
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–19
Two-stage
Acceleration and
Deceleration
When terminal [2CH] is turned ON, the
inverter changes the rate of acceleration and
deceleration from the initial settings (F002
and F003) to use the second set of accelera-
tion/deceleration values. When the terminal
is turned OFF, the inverter is returned to the
original acceleration and deceleration time
(F002 acceleration time 1, and F003 decel-
eration time 1). Use A092 (acceleration
time 2) and A093 (deceleration time 2) to
set the second stage acceleration and decel-
eration times.
In the graph shown above, the [2CH] signal becomes active during acceleration. This causes the
inverter to switch from using acceleration 1 (F002) to acceleration 2 (A092).
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
09 2CH Two-stage Accelera-
tion and Decelera-
tion
ON Frequency output uses 2nd-stage accelera-
tion and deceleration values
OFF Frequency output uses the initial accelera-
tion 1 and deceleration 1 values
Valid for inputs: C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
A092, A093, A094=0
Notes:
•Function A094 selects the method for second
stage acceleration. It must be set = 00 to
select the input terminal method in order for
the [2CH] terminal assignment to operate.
Output
frequency
[FW, RV]
t
target frequency
initial
second
Input
signals
[2CH]
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see page 4–12.)
2CH
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–20
Free-run Stop When the terminal [FRS] is turned ON, the inverter turns OFF the output and the motor enters
the free-run state (coasting). If terminal [FRS] is turned OFF, the output resumes sending power
to the motor if the Run command is still active. The free-run stop feature works with other
parameters to provide flexibility in stopping and starting motor rotation.
In the figure below, parameter B088 selects whether the inverter resumes operation from 0 Hz
(left graph) or the current motor rotation speed (right graph) when the [FRS] terminal turns
OFF. The application determines the best setting.
Parameter B003 specifies a delay time before resuming operation from a free-run stop. To
disable this feature, use a zero delay time.
FRS
Switches
Motor
speed
[FW, RV]
Zero-frequency start
FRS
Switches
Motor
speed
Resume from current speed
wait time
[FW, RV]
B003
B088=01
B088=00
Resume from 0Hz
tt
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
11 FRS Free-run Stop ON Causes output to turn OFF, allowing
motor to free run (coast) to stop
OFF Output operates normally, so controlled
deceleration stops motor
Valid for
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
B003, B088, C011 to C018
Notes:
•When you want the [FRS] terminal to be
active low (normally closed logic), change
the setting (C011 to C018) that corresponds
to the input (C001 to C008) that is assigned
the [FRS] function.
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see page 4–12.)
FRS
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–21
External Trip When the terminal [EXT] is turned ON, the inverter enters the trip state, indicates error code
E12, and stops the output. This is a general purpose interrupt type feature, and the meaning of
the error depends on what you connect to the [EXT] terminal. Even if [EXT] is turned OFF, the
inverter remains in the trip state. You must reset the inverter or cycle power to clear the error,
returning the inverter to the Stop Mode.
In the graph below, the [EXT] input turns ON during normal Run Mode operation. The inverter
lets the motor free-run to a stop, and the alarm output turns ON immediately. When the
operator initiates a Reset command, the alarm and error are cleared. When the Reset is turned
OFF, the motor begins rotation since the Run command is already active.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
12 EXT External Trip ON When assigned input transitions OFF to
ON, inverter latches trip event and
displays E12
OFF No trip event for ON to OFF, any recorded
trip events remain in history until Reset
Valid for
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
(none)
Notes:
•If the USP (Unattended Start Protection)
feature is in use, the inverter will not automat-
ically restart after cancelling the EXT trip
event. In that case, it must receive either
another Run command (OFF-to-ON transi-
tion), a keypad Reset command, or an [RS]
intelligent terminal input signal.
[EXT]
[FW, RV]
[RS]
Motor revolution speed
Alarm output terminal
t
free run
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
EXT
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–22
Unattended Start
Protection
If the Run command is already present when power is turned ON, the inverter starts running
immediately after powerup. The Unattended Start Protection (USP) function prevents that
automatic startup, so that the inverter will not run without outside intervention. When USP is
active, there are two ways to reset an alarm and resume running:
1. Turn the Run command OFF, or
2. Perform a reset operation by the terminal [RS] input or the keypad Stop/reset key
The three examples below show how the USP function works in the scenarios described at the
bottom of the diagram. The error code E13 indicates the USP trip state and corresponds to the
Alarm signal in the diagram.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
13 USP Unattended Start
Protection
ON At powerup, the inverter will not resume a
Run command
OFF At powerup, the inverter will resume a
Run command that was active before
power loss
Valid for inputs: C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
(none)
Notes:
•Note that when a USP error occurs and it is
canceled by a reset from the [RS] terminal
input or keypad, the inverter restarts immedi-
ately.
•Even when the trip state is canceled by turning
the terminal [RS] ON and OFF after an under-
voltage trip E09 occurs, the USP function will
be performed.
•When the Run command is active immediately
after the power is turned ON, a USP error will
occur. When this function is used, wait for at
least three (3) seconds after powerup before
applying a Run command.
Power
supply
[FW]
Output
frequency
When USP is ON after powerup, the
alarm (E13) will clear when the Run
command (FW or RV) turns OFF.
[USP]
[RS]
Alarm
If the alarm is cleared
during Run command,
the inverter output
restarts automatically.
If the Run command is
already OFF at powerup,
the inverter output starts
normally.
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
t
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Dfault input configuration
shown for -FU models; -FE and -F models
require input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
USP
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–23
Commercial
Power Source
Switching
The commercial power source switching function is useful in systems with excessive starting
torque requirements. This feature permits the motor to be started “across the line,” sometimes
called a bypass configuration. After the motor is running, the inverter takes over to control the
speed. This feature can eliminate the need to oversize the inverter, reducing cost. However,
additional hardware such as magnetic contactors will be required to realize this function. For
example, a system may require 55KW to start, but only 15KW to run at constant speed. There-
fore, a 15KW rated inverter would be sufficient when using the commercial power source
switching.
The following block diagram shows an inverter system with bypass capability. When starting
the motor directly across the line, relay contacts Mg2 are closed, and Mg1 and Mg3 are open.
This is the bypass configuration, since the inverter is isolated from the power source and motor.
Then Mg1 contacts close about 0.5 to 1 second after that, supplying power to the inverter.
Switching to inverter control occurs after the motor is running at full speed. First, Mg2 relay
contacts open. Then about 0.5 to 1 seconds later, relay Mg3 contacts close, connecting the
inverter to the motor. The following timing diagram shows the event sequence:
U
V
W
Motor
R
S
T
R0
T0
SJ300
H
O
L
FW
[RV]
[CS]
CM1
Mg3
MCCB
Mg1
GFI
Mg2
Thermal
switch
Power source, 3-phase
AL0
AL2
AL1
L1
L2
L3
Mg1
Mg2
Mg3
FW
[CS]
Mg2/Mg3 delay time 0.5 to 1 sec.
Set to 0.5 to 1 sec. typical
Frequency matching
Inverter
output
Normal operation
B003 (Retry wait time
before motor restart)
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–24
In the previous timing diagram, when the motor has been started across the line, Mg2 is
switched OFF and Mg3 is switched ON. With the Forward command to the inverter already
ON, the [CS] terminal is switched ON and relay Mg1 contacts close. The inverter will then read
the motor RPM (frequency matching). When the [CS] terminal is switched OFF, the inverter
applies the Retry wait time before motor restart parameter (B003).
Once the delay time has elapsed the inverter will then start and match the frequency (if greater
than the threshold set by B007). If the ground fault interrupter breaker (GFI) trips on a ground
fault, the bypass circuit will not operate the motor. When an inverter backup is required, take
the supply from the bypass circuit GFI. Use control relays for [FW], [RV], and [CS].
The commercial power source switching function requires you to assign [CS] to an intelligent
input terminal, using option code 14.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
14 CS Commercial Power
Change
ON OFF-to-ON transition signals the inverter
that the motor is already running at
powerup (via bypass), thus suppressing
the inverter’s motor output in Run Mode
OFF ON-to-OFF transition signals the inverter
to apply a time delay (B003), frequency
match its output to existing motor speed,
and resume normal Run Mode operation
Valid for inputs: C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
B003, B007
Notes:
•If an over-current trip occurs during frequency
matching, extend the retry wait time B003.
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
CS
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–25
Software Lock When the terminal [SFT] is turned ON, the data of all the parameters and functions (except the
output frequency, depending on the setting of B031) is locked (prohibited from editing). When
the data is locked, the keypad keys cannot edit inverter parameters. To edit parameters again,
turn OFF the [SFT] terminal input.
Use parameter B031 to select whether the output frequency is excluded from the lock state or is
locked as well.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
15 SFT Software Lock ON The keypad and remote programming
devices are prevented from changing
parameters
OFF The parameters may be edited and stored
Val id for
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
B031 (excluded from lock)
Notes:
•When the [SFT] terminal is turned ON, only
the output frequency can be changed.
•Software lock can include the output
frequency by setting B031.
•Software lock by the operator is also possible
without the [SFT] terminal being used
(B031).
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
SFT
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–26
Analog Input
Current/Voltage
Select
The [AT] terminal operates in conjunction with parameter setting A005 to determine the analog
input terminals that are enabled for current or voltage input. Setting A006 determines whether
the signal will be bipolar, allowing for a reverse direction range. Note that current input signal
cannot be bipolar and cannot reverse direction (must use [FW] and [RV] command with current
input operation). The following table shows the basic operation of the [AT] intelligent input.
Please refer to “Analog Input Operation” on page 4–59 for more information on bipolar input
configuration, and the operating characteristics of analog inputs.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
16 AT Analog Input
Voltage/current
Select
ON •With A005 = 00, [AT] will enable
terminals [OI]–[L] for current input,
4 to 20mA
•With A005=01, [AT] will enable termi-
nals [O2]–[L] for voltage input
OFF Terminals [O]–[L] are enabled for voltage
input (A005 may be equal to 00 or 01) in
this case
Val id for
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
A001 = 01
A005 = 00 / 01
A006 = 00 / 01 / 02
Notes:
•Be sure to set the frequency source setting
A001=01 to select the analog input terminals.
531
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see page 4–12.)
AT
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–27
Reset Inverter The [RS] terminal causes the inverter to
execute the reset operation. If the inverter is
in Trip Mode, the reset cancels the Trip
state. When the signal [RS] is turned ON
and OFF, the inverter executes the reset
operation. The minimum pulse width for
[RS] must be 12 ms or greater. The alarm
output will be cleared within 30 ms after the
onset of the Reset command.
WARNING: After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset occurs, the motor will
restart suddenly if the Run command is already active. Be sure to set the alarm reset after
verifying that the Run command is OFF to prevent injury to personnel.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
18 RS Reset Inverter ON The motor output is turned OFF, the Trip
Mode is cleared (if it exists), and powerup
reset is applied
OFF Normal power-on operation
Valid for
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
B003, B007, C102, C103
Notes:
•When the control terminal [RS] input is
already ON at powerup for more than 4
seconds, the remote operator display is “R-
ERROR COMM<2>” (the display of the
digital operator is – – – –). However, the
inverter has no error. To clear the digital
operator error, turn OFF the terminal [RS]
input and press one of the operator keys.
•The active edge (leading or trailing) of the [RS] signal is determined by the setting of
C102.
•A terminal configured with the [RS] function can only be configured as a normally open
contact. The terminal cannot be used in the normally closed contact state.
•When input power is turned ON, the inverter performs the same reset operation as it does
when a pulse on the [RS] terminal occurs.
[RS]
Alarm output
t
12 ms
minimum
approx. 30 ms
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47. Jumper position
shown is for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE
models, see page 4–12.)
RS
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–28
Thermistor
Thermal
Protection
Motors that are equipped with a thermistor can be protected from overheating. Input terminal
[TH] is dedicated to sense a thermistor resistance. The input can be set up (via B098 and B099)
to accept a wide variety of NTC or PTC type thermistors. Use this function to protect the motor
from overheating.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
— TH Thermistor Thermal
Protection
Sensor When a thermistor is connected between
to terminals [TH] and [CM1], the inverter
checks for over-temperature and will
cause a trip (E35) and turn OFF the output
to the motor
Open An open circuit in the thermistor causes a
trip, and the inverter turns OFF the output
Valid for
inputs:
[TH] only
Required
settings:
B098 and B099
Notes:
•Be sure the thermistor is connected to termi-
nals [TH] and [CM1]. If the resistance is
above or below (depending on whether NTC
or PTC) the threshold the inverter will trip.
When the motor cools down enough, the
thermistor resistance will change enough to
permit you to clear the error. Press the STOP/
Reset key to clear the error.
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
Example:
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
TH
thermistor
Motor
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–29
Three-wire
Interface
Operation
The 3-wire interface is an industry standard motor control interface. This function uses two
inputs for momentary contact start/stop control, and a third for selecting forward or reverse
direction. To implement the 3-wire interface, assign 20 [STA] (Start), 21 [STP] (Stop), and 22
[F/R] (Forward/Reverse) to three of the intelligent input terminals. Use momentary contact for
Start and Stop. Use a selector switch, such as SPST for the Forward/Reverse input. Be sure to
set the operation command selection A002=01 for input terminal control of motor.
If you have a motor control interface that needs logic-level control (rather than momentary
pulse control), use the [FW] and [RV] inputs instead.
The diagram below shows the use of 3-wire control. STA (Start Motor) is an edge-sensitive
input; an OFF-to-ON transition gives the Start command. The control of direction is level-
sensitive, and the direction may be changed at any time. STP (Stop Motor) is also a level-
sensitive input.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
20 STA Start Motor ON Start motor rotation on momentary
contact (uses acceleration profile)
OFF No change to motor operation
21 STP Stop Motor ON No change to motor operation
OFF Stop motor rotation on momentary contact
(uses deceleration profile)
22 F/R Forward/Reverse ON Select reverse direction of rotation
OFF Select forward direction of rotation
Valid for
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
A002=01
Notes:
•The STP logic is inverted. Normally the
switch will be closed, so you open the switch
to stop. In this way, a broken wire causes the
motor to stop automatically (safe design).
•When you configure the inverter for 3-wire
interface control, the dedicated [FW] terminal
is automatically disabled. The [RV] intelligent
terminal assignment is also disabled.
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
F/R STA
STP
[STA] terminal
[F/R] terminal
[STP] terminal
Motor revolution speed Forward
Reverse
t
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–30
PID ON/OFF
and PID Clear
The PID loop function is useful for controlling motor speed to achieve constant flow, pressure,
temperature, etc. in many process applications. The PID Disable function temporarily suspends
PID loop execution via an intelligent input terminal. It overrides the parameter A071 (PID
Enable) to stop PID execution and return to normal motor frequency output characteristics. the
use of PID Disable on an intelligent input terminal is optional. Of course, any use of the PID
loop control requires setting PID Enable function A071=01.
The PID Clear function forces the PID loop integrator sum = 0. So, when you turn ON an intel-
ligent input configured as [PIDC], the integrator sum is reset to zero. This is useful when
switching from manual control to PID loop control and the motor is stopped.
CAUTION: Be careful not to turn PID Clear ON and reset the integrator sum when the inverter
is in Run Mode (output to motor is ON). Otherwise, this could cause the motor to decelerate
rapidly, resulting in a trip.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
23 PID PID Disable ON Disables PID loop execution
OFF Allows PID loop execution if A71=01
24 PIDC PID Clear ON Force the value of the integrator to zero
OFF No change to PID loop execution
Val id for
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
A071
Notes:
•The use of [PID] and [PIDC] terminals are
optional. Use A071=01 if you want PID loop
control enabled all the time.
•Do not enable/disable PID control while the
motor is running (inverter is in Run Mode).
•Do not turn ON the [PIDC] input while the
motor is running (inverter is in Run Mode).
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
PIDC
PID
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–31
Internal Speed
Loop Gain
Settings
When sensorless vector control, 0Hz sensorless vector control, or vector control with sensor is
selected for the control method, the Control Gain Switching function selects between two sets
of gains in the internal speed loop. These gains are used in proportional and integral compensa-
tion. Use option code 26 to assign the [CAS] function to an intelligent input terminal. Use
option code 43 to select between P and PI control.
The table below lists the functions and parameter settings related to internal speed loop gains.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
26 CAS Control Gain
Switching
ON Gains in parameters H070, H071, and
H072 are selected
OFF Gains in parameters H050, H051, H052;
or, H250, H251, H252 (2nd motor) are
selected
43 PPI P / PI Control
Switching
ON Selects Proportional control (P)
OFF Selects Proportional-Integral control (PI)
Valid for
inputs:
C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
A044 / A244 / A344 =
03 (SLV), or
04 (0 Hz domain), or
05 (V2)
Notes:
•When Control Gain Switching is not selected
for an intelligent input terminal, the default
gains in effect correspond to the OFF state of
[CAS].
Function Code Parameter Setting Range Description
A044 / A244 /
A344
Control method
selection
03 SLV (does not use A344)
04 0-Hz Domain SLV (does not
use A344)
05 V2 (does not use A244 or
A344)
C001 - C008 Intelligent input
selection
43 PPI : P/I switching
H005 / H205 Speed response 0.001 to 65.53 No dimension
H050 / H250 PI proportional gain 0.0 to 999.9/1000 % gain
H051 / H251 PI integral gain 0.0 to 999.9/1000 % gain
H052 / H252 P proportional gain 0.01 to 10.00 No dimension
H070 PI proportional gain
for switching
0.0 to 999.9/1000 % gain
H071 PI integral gain for
switching
0.0 to 999.9/1000 % gain
H072 P proportional gain
for switching
0.0 to 10.0 No dimension
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O
specs on
page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
PPI
CAS
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–32
The speed control mode is normally proportional-
integral compensation (PI), which attempts to
keep the deviation between the actual speed and
speed command equal to zero. You can also select
proportional (P) control function, which can be
used for droop control (i.e. several inverters
driving one load). Droop is the speed difference
resulting from P control versus PI control at 100%
output torque as shown in the graph. Set the P/PI
switching function (option 43) to one of the intel-
ligent input terminals [1] to [8]. When the P/PI
input terminal is ON, the control mode becomes
proportional control (P). When the P/PI input
terminal is OFF, the control mode becomes
proportional-integral control.
The proportional gain Kpp value determines the
droop. Set the desired value using parameter
H052. The relationship between the Kpp value and the droop is shown below:
The relationship between the droop and the rated rotation speed is shown below:
0Speed of rotation
Torque
P Control
Droop
100%
PI Control
Droop 10
(Kpp Set Value)
-------------------------------- %()=
Droop Speed error at rated torque
Synchronous speed base frequency
----------------------------------------------------------------------
=
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–33
Remote Control
Up and Down
Functions
The [UP] [DWN] terminal functions can adjust the output frequency for remote control while
the motor is running. The acceleration time and deceleration time used with this function is the
same as for normal operation ACC1 and DEC1 (2ACC1,2DEC1). The input terminals operate
as follows:
• Acceleration - When the [UP] contact is turned ON, the output frequency accelerates from
the current value. When it is turned OFF, the output frequency maintains its current value.
• Deceleration - When the [DWN] contact is turned ON, the output frequency decelerates
from the current value. When it is turned OFF, the output frequency maintains its current
value.
In the graph below, the [UP] and [DWN] terminals activate while the Run command remains
ON. The output frequency responds to the [UP] and [DWN] commands.
It is possible for the inverter to retain the frequency set from the [UP] and [DWN] terminals
through a power loss. Parameter C101 enables/disables the memory. If disabled, the inverter
retains the last frequency before an UP/DWN adjustment. Use the [UDC] terminal to clear the
memory and return to the original set output frequency.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
27 UP Remote Control
UP Function
ON Accelerates (increases output frequency)
motor from current frequency
OFF Output to motor operates normally
28 DWN Remote Control
DOWN Function
ON Decelerates (decreases output frequency)
motor from current frequency
OFF Output to motor operates normally
29 UDC Remote Control
Data Clear
ON Clears the Up/down frequency memory
OFF No effect on Up/down memory
Valid for inputs: C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
A001 = 02
C101 = 01 (enables memory)
Notes:
•This feature is available only when the
frequency command source is programmed
for operator control. Confirm A001 is set to
02.
•This function is not available when [JG] is in
use.
•The range of output frequency is 0 Hz to the
value in A004 (maximum frequency setting).
•The Remote Control Up/Down function
varies the inverter speed by directly writing to
the F001 output frequency setting.
Output
frequency
[UP]
[FW, RV]
[DWN]
t
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
UDC DWN
UP
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–34
Force Operation
from Digital
Operator
This function permits a digital operator interface to override the Run command source setting
(A002) when it is configured for a source other than the operator interface. When the [OPE]
terminal is ON and the operator interface gives a Run command, the inverter uses the standard
output frequency settings to operate the motor.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
31 OPE Force Operation
from Digital
Operator
ON Forces the operator interface Run
command to over-ride commands from
input terminals (such as [FW], [RV]).
OFF Run command operates normally, as
configured by A002
Valid for inputs: C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
A001
A002 (set not equal to 02)
Notes:
•When changing the [OPE] state during Run
Mode (inverter is driving the motor), the
inverter will stop the motor before the new
[OPE] state takes effect.
•If the [OPE] input turns ON and the digital
operator gives a Run command while the
inverter is already running, the inverter stops
the motor. Then the digital operator can
control the motor.
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
OPE
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–35
Overload
Restriction
The inverter constantly monitors the motor current during acceleration, deceleration, and
constant speed. If the inverter reaches the overload restriction level, it adjusts the output
frequency automatically to limit the amount of overload. This function prevents an over-current
trip by inertia during rapid acceleration or large changes in load at constant speed. It also
attempts to prevent an over-voltage trip on deceleration due to regeneration. It accomplishes
this by temporarily suspending deceleration and/or increasing the frequency in order to dissi-
pate regenerative energy. Once the DC bus voltage falls sufficiently, deceleration will resume.
OLR Parameter Selection – Two sets of overload restriction parameter settings and values are
available as outlined in the table below. Use the B021—B026 group of settings to configure the
two set of parameters as needed. By assigning the Overload Restriction function [OLR] to an
intelligent terminal, you can select the set of restriction parameters that is in effect.
Function
Function Code
Data or Range Description
Set 1 Set 2
Overload Restriction
Operation Mode
B021 B024 00 Disable
01 Enabled during accel
and constant speed
02 Enabled during constant
speed
03 Enabled during accel,
constant speed, and
decel
Overload Restriction
Setting
B022 B025 Rated current * 0.5
to rated current * 2
Current value at which
the restriction begins
Deceleration Rate at
Overload Restriction
B023 B026 0.1 to 30 seconds Deceleration time when
overload restriction
operates
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
39 OLR Overload Restric-
tion Selection
ON Selects Overload Restriction Set 2,
B024, B025, B026 settings in effect
OFF Selects Overload Restriction Set 1,
B021, B022, B023 settings in effect
Valid for inputs: C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
B021, B022, B023 (Mode 1),
B024, B025, B026 (Mode 2)
Notes:
•If the overload restriction constant (B023 or
B026) is set too short, an over-voltage trip
during deceleration will occur due to regener-
ative energy from the motor.
•When an overload restriction occurs during
acceleration, the motor will take longer to
reach the target frequency, or may not reach
it. The inverter will make the following
adjustments:
a) Increase the acceleration time
b) Raise torque boost
c) Raise overload restriction level
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
OLR
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–36
The figure below shows the operation during an overload restriction event. The overload
restriction level is set by B022 and B025. The overload restriction constant is the time to decel-
erate to 0Hz from maximum frequency. When this function operates, the acceleration time will
be longer than the normal acceleration time.
NOTE: The Overload Advance Notice function for intelligent outputs is related to Overload
Restriction operation, discussed in “Overload Advance Notice Signal” on page 4–46.
Overload
restriction level
Maximum
frequency
Output
frequency
Target frequency
Deceleration rate at overload restriction
Deceleration rate
at overload restriction
A004
F001
B022 / B025
B023 / B026
B022 / B025
t
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–37
Torque Limit The Torque Limit function limits the motor output torque for sensorless vector control, sensor-
less vector control 0Hz domain, or vector control with feedback.
In the torque limit function, the following operational modes are available (selected by B040):
1. Four-quadrant individual setting mode – This mode sets torque limit in 4 zones, forward
driving and regenerating, reverse driving and regenerating. Limits for each quadrant are set
with B041 – B044 individually.
2. Terminal selection mode – By use of torque limit select intelligent input terminals 1 and 2,
this mode changes and uses torque limits 1 – 4 set in B041 – B044. Selected torque limit
range is valid in all four quadrants.
3. Analog input mode – This mode sets torque limit value by the voltage applied to terminal
[O2] (referenced to [L] for ground. An input of 0 – 10V corresponds to the torque limit
value of 0 to 200%. The selected torque limit value is valid in all four quadrants (whether
forward or reverse move, driving or regenerating).
4. Expansion Cards 1 and 2 – This function is valid when using the expansion card (SJ-DG).
Please refer to the SJ-DG instruction manual.
When the torque limit enable function [TL] is assigned to an intelligent input terminal, torque
limiting occurs only when [TL] is ON. When the [TL] input is OFF, the inverter always uses the
default torque control limit of 200% maximum. That torque limit value corresponds to 200% of
the maximum inverter output current. Therefore, the output torque also depends on the particu-
lar motor in use. When the over-torque output [OTQ] is assigned in the intelligent output selec-
tion, it turns ON when the inverter is performing torque limiting.
Note 1: Unavailable for A344
Note 2: Unavailable for A244 and A344
Code Function Data or Range Description
A044 /
A244
Control method
selection
00
01
02
03
04
05
V/f Constant torque
V/f Variable torque
V/f Free-setting torque *1
Sensorless vector *1
Sensorless vector, 0 Hz domain *1
Vector control with sensor *2
B040
Torque limit
selection
00
01
02
03
04
4-quadrant individual setting
Terminal selection
Analog [O2] input
Expansion card 1
Expansion card 2
B041 Torque limit 1 0 to 200% Forward-driving in 4-quadrant mode
B042 Torque limit 2 0 to 200% Reverse-regenerating in 4-quadrant
mode
B043 Torque limit 3 0 to 200% Reverse-driving in 4-quadrant mode
B044 Torque limit 4 0 to 200% Forward-regenerating in 4-quadrant
mode
C001
to
C008
Intelligent input
terminal [1] to [8]
function
40
41
42
Torque limit enable
Torque limit selection, bit 1 (LSB)
Torque limit selection, bit 2 (MSB)
C021
to
C025
Intelligent output
terminal [11] to [15]
function
10 In torque limit
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–38
The 4-quadrant operation mode for torque
limiting (B040=00) is illustrated in the figure
to the right. The instantaneous torque depends
on inverter activity (acceleration, constant
speed, or deceleration), as well as the load.
These factors determine the operating quadrant
at any particular time. The parameters in B041,
B042, B043 and B044 determine the amount of
torque limiting that the inverter applies.
The terminal selection mode (B040=01) uses two intelligent inputs [TRQ1] and [TRQ2] for the
binary-encoded selection of one of the four torque limit parameters B041, B042, B043 and
B044.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
40 TL Torque limit enable ON Enables torque limiting
OFF Disables torque limiting
41 TRQ1 Torque limit select 1 0 / 1 Torque limit select, Bit 1 (LSB)
42 TRQ2 Torque limit select 2 0 / 1 Torque limit select, Bit 2 (MSB)
Valid for inputs: C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
B040, B041, B042, B043,
B044
Notes:
•Both the 4-quadrant mode and terminal
switching mode of torque limiting use input
[TL] for enable/disable.
•Inputs TRQ1 and TRQ2 apply only to
terminal switching mode.
•When using the torque limit function at low
speed, also use the overload restriction
feature.
Reverse-driving Forward-regenerating
Reverse-regenerating Forward-driving
Torque
FWRV
+B40=00
B043 B044
B042 B041
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Examples: (Require input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
TL
TRQ1TRQ2
TL
Intelligent
Inputs Torque limit
parameter
TRQ2 TRQ1
OFF OFF B041
OFF ON B042
ON OFF B043
ON ON B044
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–39
External Brake
Control Function
The External Brake Control function enables the inverter to control external electromechanical
brake systems with a particular safety characteristic. For example, elevator control systems
maintain the brake on the load until the drive motor has reached a releasing frequency (point at
which the external mechanical brake is released). This ensures that the load does not have an
opportunity to begin coasting before the inverter begins driving the motor. The External Brake
Control function can be enabled by setting parameter B120=01. The diagram below shows the
signals that are important to this function.
The steps below describe the timing diagram of events on the following page.
1. When the Run command turns ON, the inverter begins to operate and accelerate to releasing
frequency (B125).
2. After the output frequency arrives at the set releasing frequency (B125), the inverter waits
for the brake release confirmation, set by B121. The inverter outputs the braking release
signal [BRK]. However, if the output current of the inverter is less than the releasing current
set by B126, the inverter does not turn ON the brake release output [BRK]. The lack of the
proper current level indicates a fault (such as open wire to motor). In this case, the inverter
trips and outputs the braking error signal [BER]. This signal is useful to engage an
emergency brake to ensure the load does not move, if the primary braking system has failed.
3. While the brake release output [BRK] is ON, the inverter drives the motor but does not
accelerate immediately. The inverter waits for confirmation from the external brake. When
the external brake system properly releases, it signals the inverter by using the Brake OK
input terminal [BOK].
4. When the brake operates properly and signals with the [BOK] input, the inverter waits for
the required time for acceleration (B122), and then begins to accelerate to the set target
frequency.
5. When the Run command turns OFF, the procedure outlined above happens in reverse. The
idea is to engage the brake before the motor comes completely to a stop. The inverter decel-
erates to the releasing frequency (B125) and turns the brake release output [BRK] OFF to
engage the brake.
6. The inverter does not decelerate further during just the waiting time for brake confirmation
(B121). If the brake confirmation signal does not turn OFF within the waiting time for brake
confirmation, the inverter causes a trip alarm and outputs the brake error signal [BER]
(useful for engaging an emergency brake system).
7. Normally, the brake confirmation signal [BOK] turns OFF, and the inverter waits the
required waiting time. Then the inverter begins to decelerate again and brings motor and
load to a complete stop (see timing diagram on next page).
[BRK] Brake release
[BOK] Brake confirmation
Inverter External Brake
System
Emergency Brake
(or alarm, etc.)
[BER] Brake error
Code Function Data or Range Description
B120 Brake control
enable
00=Disable
01=Enable
Enables external brake control function within the
inverter
B121 Brake waiting
time for release
0.00 to 5.00 sec. Sets the time delay after arrival at release
frequency (B125) before the inverter outputs brake
release signal [BRK]
B122 Brake wait time
for acceleration
0.00 to 5.00 sec. Sets time delay after brake confirmation signal
[BOK] is received until the inverter begins to accel-
erate to the set frequency
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–40
The diagram below shows the event sequence described in the steps on the previous page.
The following table pertains to the brake confirmation input.
B123 Brake wait time
for stopping
0.00 to 5.00 sec. Sets the time delay after brake confirmation signal
[BOK] turns OFF (after [BRK] turns OFF) until
decelerating the inverter to 0 Hz
B124 Brake wait time
for confirmation
0.00 to 5.00 sec. Sets the wait time for [BOK] signal after turn ON/
OFF of [BRK] signal. If [BOK] is not received
during the specified time, the inverter will trip with
an external brake error [BER].
B125 Break release
frequency setting
0.00 to 99.99 Hz /
100.0 to 400.0 Hz
Sets the frequency at which the inverter outputs the
brake release signal [BRK] after delay set by B121
B126 Brake release
current setting
0% to 200% of
rated current
Sets the minimum inverter current level above
which the brake release signal [BRK] will be
permitted
Code Function Data or Range Description
Output
frequency
Run command
Brake release output [BRK]
Brake OK input [BOK]
B122 B123
B121
B125 B125
B124
Brake release
frequency
Brake wait time to release
Brake wait time for accel Brake wait time for stop-
Brake wait time
for confirmation B124
Brake error output [BER]
t
0
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Input
State Description
44 BOK Brake confirmation ON Indicates external brake is not engaged
OFF Indicates external brake is engaged
Valid for inputs: C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005, C006, C007, C008
Required
settings:
B120=01
B121 to B126 set
Notes:
•The signal [BOK] turns ON to indicate that an
external brake system has released. If external
brake control is enabled (B120=01), then the
[BOK] signal must work properly to avoid an
inverter trip event.
5 3 1
7 6 4 2
8
FW
TH
PLC
CM1
P24
CM1
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Example: (Requires input configuration—
see page 3–47. Jumper position shown is
for –xFU/-xFR models; for –xFE models,
see page 4–12.)
BOK
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–41
Expansion Card
Input Signals
Other inputs listed below require the expansion card SJ-FB Encoder Feedback. Please see the
SJ-FB manual for more information.
The diagram below shows how the Input/Output connections for the SJ–FB feedback board.
The inverter’s internal connections and parameter configuration make these signals available on
intelligent input and output terminals.
The information on outputs related to the SJ-FB expansion card is in “Expansion Card Output
Signals” on page 4–58.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Description
45 ORT Orientation Orientation (home search sequence)
46 LAC LAD Cancel Cancels the linear acceleration/decelera-
tion position control in the feedback card
47 PCLR Position deviation clear Forces the position error to zero
48 STAT Pulse train input enable Starts the pulse train control of motor
frequency
SJ300 inverter
SJ-FB Feedback
Expansion Card
Input assignments Output assignments
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
Control and logic connector
ORT
LAC
PCLR
STAT
ZS
DSE
POK
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–42
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
The intelligent output terminals are programmable in a similar way to the intelligent input
terminals. The inverter has several output functions that you can assign individually to five
physical logic outputs. Along with these solid-state outputs, the alarm relay output has type
Form C (normally open and normally closed) contacts. The relay is assigned the alarm function
by default, but you can assign it to any of the functions that the open-collector outputs can use.
TIP: The open-collector transistor outputs can handle up to 50mA each. We highly recommend
that you use an external power source as shown. It must be capable of providing at least 250mA
to drive the outputs at full load.
If you need output current greater than 50mA, use the
inverter output to drive a small relay. Be sure to use a
diode across the coil of the relay as shown (reverse-
biased) in order to suppress the turn-off spike, or use a
solid-state relay.
Output circuits
+
–
24VDC
common
External
system
SJ300 inverter
Sinking outputs
(open collector)
131415 1112
LLLLL
CM2
RY
+
–
11
CM2
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–43
Run Signal When the [RUN] signal is selected as an
intelligent output terminal, the inverter
outputs a signal on that terminal when it is
in Run Mode. The output logic is active
low, and is the open collector type (switch
to common).
NOTE: The example circuit in the table above drives a relay coil. Note the use of a diode to
prevent the negative-going turn-off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter’s
output transistor.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
00 RUN Run signal ON when inverter is in Run Mode
OFF when inverter is in Stop Mode
Valid fo r
outputs:
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2
Required
settings:
(none)
Notes:
•The inverter outputs the [RUN] signal
whenever the inverter output exceeds the start
frequency specified by parameter B082. The
start frequency is the initial inverter output
frequency when it turns ON.
[FW, RV]
Motor
speed
Run
Signal
start freq.
B82
ON
t
RY
+
–
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Inverter output terminal circuit
CM2
1314
15
11
12
Example: (Default output configuration
shown—see page 3–53.)
RUN
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–44
Frequency Arrival
Signals
The Frequency Arrival group of outputs help coordinate external systems with the current
velocity profile of the inverter. As the name implies, output [FA1] turns ON when the output
frequency arrives at the standard set frequency (parameter F001). Outputs [FA2] through [FA5]
provide variations on this function for increased flexibility, relying on two programmable accel/
decel thresholds. For example, you can have an output turn ON at one frequency during accel-
eration, and have it turn OFF at a different frequency during deceleration. All transitions have
hysteresis to avoid output chatter if the output frequency is near one of the thresholds.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
01 FA1 Frequency arrival
type 1 – constant
speed
ON when output to motor is at the standard set
frequency F001
OFF when output to motor is not at the set
frequency F001
02 FA2 Frequency arrival
type 2 – over-
frequency
ON when output to motor is at or above the FA
threshold 1(C042) during accel
OFF when the output to motor is below the FA
threshold 1 (C043) during decel
06 FA3 Frequency arrival
type 3 – at
frequency
ON when output to motor is at the FA thresh-
old 1 (C042) during accel, or at C043
during decel
OFF when the output to motor is not at either
the FA threshold 1 (C042) during accel or
at C43 during decel
24 FA4 Frequency arrival
type 4 – over-
frequency (2)
ON when output to motor is at or above the FA
threshold 2 (C045) during accel
OFF when the output to motor is below the FA
threshold 2 (C046) during decel
25 FA5 Frequency arrival
type 5 –
at frequency (2)
ON when output to motor is at the FA thresh-
old 2 (C045) during accel, or at C046
during decel
OFF when the output to motor is not at either
the FA threshold 2 (C045) during accel or
at C046 during decel
Val id for
outputs:
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2
Required
settings:
F001, for FA1
C042 & C043, for FA2 & FA3
C045 & C046, for FA4 & FA5
Notes:
•For most applications you will need to use
only one or two of the frequency arrival type
outputs (see example). However, it is possible
assign all five output terminals to output
functions [FA1] through [FA5].
•For each frequency arrival threshold, the
output anticipates the threshold (turns ON
early) by an amount equal to 1% of the
maximum frequency set for the inverter.
•The output turns OFF as the output frequency
moves away from the threshold, delayed by
an amount equal to 2% of the max. frequency.
+
–
RY
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Inverter output
terminal circuit
CM2
1314
15
11
12
Example: (Default output configuration
shown—see page 3–53.)
FA1
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–45
Frequency arrival output [FA1] uses the
standard output frequency (parameter F001)
as the threshold for switching. In the figure
to the right, the inverter accelerates to the
set output frequency, which serves as the
threshold for [FA1]. Parameters Fon and Foff
illustrate the hysteresis that prevents output
chatter near the threshold value.
•F
on is 1% of the max. output frequency
•F
off is 2% of the max. output frequency
The hysteresis effect causes the output to
turn ON slightly early as the speed
approaches the threshold. Then the turn-
OFF point is slightly delayed. The 1% and
2% values also apply to the remaining
Frequency arrival outputs, discussed below.
Frequency Arrival outputs [FA2] and
[FA4] work the same way; they just use
two separate threshold pairs as shown in
the figure. These provide for separate
acceleration and deceleration thresholds
to provide more flexibility than for
[FA1]. [FA2] uses C042 and C045 for
ON and OFF thresholds, respectively.
[FA4] uses C043 and C046 for ON and
OFF thresholds, respectively. Having
different accel and decel thresholds
provides an asymmetrical output
function. However, you can use equal
ON and OFF thresholds, if desired.
Frequency Arrival outputs [FA3] and [FA5] use the same threshold parameters as [FA2] and
[FA4] above, but operate in a slightly different way. Refer to the diagram below. After the
frequency arrives at the first threshold during acceleration and turns ON [FA3] or [FA5], they
turn OFF again as the output frequency accelerates further. The second thresholds work
similarly during deceleration. In this way, we have separate ON/OFF pulses for acceleration
and deceleration.
FA1
Output
frequency
F001
ON
t
Hz
Threshold Fon Foff
0
FA2/FA4
Output
frequency
C042/C045
C043/C046
ON
t
Hz
Thresholds Fon
Foff
0
FA3/FA5
Output
frequency
C042/C045
C043/C046
ON ON
t
Hz
Thresholds
Fon
Foff
Fon
Foff
0
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–46
Overload
Advance Notice
Signal
When the output current exceeds a
preset value, the [OL] or [OL2]
terminal signal turns ON. The parame-
ter C041 (or C111, respectively) sets
the overload threshold. The overload
detection circuit operates during
powered motor operation and during
regenerative braking. The output
circuits use open-collector transistors,
and are active low.
NOTE: The example circuit in the table above drives a relay coil. Note the use of a diode to
prevent the negative-going turn-off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter’s
output transistor.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
03 OL Overload advance
notice signal (1)
ON when output current is more than the set
threshold for the overload signal (C041)
OFF when output current is less than the set
threshold for the overload signal (C041)
26 OL2 Overload advance
notice signal (2)
ON when output current is more than the set
threshold for the overload signal (C111)
OFF when output current is less than the set
threshold for the overload signal (C111)
Val id for
outputs:
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2
Required
settings:
C041, C111
Notes:
•The default value is 100%. To change the
level from the default, set C041 or
C111(overload level).
•The accuracy of this function is the same as
the function of the output current monitor on
the [FM] terminal (see “Analog Output
Operation” on page 4–62).
Set
value
[OL]
Signal
C041
C041
ON ON
t
Current threshold
power running
regeneration
threshold
RY
+
–
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Inverter output terminal circuit
CM2
1314
15
11
12
Example: (Default output configuration
shown—see page 3–53.)
OL
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–47
Output Deviation
for PID Control
The PID loop error is defined as the
magnitude (absolute value) of the differ-
ence between the Setpoint (target value)
and the Process Variable (actual value).
When the error magnitude exceeds the
preset value for C044, the [OD] terminal
signal turns ON. Refer to “PID Loop
Operation” on page 4–71.
NOTE: The example circuit in the table above drives a relay coil. Note the use of a diode to
prevent the negative-going turn-off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter’s
output transistor.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
04 OD Output deviation
for PID control
ON when PID error is more than the set
threshold for the deviation signal
OFF when PID error is less than the set thresh-
old for the deviation signal
Valid for
outputs:
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2
Required
settings:
C044
Notes:
•The default deviation value is set to 3%. To
change this value, change parameter C044
(deviation level).
Set
value
[OD]
Signal
Error
(SP-PV)
C044
C044
ON ON
t
Process variable
Setpoint
RY
+
–
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Inverter output terminal circuit
CM2
1314
15
11
12
Example: (Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53):
OD
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–48
Alarm Signal The inverter alarm signal is active when a fault has
occurred and it is in the Trip Mode (refer to the
diagram at right). When the fault is cleared the
alarm signal becomes inactive.
We must make a distinction between the alarm
signal AL and the alarm relay contacts [AL0],
[AL1] and [AL2]. The signal AL is a logic
function, which you can assign to the open collec-
tor output terminals [11] to [15], or the relay
outputs. The most common (and default) use of
the relay is for AL, thus the labeling of its termi-
nals. Use an open collector output (terminals [11] to [15]) for a low-current logic signal inter-
face or to energize a small relay (50 mA maximum). Use the relay output to interface to higher
voltage and current devices (10 mA minimum).
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
05 AL Alarm signal ON when an alarm has occurred and has not
been cleared
OFF when no alarm has occurred since the last
clearing of alarm(s)
Valid for
outputs:
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2
Required
settings:
C026, C036
Notes:
•When the alarm output is set to normally
closed, a time delay of less than 2 seconds
occurs until the contact is closed when the
power is turned ON.
•Terminals [11] – [15] are open collector
outputs, so the electrical specifications of
[AL] are different from the contact output
terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2].
•When the inverter power supply is turned
OFF, the alarm signal output is valid as long
as the external control circuit has power.
•This signal output has the delay time (300ms
nominal) from the fault alarm output.
•The relay contact specifications are in
“Specifications of Control and Logic
Connections” on page 4–9. The contact
diagrams for different conditions are on the
next page.
RUN
STOP
RESET
STOP
RESET
Run Stop
Fault Tr i p Fault
Alarm signal
active
Example for terminals [11] to [15]:
(Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53.)
Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]:
(Default output configuration shown—see
page 3–53.)
See I/O specs
on page 4–9.
Relay position
shown during
normal running
(no alarm)
Inverter output
terminal circuit
Inverter output
terminal circuit
CM2
1314
15
11
12
AL1
AL0 AL2
RY
+
–
AL
AL
Power
Supply Load
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–49
The alarm output terminals operate as shown below (left) by default. The contact logic can be
inverted as shown (below right) by using the parameter setting C036. The relay contacts
normally open (N.O.) and normally closed (N.O.) convention uses “normal” to mean the
inverter has power and is in Run or Stop Mode. The relay contacts switch to the opposite
position when it is in Trip Mode or when input power is OFF.
N.C. contacts (after initialization) N.O. contact (inverted by C036 setting)
During normal running When an alarm occurs or
power is turned OFF
During normal running or
power is turned OFF
When an alarm occurs
AL1
AL0 AL2
AL1
AL0 AL2
AL1
AL0 AL2
AL1
AL0 AL2
Contact Power Run
State
AL0-
AL1
AL0-
AL2
N.C.
(after
initialize,
C036=01)
ON Normal Closed Open
ON Trip Open Closed
OFF – Open Closed
Contact Power Run
State
AL0-
AL1
AL0-
AL2
N.O.
(set
C036=00)
ON Normal Open Closed
ON Trip Closed Open
OFF – Open Closed
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–50
Over-torque
Signal
The Over-torque function [OTQ] turns ON when the estimated value of output torque of motor
increases more than the arbitrary level set for the output. Recall that the torque limit function,
covered in “Torque Limit” on page 4–37, actually limits the torque during certain operating
conditions. Instead, the over-torque output feature only monitors the torque, turning ON output
[OTQ] if the torque is above programmable thresholds you set. The [OTQ] function is valid
only for sensorless vector control, 0-Hz domain sensorless vector control, or vector control
with sensor. Do not use the [OTQ] output, except for these inverter operational modes.
The assignment of the Over-torque function to an output terminal [OTQ] is detailed in the
following table.
Code Function/Description Data or Range
C055 Over-torque, forward-driving level setting 0 to 200%
C056 Over-torque, reverse-regenerating, level setting 0 to 200%
C057 Over-torque, reverse-driving, level setting 0 to 200%
C058 Over-torque, forward-regenerating, level setting 0 to 200%
C021
to
C025
Intelligent output terminal [11] to [15] function 07
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
07 OTQ Over-torque ON when estimated torque exceeds the level
set in C055 to C058
OFF when estimated torque is below the levels
set in C055 to C058
Valid for
outputs:
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2
Required
settings:
C055, C056, C057, C058
A044 = 03 or 04 or 05
Notes:
•This output is valid only for sensorless
vector control, 0-Hz domain sensorless vector
control, or vector control with sensor
CM2
1314
15
11
12
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Inverter output
terminal circuit
RY
+
–
Example: (Default output configuration
shown—see page 3–53.)
OTQ
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–51
Instantaneous
Power Failure /
Under-voltage
Signal
An instantaneous power failure (complete loss) or under-voltage condition (partial loss) of
inverter input voltage can occur without warning. SJ300 Series inverters can be configured to
respond to these conditions in different ways. You can select whether the inverter trips or retries
(restart attempt) when an instantaneous power failure or under-voltage condition occurs. You
can select the retry function with parameter B001.
When enabled, the Retry Function operates in the following ways:
•Under-voltage conditions – When an instantaneous power failure or under-voltage condi-
tion occurs, the inverter will attempt to restart up to 16 times. A trip condition will occur on
the 17th attempt, which must be cleared with the Stop/Reset key.
•Over-current/voltage conditions – When retry function is selected and an over-current or
an over-voltage condition occurs, a restart is attempted 3 times. A trip will occur on the 4th
failed restart attempt. Use parameter B004 to select the trip and alarm response to instanta-
neous power failure and under-voltage conditions. The following table shows the related
parameters to these power fault conditions, and timing diagrams are on the next page.
Code Function Data or Range Description
B001 Selection of
automatic restart
mode
00 Alarm output after trip, automatic
restart disabled
01 Restart at 0 Hz
02 Retry with frequency matching to
present motor speed
03 Retry with frequency matching
followed by deceleration to stop—
then trip alarm
B002 Allowable under-
voltage power failure
time
0.3 to 1.0 sec. The amount of time a power input
under-voltage can occur without
tripping the power failure alarm. If
under-voltage exists longer than this
time, the inverter trips, even if the
restart mode is selected. If it exists
less than this time retry will be
attempted.
B003 Retry wait time
before motor restart
0.3 to 100 sec. Time delay after a trip condition goes
away before the inverter restarts the
motor
B004 Instantaneous power
failure / voltage trip
alarm enable
00 Disable
01 Enable
02 Disable during stop and ramp to stop
B005 Number of restarts
on power failure /
under-voltage trip
events
00 Restart up to 16 times on instanta-
neous power failure or under-voltage
01 Always restart on instantaneous
power failure or an under-voltage
condition
B007 Restart frequency
threshold
0.00 to 400.0 Hz When frequency of the motor is less
than this value, the inverter will
restart at 0 Hz
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–52
In the following examples, t0= instantaneous power failure time, t1 = allowable under-voltage /
power failure time (B002), and t2= retry wait time (B003).
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
08 IP Instantaneous
Power Failure
ON when the inverter detects a loss of input
power
OFF when the inverter has input power
09 UV Under-voltage
condition
ON when the inverter input power is less than
the specified input range
OFF when the inverter input power is within
the voltage specification
Valid for
outputs:
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2
Required
settings:
B001, B002, B003, B004,
B005, B007
Notes:
•If an over-voltage or over-current trip occurs
during the deceleration and an instantaneous
power failure error (E16) is displayed the
inverter goes into free-run stop. In this case
make the deceleration time longer.
•When connecting control power supply
terminals [Ro]-[To] to the DC bus [P]-[N], an
under-voltage may be detected at power-off
and cause a trip. If this is undesirable, set
B004 to 00 or 02.
•Frequency matching: The inverter reads the
motor RPM and direction. If this speed is
higher than the matching setting (B007), the
inverter waits until they are equal and then
engages the output to drive the motor
(example 3). If the actual motor speed is less
than the restart frequency setting, the inverter
waits for t2 (value in B003) and restarts from
0 Hz (example 4). The display shows
“
oooo
” during an actual frequency
matching event.
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Inverter output
terminal circuit
CM2
1314
15
11
12
Example: (Default output configuration
shown—see page 3–53.)
RY
+
–
IP
Power supply
Inverter output
Motor
frequency
After waiting for t2 seconds when t0 < t1; restart
Example 1: Power failure within allowed limits; resume Example 2: Power failure longer than limits; trip
t0
t1
t2
Power supply
Inverter output
Motor
frequency
t0
t1
Inverter trips when t0 > t1
Free-run Free-run
tt
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–53
Examples 3 and 4 relate to configuring the inverter to retry upon power failure. Frequency
matching is possible if the inverter frequency is greater than the B007 value.
The Instantaneous Power Failure and Alarm output responses during various power loss condi-
tions are shown in the diagram below. Use B004 to enable/disable the alarm output when
instantaneous power failure or under-voltage occurs. The alarm output will continue while the
control power of the inverter is present, even if the motor is stopped. Examples 5 to 7 corre-
spond to normal wiring of the inverter’s control circuit. Examples 8 to 10 correspond to the
wiring of the inverter’s control circuit for controlled deceleration after power loss (see
“Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss” on page 4–4).
Power supply
Inverter output
Motor
frequency
Motor frequency > B007 value at t2
Example 3: Motor resumes via frequency-matching Example 4: Motor restarts from 0Hz
t0t2
Power supply
Inverter output
Motor
frequency
t0t2
Free-run Free-run
Frequency matching 0Hz restart
Motor frequency < B007 value at t2
B007 B007
tt
Instantaneous power failure operation with standard
R0–T0 connections
Instantaneous power failure operation with R0–T0
connected to P–N
Example 5
Power 1
0
1
0
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
1
0
1
0
Inverter : Stop
Example 6
Power 1
0
1
0
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
1
0
1
0
Inverter : Stop
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Power
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
Example 7 Inverter : Stop
Power 1
0
1
0
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
1
0
1
0
Inverter : Run
Power 1
0
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
1
0
1
0
Inverter : Run
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Power
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
Inverter : Run
1
0
Example 8
Power 1
0
1
0
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
1
0
1
0
Inverter : Stop
Example 9
Power 1
0
1
0
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
1
0
1
0
Inverter : Stop
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Power
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
Example 10 Inverter : Stop
Power 1
0
1
0
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
1
0
1
0
Inverter : Run
Power 1
0
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
1
0
1
0
Inverter : Run
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Power
Run command
Output
Alarm
Inst. Power Fail
Inverter : Run
1
0
(under-voltage)
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–54
Torque Limit
Signal
The Torque Limit output [TRQ] works in conjunction with the torque limit function covered in
the intelligent input section. The torque limit function limits the motor torque according to the
criteria selected by parameter B040. When torque limiting occurs, the [TRQ] output turns ON,
then going OFF automatically when the output torque falls below the specified limits. See
“Torque Limit” on page 4–37 in the intelligent input section.
Run Time /
Power-On Time
Over Signals
SJ300 Series inverters accumulate the total hours in Run Mode (run time) and the total hours of
power-ON time. You can set thresholds for these accumulating timers. Once the threshold is
exceeded, an output terminal will turn ON. One use of this is for preventative maintenance. A
signal light or audible alert could signal the need for servicing, calibration, etc.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
10 TRQ Torque Limit ON when the inverter is limiting torque
OFF when the inverter is not limiting torque
Val id for
outputs:
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2
Required
settings:
B040... if B040=00 then
B041, B042, B043, B044 are
required
Notes:
•The Torque Limit input [TL] must be ON in
order to enable torque limiting and its related
output, [TRQ].
CM2
1314
15
11
12
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Inverter output
terminal circuit
RY
+
–
Example: (Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53.)
TRQ
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
11 RNT Run Time Over ON when the accumulated time spent in Run
Mode exceeds the limit (B034)
OFF when the accumulated time in Run Mode
is still less than the limit (B034)
12 ONT Power-ON Time
Over
ON when the accumulated power-ON time
exceeds the limit (B034)
OFF when the accumulated power-ON time is
less than the limit (B034)
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–55
Thermal Warning
Signal
The purpose of the electronic thermal setting is to protect the motor from overloading,
overheating and being damaged. The setting is based on the rated motor current. The inverter
calculates the thermal rise (heating) of the motor using the current output to the motor squared,
integrated over the time spent at those levels. This feature allows the motor to draw excessive
current for relatively short periods of time, allowing time for cooling.
The Thermal Warning output [THM] turns ON to provide a warning before the inverter trips for
electronic thermal protection. You can set a unique thermal protection level for each of the
three motor profiles, as shown in the table below.
For example, suppose you have inverter model
SJ300-110LFE. The rated motor current is 46A.
The setting range is (0.2 * 46) to (1.2 *46), or
9.2A to 55.2A. For a setting of B012=46A
(current at 100%), the figure to the right shows
the curve.
The electronic thermal characteristic adjusts the
way the inverter calculates thermal heating,
based on the type of torque control the inverter
uses.
CAUTION: When the motor runs at lower
speeds, the cooling effect of the motor’s internal
fan decreases.
Valid for
outputs:
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2
Required
settings:
B034
Notes:
•The two outputs [RNT] and [ONT] share the
same time threshold parameter, B040.
Typically, you will use either the [RNT] or the
[ONT] output only—not both at once.
•These outputs are useful for the notification
that a preventative maintenance interval has
expired.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
CM2
1314
15
11
12
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
Inverter output
terminal circuit
Example: (Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53.)
RY
+
–
RNT or
ONT
Function
Code Function/Description Data or Range
B012 / B212
/ B312
Electronic thermal setting (calculated
within the inverter from current output)
Range is 0.2 * rated current to
1.2 * rated current
Tr i p
time (s)
Trip current at 60 Hz
60
0.5
0
53.4 69 92
A
116% 150% 200%
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–56
The table below shows the settings and their meanings. Use the one that matches your load.
Reduced Torque Characteristic – The example below shows the effect of the reduced torque
characteristic curve (for example motor and current rating). At 20Hz, the output current is
reduced by a factor of 0.8 for given trip times.
Constant Torque Characteristic – Selecting the constant torque characteristic for the example
motor gives the curves below. At 2.5 Hz, the output current is reduced by a factor of 0.9 for
given trip times.
Free Thermal Characteristic - It is possible to set the electronic thermal characteristic using a
free-form curve defined by three data points, according to the table below.
Function Code Data Function/Description
B013 / B213 /B313
00 Reduced torque
01 Constant torque
02 Free-setting
Function
Code Name Description Range
B015 /
B017 /
B019
Free-setting electronic
thermal frequency 1, 2, 3
Data point coordinates for Hz axis
(horizontal) in the free-form curve
0 to 400Hz
B016 /
B018 /
B020
Free setting electronic
thermal current 1, 2, 3
Data point coordinates for Ampere
axis (vertical) in the free-form curve
0.0 = (disable)
0.1 to 1000.
Tr i p
time (s)
Reduced trip current at 20 Hz
Trip current
reduction
factor
x 1.0
x 0.8
x 0.6
0
520 60
Hz A
60
0.5
0
73.642.7 55.2
92.8% 120% 160%
Tr i p
time (s)
Reduced trip current at 2.5 Hz
Trip current
reduction
factor
x 1.0
x 0.9
x 0.8
0
2.5 5 60
Hz A
60
0.5
0
82.847.8 62.1
104% 135% 180%
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–57
The left graph below shows the region for possible free-setting curves. The right graph below
shows an example curve defined by three data points specified by B015 – B020.
Suppose the electronic thermal setting (B012) is set to 44 Amperes. The graph below shows the
effect of the free setting torque characteristic curve. For example, at (B017) Hz, the output
current level to cause overheating in a fixed time period is reduced to (B018) A. Points (x), (y),
and (z) show the adjusted trip current levels in those conditions for given trip times.
Thermal Warning Output – Using parameter C061, you can set the threshold from 0 to 100%
of trip level for turning ON the intelligent output [THM] at that level. In this way, the inverter
provides an early warning before the electronic thermal overload trips and turns OFF the output
to the motor.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
13 THM Thermal Warning ON when the electronic thermal calculation
exceeds the set limit
OFF when the electronic thermal calculation is
less than the set limit
Valid for
outputs:
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2
Required
settings:
C061
Notes:
•The electronic thermal overload function uses
the output current and time to calculate
thermal heating of the motor.
•The thermistor input of the inverter is a
separate function from the electronic thermal
function. You can set a threshold for it to
cause a trip alarm at a particular thermistor
resistance.
Output
current (A)
Setting range
max. freq.
B020
B018
B016
B015 B017 B019 Ax04
Trip current
reduction
factor
Output freq.
x 1.0
x 0.8
0
5400
Hz Hz
0
Tr i p
time (s)
(x) = B018 value x 116%
(y) = B018 value x 120%
(z) = B018 value x 150%
Reduced trip current at (B017) Hz
60
0
0.5
(x) (y) (z) A
CM2
1314
15
11
12
See I/O specs
on page 4–9.
Inverter output
terminal circuit
Example: (Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53.)
RY
+
–
THM
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
Operations
and Monitoring
4–58
Brake Control
Signals
The Brake Control function enables the inverter to control external braking systems with a
particular safety characteristic. A complete discussion of the operation of brake control is in
“External Brake Control Function” on page 4–39. The block diagram and table that follow
describe the configuration of the outputs [BRK] Brake Release and [BER] Brake Error.
Expansion Card
Output Signals
Other outputs listed below require expansion card SJ-FB Encoder Feedback board. Please see
the SJ-FB manual for more information.
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Output
State Description
19 BRK Brake Release ON when the inverter signals the external
brake system to release (open) its brake
OFF when the inverter is not driving the motor,
and needs the external brake engaged
20 BER Brake Error ON when the output current is less than the set
releasing current
OFF when the brake function is not in use, or
when the output current to the motor is
correct and it is safe to release the brake
Val id for
outputs:
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
AL0 – AL2
Required
settings:
B120, B121, B122, B123,
B124, B125, B126
Notes:
•The brake release logic convention is such that
an open circuit fault (such as loose wire)
causes the external brake to engage.
[BRK] Brake release
[BOK] Brake confirmation
Inverter
Brake System
Emergency Brake
[BER] Brake error
CM2
1314
15
11
12
See I/O specs on
page 4–9.
Inverter output
terminal circuit
RY
+
–
RY
Example: (Requires output configuration—
see page 3–53.)
BRK
BER
Opt.
Code Symbol Function Name Description
21 ZS Zero Speed Detect signal Signal indicates the encoder pulses of the
motor have stopped
22 DSE Speed Deviation Excessive Velocity error exceeds the error threshold
defined by parameter P026
23 POK Positioning Completion Indicates the load position is at the target
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–59
Analog Input Operation
Input Terminal
Signals
The SJ300 inverters provide for an external analog
input to command the inverter frequency output
value. The analog input terminal group includes
the [L], [OI], [O], [O2], and [H] terminals on the
control connector, which provide for Voltage [O]
and [O2] or Current [OI] input. All analog input
signals must use the analog ground [L].
If you use either the voltage or current analog
input, you must select one of them using the logic
input terminal function [AT] analog type. If
terminal [AT] is OFF, the voltage input [O] can
command the inverter output frequency. If terminal
[AT] is ON, the current input [OI] can command
the inverter output frequency. The [AT] terminal function is covered in “Analog Input Current/
Voltage Select” on page 4–26. Remember that you must also set A001 = 01 to select analog
input as the frequency source.
Input Filter Parameter A016 adjusts an analog input sampling filter that evenly affects all analog inputs
shown above. The parameter range is from 1 to 30. Before increasing the filter setting, we
recommend trying to find the cause of input analog noise. Check for the following:
• Look for nearby high-current wiring—avoid any parallel runs to the analog signal wires
• Check the impedance between the chassis grounds of the inverter and the analog signal
source equipment—a good connection will have a low impedance
• Check the analog signal ground impedance from the inverter to the analog signal source
• Avoid ground loops... measure the current (or voltage drop) on the chassis ground and signal
ground connections; the ideal value is zero
After taking steps to minimize the analog signal noise sources, increase the filter time constant
(A016) until the motor output frequency (when commanded by analog inputs) becomes stable.
HO2
FM
AM
OOIL
AMI
+V Ref.
A GND
0—10V input
4—20mA input
-10 / 0 / +10V
+ –
4-20 mA
Frequency
source setting
1
V – I select
0 – 10V
+ – -10 / 0 / +10V
O2
O
O
OI
HO2
FM
AM
OOIL
AMI
A005 A001=01
A005=00
A005=01
AT = O N
AT = O F F
AT = O N
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Frequency setting
Terminals
(Keypad)
OI
O2
O
L
AT
Analog Input Operation
Operations
and Monitoring
4–60
The following tables show the available analog input settings. Parameters A006, A005, and
input terminal [AT] determine the External Frequency Command input terminals that are avail-
able and how they function. The Trim Frequency input [O2]—[L] is available (when check
marked) for some settings. Other settings make the reverse direction (in addition to forward)
available for bipolar input settings (when check marked). A bipolar input responds to positive
input voltages with a forward motor rotation, and to negative input voltages with reverse motor
rotation.
The table below applies when the [AT] input function is not assigned to any intelligent input
terminal. The A005 setting, normally used in conjunction with an [AT] input, is ignored.
CAUTION: Whenever the [AT] input function is not assigned to any input terminal and
reverse rotation is not desired or is unsafe, be sure to set A006 = 01. This setting makes the
[O2] input unipolar only.
A006 A005 [AT] External Frequency
Command Input
Trim Frequency
Command Input
Reverse avail.
(bipolar input)
00 00 OFF [O] ✘✘
ON [OI] ✘✘
01 OFF [O] ✘✘
ON [O2] ✘✔
01 00
Example
1
OFF [O] [O2] ✘
ON [OI] [O2] ✘
01 OFF [O] [O2] ✘
ON [O2] ✘✔
02 00
Example
2
OFF [O] [O2] ✔
ON [OI] [O2] ✔
01 OFF [O] [O2] ✔
ON [O2 ✘✔
A006 A005 [AT] External Frequency
Command Input
Trim Frequency
Command Input
Reverse avail.
(bipolar input)
00 — (not
assigned
to any
input
terminal)
[O2] ✘✔
01 — Summation of
[O] and [OI]
[O2] ✘
02 — Summation of
[O] and [OI]
[O2] ✔
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–61
The examples below show how the use of the [AT] input during operation enables/disables the
Trim Frequency Command input [O2]—[L]. The [O2]—[L] input may be used alone, or as an
offset control for the primary analog input.
Wiring Examples Using an external potentiometer is a common way to
control the inverter output frequency (and a good way
to learn how to use the analog inputs). The potentiome-
ter uses the built-in 10V reference [H] and the analog
ground [L] for excitation, and the voltage input [O] for
the signal. By default, the [AT] terminal selects the
voltage input when it is OFF. Take care to use the
proper resistance for the potentiometer, which is
1 to 2kΩ, 2 Watts.
Voltage Input – The 0–10V voltage input circuit uses terminals [L] and [O]. Attach the signal
cable’s shield wire to terminal [L] on the inverter only. DO NOT ground the shield at its other
end. Maintain the voltage within specifications (do not apply negative voltage). Normally a
full-span input level (10V) will give the maximum motor frequency. You can use parameter
A014 to select a lower voltage for full output frequency (such as using a 5V input signal).
Bipolar Voltage Input – The -10 / 0 / +10V voltage input circuit uses terminals [L] and [O2].
Attach the cable’s shield wire to terminal [L] on the inverter only. Maintain the voltage within
specifications. Only apply a negative voltage if this input is configured for bipolar use.
Current Input – The current input circuit uses terminals [OI] and [L]. The current comes from
a sourcing type transmitter; a sinking type will not work! This means the current must flow into
terminal [OI], and terminal [L] is the return back to the transmitter. The input impedance from
[OI] to [L] is 250 Ohms. Attach the cable’s shield wire to terminal [L] on the inverter only.
[FW] terminal
External frequency
command
[O/OI] terminal
[AT] terminal
Actual frequency
command
0
Example 1: Without reverse Example 2: With reverse
Trim frequency
command
[O2] terminal
FOI
FOI + FO2
FO2
0
FO
0
FO + FO2
[FW] terminal
External frequency
command
[O/OI] terminal
[AT] terminal
Actual frequency
command
0
Trim frequency
command
[O2] terminal
FOI
FOI + FO2
FO2
0
FO
0
FO + FO2
forward
reverse
HO2
FM
AM
OOIL
AMI
1 to 2 kΩ, 2W
LH
HO2
FM
AM
OOIL
AMI
+ –
0 to 9.6 VDC,
0 to 10V nominal
4 to 19.6 mA DC,
4 to 20 mA nominal
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
+ –
-10 to 9.6 VDC,
0 to 10V nominal
Standard Voltage Input Bipolar Voltage Input Current Input
HO2
FM
AM
OOIL
AMI
HO2
FM
AM
OOIL
AMI
Analog Output Operation
Operations
and Monitoring
4–62
Analog Output Operation
In the system design for inverter applications it is sometimes useful to monitor inverter opera-
tion from a remote location. In some cases, this requires only a panel-mounted analog meter
(moving-coil type). In other cases, a controller device such as a PLC may monitor and
command the inverter frequency and other functions. The inverter can transmit the (real-time)
output frequency, current, torque, or other parameters to the controller to confirm actual opera-
tion. The monitor output terminal [FM] serves these purposes.
[FM] Terminal The inverter provides an analog/digital output on
terminal [FM] (frequency monitor). It uses
terminal [CM1] as digital GND reference. While
many applications use this terminal to monitor
the output frequency, you can configure terminal
[FM] to transmit one of several parameters.
Most use pulse-width modulation (PWM) to
represent the value, while one parameter uses
frequency modulation (FM) to represent the
value. Do not confuse the notation for terminal
[FM] (with brackets) with FM signal type.
The following table lists the configurations for terminal [FM]. Use function C027 to configure.
Note 1: Display substitutes only during sensorless vector control, 0Hz domain sensorless
vector control, and vector control
PWM Signal Type The pulse-width modulated signal at terminal
[FM] is primarily designed for driving a moving-
coil meter. The pulse-width modulated signal is
automatically averaged by the inertia of the
moving-coil mechanism—converting the PWM
signal to an analog representation. Be sure to use
a 10V full-scale DC voltmeter.
The signal characteristics of terminal [FM] in
PWM signal configuration is shown below
Func. Code Description Waveform Full Scale Value
C027
00 Output frequency PWM 0 – Max. frequency (Hz)
01 Output current PWM 0 – 200%
02 Output torque *1 PWM 0 – 200%
03 Output frequency FM 0 – Max. frequency (Hz)
04 Output voltage PWM 0 – 100%
05 Input electric power PWM 0 – 200%
06 Thermal load ratio PWM 0 – 100%
07 LAD frequency PWM 0 – Max. frequency (Hz)
D GND
Analog/digital Output
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
HO2
FM
AM
OOIL
FW
TH
PLC
P24
CM1
AMI
HO2
FM
AM
OOIL
FW
TH
PLC
P24
CM1
AMI
+–
0 to 10V,
1 mA
[FM]
[FM] output value t
T
---=
Period T = 6.4ms constant (156 Hz) Selects FM type output
= [FM] terminal 8-bit gain setting
B081
C27=00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 07
t
10V
0V
t
T
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–63
To calibrate the meter reading, generate a full-scale output (always ON) at terminal [FM]. Then
use parameter B081(gain setting from 0 to 255) to adjust the corresponding full-scale reading
of the meter. For example, when the inverter output frequency is 60 Hz, change the value of
B081 so that the meter reads 60 Hz.
TIP: When using the analog meter for monitoring, adjust the meter so it has a zero reading
when the [FM] output is zero. Then use scale factor B081 to adjust the [FM] output so the
maximum frequency in the inverter corresponds to a full-scale reading on the meter.
NOTE: The indicator accuracy after adjustment is about ±5%. Depending on the motor, the
accuracy may exceed this value.
PWM Smoothing Circuit – Note that
standard analog output signals are avail-
able on terminals [AM] and [AMI],
covered in the next section. However, you
may also wish to smooth the PWM signal
at the [FM] terminal and convert it to an
analog signal. The [FM] terminal will then
generate a relatively stable DC analog
voltage that represents the output value.
To do this, use the circuit shown to the
right. Note the output impedance of the
circuit is at least 82kΩ, so the monitoring
device needs an input impedance of 1MΩ
or greater. Otherwise, the impedance of
the smoothing circuit will cause a non-
linearity in the reading.
FM Signal Type The frequency-modulated output at terminal [FM] varies its frequency with the inverter output
frequency (when C027=03). This frequency is digitally controlled for accuracy, and does not
use the B081 gain setting when C027=03 (frequency modulation).
HO2
FM
AM
OOIL
FW
TH
PLC
P24
CM1
AMI
+
–
+
–
+
33kΩ
82kΩ
Volts
1µF
T1
[FM] Output Frequency
---------------------------------------------------------=
Selects FM type output
[FM]
T
[FM] Output Frequency 1
T
---=
C027=03
t
10V
0V
50% fixed duty cycle
Analog Output Operation
Operations
and Monitoring
4–64
[AM] and [AMI]
Terminals
The [AM] and [AMI] terminals provide signals
to monitor various inverter parameters such as
output frequency, output current, and torque.
The terminals provide these analog signal types:
• [AM] terminal: 0–10V analog output signal
• [AMI] terminal: 4–20mA analog output
signal
These signals both use the [L] terminal for signal
return. Eight different inverter parameters may
be monitored independently at either the [AM]
or [AMI] terminal, as listed in the table below.
Use C028 to configure terminal [AM], and C029
to configure terminal [AMI].
Note 1: Display of torque is possible only during sensorless vector control, 0Hz domain
sensorless vector control, and vector control with feedback
The analog signals may need some adjustment for gain or offset to compensate for variances in
the system. For example, the signals may drive a panel meter and require a full-scale gain
adjustment. The table below lists the function codes and their descriptions. The [AM] and
[AMI] terminals have separate gain and offset adjustments. Note the default values.
Func. Terminal Code Description Full Scale Value
C028 /
C029
[AM] /
[AMI]
00 Output frequency 0 – Max. frequency (Hz)
01 Output current 0 – 200%
02 Output torque *1 0 – 200%
04 Output voltage 0 – 100%
05 Input electric power 0 – 200%
06 Thermal load ratio 0 – 100%
07 LAD frequency 0 – Max. frequency (Hz)
Func. Ter minal Description Range Default
B080 [AM] Gain adjustment 0 – 255 180
C086 [AM] Offset Adjustment 0.0 – 10.0V 0.0V
C087 [AMI] Gain adjustment 0 – 255 80
C088 [AMI] Offset Adjustment 0.0 – 20.0mA 0.0mA
HO2
FM
AM
OOIL
AMI
A GND
See I/O specs on page 4–9.
0–10V analog output
4–20mA analog output
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–65
Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control
Introduction These advanced torque control algorithms improve performance, particularly at low speeds:
•Sensorless Vector Control – improved torque control at output frequencies down to 0.5 Hz.
Use A044=03 (1st motor) or A244=03 (2nd motor) to select sensorless vector control.
•Sensorless Vector Control, 0Hz Domain – improved torque control at output frequencies
from 0 to 2.5 Hz. Use A044=04 (1st motor) or A244=04 (2nd motor) to select sensorless
vector control, 0Hz domain.
•Sensorless Vector Control with Feedback – improved torque control at all speeds, while
providing the most accurate speed regulation of all torque control algorithms. Use A044=05
to select sensorless vector control with feedback.
These three control algorithms require the inverter’s motor constants to accurately match the
characteristics of the particular motor connected to your inverter. Simply using the inverter’s
default parameters with the vector control modes may not produce satisfactory results. The
auto-tuning procedure described later in this section is recommended for most applications
needing vector control. It determines and records the characteristics of the attached motor.
However, it is possible to enter the motor constants directly if the motor manufacturer has
provided that data.
After performing an initial auto-tuning procedure for your motor, you have an additional
option: adaptive tuning. The adaptive tuning parameters use the auto-tuning procedure’s results
as starting values. Then, each time the motor runs normally in your application, the inverter
tunes the parameters again to match the motor. This compensates for temperature changes, etc.,
further optimizing the values.
The following table lists the parameters associated with motor constant settings. Function H002
selects the set of motor constants that you want the inverter to use in normal use. Standard
constants (select with H002=00) include H020 to H024. Auto-tuned constants (select with
H002=01) include H030 to H034. Remember that you have to do the auto-tuning procedure in
this section before using either auto-tuned constants or the adaptive mode (H002=02).
Func. Name Data Notes
A044 /
A244 /
A344
V/f characteristic curve selection,
1st / 2nd / 3rd motors
00 V/f constant torque
01 V/f variable torque
02 V/f free-setting curve
03 Sensorless vector control (SLV)
04 Sensorless vector control, 0Hz domain
05 Vector control with encoder feedback
H002 Motor data selection, 1st motor 00 Standard motor parameters
01 Auto-tuning parameters
02 Adaptive tuning parameters
H003 Motor capacity, 1st motor 0.2 – 75,
0.2 – 160
kW, up to –550xxx models
kW, –750xxx to –1500xxx models
H004 Motor poles setting, 1st motor 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 Units: poles
H020 Motor constant R1, 1st motor 0.000–65.53 Units: ohms
H021 Motor constant R2, 1st motor 0.000–65.53 Units: ohms
H022 Motor constant L, 1st motor 0.00–655.3 Units: mH
H023 Motor constant Io, 1st motor 0.00–655.3 Units: A
H024 Motor constant J, 1st motor 0.001–9999 Units: kgm2
H030 Auto-tuned constant R1, 1st motor 0.000–65.53 Units: ohms
Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control
Operations
and Monitoring
4–66
The inverter has three separate motor constant sets named 1st, 2nd, and 3rd. The 1st motor
constant set is the default, while the SET and SET2 intelligent inputs select the 2nd and 3rd
constant sets, respectively. The torque control methods are valid to use only if a particular
motor constant set includes parameters for the selected control method. The following table
lists the vector control methods and shows the ones that are valid for each motor constant set.:
The motor data selection is available only to the 1st motor constant set, selected by function
H004. By default, the 2nd and 3rd motor constants sets only store standard motor parameters.
The table below shows this arrangement.
When motor constant values are available from the motor manufacturer, you can enter them
directly. The available motor constant parameters (storage locations) depend on the motor
constant set (1st, 2nd, or 3rd) according to the following table.
H031 Auto-tuned constant R2, 1st motor 0.000–65.53 Units: ohms
H032 Auto-tuned constant L, 1st motor 0.00–655.3 Units: mH
H033 Auto-tuned constant Io, 1st motor 0.00–655.3 Units: A
H034 Auto-tuned constant J, 1st motor 0.001–9999 Units: kgm2
Vect or Con trol Me thod 1st motor 2nd motor 3rd motor
V/f constant torque ✔✔✔
V/f variable torque ✔✔✔
V/f free-setting curve ✔✔ ✘
Sensorless vector control (SLV) ✔✔ ✘
Sensorless vector control, 0Hz domain ✔✔ ✘
Vector control with encoder feedback ✔✘ ✘
Motor data selection 1st motor 2nd motor 3rd motor
Standard motor parameters ✔✔✔
Auto-tuning parameters ✔✘ ✘
Adaptive tuning parameters ✔✘ ✘
Motor data selection 1st motor 2nd motor 3rd motor
Standard motor parameters H020 to H024 H220 to H224 —
Auto-tuning parameters H030 to H034 — —
Adaptive tuning parameters H030 to H034 — —
Func. Name Data Notes
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–67
Auto-tuning of
Motor Constants
The SJ300 inverter features auto-tuning, which detects and records the motor characteristic
parameters to use in all vector control modes. Auto-tuning determines the resistance and induc-
tance of motor windings. Therefore, the motor must be connected to the inverter for this proce-
dure. Note that the auto-tuning feature is not associated with PID loop operation, which is
common on some control devices. The auto-tuning procedure must be conducted while the
inverter is stopped (not in Run mode), so it can use special output pulses to detect motor
characteristics.
When using the inverter in sensorless vector control, sensorless vector control - 0Hz domain, or
vector control with encoder feedback, the motor circuit constants are important. If they are
unknown, then you must first conduct the auto-tuning procedure. The inverter will determine
the constants and write new values for the related “H” Group settings. The auto-tuning proce-
dure requires that the inverter be configured to operate the 1st motor (do not set the inverter to
use 2nd and 3rd motor data during an auto-tuning procedure).
Please read the following Warning before running the auto-tuning procedure on the next page.
WARNING: You may need to disconnect the load from the motor before performing auto-
tuning. The inverter runs the motor forward and backward for several seconds without regard to
load movement limits.
Func. Name Range Notes
H001
Auto-tuning setting 00 Disabled
01 Enabled, without motor rotation
02 Enabled, with motor rotation
H002
Motor data selection, 1st motor 00 Standard motor parameters
01 Auto-tuning parameters
02 Adaptive tuning parameters
H003
Motor capacity, 1st motor 0.2 – 75,
0.2 – 160
kW, up to –550xxx models
kW, –750xxx to –1500xxx
models
H004 Motor poles setting, 1st motor 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 Units: poles
H030 Auto-tuned motor constant R1,
1st motor
— Units: ohms
H031 Auto-tuned motor constant R2,
1st motor
— Units: ohms
H032 Auto-tuned motor constant L,
1st motor
— Units: mH
H033 Auto-tuned motor constant Io,
1st motor
— Units: A
H034 Auto-tuned motor constant J, 1st
motor
—Units: kgm2
A003 Base frequency setting 30 to maximum freq. Units: Hz
A051
DC braking enable 00 Disabled (Disable during auto-
tuning)
01 Enabled
A082
AVR voltage select 200/215/220/230/240 Valid for 200V class inverters
380/400/415/440/
460/480
Valid for 400V class inverters
Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control
Operations
and Monitoring
4–68
Preparation for Auto-tuning Procedure – Be sure to study the preparation items and verify
the related inverter configuration before going further in this procedure.
1. Adjust the motor base frequency (A003) and the motor voltage selection (A082) to match
the specifications of the motor used in the auto-tuning procedure.
2. Verify that the motor is not more than one frame size smaller than the rated size for he
inverter. Otherwise, the motor characteristic measurements may be inaccurate.
3. Be sure that no outside force will drive the motor during auto-tuning.
4. If DC braking is enabled (A051=01), the motor constants will not be accurately set. There-
fore, disable DC braking (A051=00) before starting the auto-tuning procedure.
5. When auto-tuning with motor rotation (H002=02), take care to verify the following points:
a. The motor will rotate up to 80% of the base frequency; make sure that this will not cause
any problem.
b. Do not attempt to either run or stop the motor during the auto-tuning procedure unless it
is an emergency. If this occurs, initialize the inverter’s parameters to the factory default
settings (see “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–9). Then reprogram the
parameters unique to your application, and initiate the auto-tuning procedure again.
c. Release any mechanical brake that would interfere with the motor rotating freely.
d. Disconnect any mechanical load from the motor. The torque during auto-tuning is not
enough to move some loads.
e. If the motor is part of a mechanism with limited travel (such as lead screw or elevator),
select H001=01 so that the auto-tuning will not cause motor rotation.
6. Note that even when you select H001=01 for no rotation, sometimes the motor will rotate.
7. When using a motor that is one frame size smaller than the inverter rating, enable the
overload restriction function. Then set the overload restriction level to 1.5 times the rated
output current of the motor.
Auto-tuning
Procedure
After the preparations above are complete, perform the auto-tuning procedure by following the
steps below.
1. Set H001=01 (auto-tuning without motor rotation) or H001=02 (auto-tuning with motor
rotation).
2. Turn the Run command ON. The inverter will then automatically sequence through the
following actions:
a. First AC excitation (motor does not rotate)
b. Second AC excitation (motor does not rotate)
c. First DC excitation (motor does not rotate)
d. V/F running—this step occurs only if H001=02 (motor accelerates up to 80% of the
base frequency)
e. SLV running—this step occurs only if H001=02 (motor accelerates up to x% of the base
frequency), where “x” varies with time T during this step:
x=40% when T < 50s
x=20% when 50s < T < 100s
x=10% when T => 100s
f. Second DC excitation
g. Displays the pass/fail result of the auto-tuning (see next page)
NOTE: During the AC and DC motor excitation steps above, you may notice that the motor
makes a slight humming sound. This sound is normal.
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–69
If the auto-tuning procedure is successful, the inverter updates
the motor characteristic parameters and indicates normal termi-
nation of the procedure as shown. Pressing any key on the
keypad will clear the result from the display.
•Trip during auto-tuning – A trip event will cause the auto-
tuning sequence to quit. The display will show the error code
for the trip rather than the abnormal termination indication.
After eliminating the cause of the trip, then conduct the auto-
tuning procedure again.
•Power loss or stop during auto-tuning – If the auto-tuning
procedure is interrupted by power loss, the Stop key, or by
turning OFF the Run command, the auto-tuning constants
may or may not be stored in the inverter. It will be necessary to restore the inverter’s factory
default settings (see “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–9). After initializing the
inverter, then perform the auto-tuning procedure again.
•Free V/F setting – The auto-tuning procedure will have an abnormal termination if the
control mode of the inverter is set for free V/F setting.
Adaptive Auto-
tuning of Motor
Constants
The adaptive auto-tuning feature refines the motor constants by checking the motor characteris-
tic while it in the normal running temperature range.
Preparation for Adaptive Auto-tuning – Be sure to study the preparation items and verify the
related inverter configuration before going further in this procedure.
1. It is necessary to first perform the auto-tuning procedure in the section above, since adaptive
auto-tuning requires accurate initial constant values.
2. Adaptive auto-tuning is valid only for the 1st motor data (do not use 2nd or 3rd motor data
settings).
3. The adaptive auto-tuning sequence actually begins as the motor decelerates to a stop from a
Run command you initiate. However, the sequence still continues for five (5) more seconds.
Giving another Run command during this 5-second time period will halt the adaptive auto-
tuning. It will resume the next time the motor runs and decelerates to a stop.
4. If DC braking is enabled, then the adaptive auto-tuning sequence executes after DC braking
brings the motor to a stop.
After reading and following the preparation steps above, then configure the inverter for
adaptive auto-tuning by following these steps:
1. Set H002=02 for adaptive auto-tuning procedure
2. Set H001=00 to disable the (manual) auto-tuning procedure
3. Turn the Run command ON.
4. Run the motor for an appropriate time until it reaches its normal operating temperature
range. Remember that the purpose of adaptive auto-tuning is optimize the inverter for
typical running conditions.
5. Stop the motor (or turn the Run command OFF), which initiates an adaptive auto-tuning.
Wait at least five (5) seconds before issuing any other command to the inverter.
With the above configuration, the inverter automatically runs the adaptive auto-tuning sequence
each time the motor runs and decelerates to a stop. This continuously adapts the SLV control
algorithm to slight changes in the motor constants during operation.
NOTE: It is not necessary to wait 5 seconds after each time the motor runs before running
again. When the motor stops for less than 5 seconds before running again, the inverter stops the
adaptive tuning sequence and keeps the current motor constant values in memory. The inverter
will attempt the adaptive auto-tuning at the next run/stop event of the motor.
Abnormal termination
Normal termination
Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control
Operations
and Monitoring
4–70
Manual Setting of
Motor Constants
With vector control, the inverter uses the output current, output voltage, and motor constants to
estimate the motor torque and speed. It is possible to achieve a high starting torque and accurate
speed control at low frequency
•Sensorless Vector Control – improved torque control at output frequencies down to 0.5 Hz.
Use A044=03 (1st motor) or A244=03 (2nd motor) to select sensorless vector control.
•Sensorless Vector Control, 0Hz Domain – improved torque control at output frequencies
from 0 to 2.5 Hz. Use A044=04 (1st motor) or A244=04 (2nd motor). For this vector control
method, we recommend using a motor that is one frame size smaller than the inverter size.
•Sensorless Vector Control with Feedback – improved torque control at all speeds, while
providing the most accurate speed regulation
If you do use any vector control methods, it is important that the motor constants stored in the
inverter match the motor. We recommend first using the auto-tuning procedure in the previous
section. If satisfactory performance through auto-tuning cannot be fully obtained, please adjust
the motor constants for the observed symptoms according to the table below.
CAUTION: If the inverter capacity is more than twice the capacity of the motor in use, the
inverter may not achieve its full performance specifications.
CAUTION: You must use a carrier frequency of more than 2.1kHz. The inverter cannot
operate in vector control mode at less than 2.1 kHz carrier frequency.
When using a motor one frame size smaller than the inverter rating, the torque limit value
(B041 to B044) is from the following formula and the value of the actual motor torque limit is
calculated by the formula. Do not set a value in B041 to B044 that results in an actual torque
greater than 200% or you risk motor failure.
For example, suppose you have a 0.75kW inverter and a 0.4kW motor. The torque limit setting
value that is for T=200% is set (entered) as 106%, shown by the following formula:
Operation Status Symptom Adjustment Parameter
Powered running When the speed deviation
is negative
Slowly increase the motor constant
R2 in relation to auto-tuning data,
within 1 to 1.2 times preset R2
H021 / H221
When the speed deviation
is positive
Slowly decrease the motor constant
R2 in relation to auto-tuning data,
within 0.8 to 1 times preset R2
H021 / H221
Regeneration
(status with a decel-
erating torque)
When low frequency (a
few Hz) torque is insuffi-
cient
Slowly increase the motor speed
constant R1 in relation to auto-
tuning data within 1 to 1.2 times R1
H020 / H220
Slowly increase the motor constant
IO in relation to auto-tuning data,
within 1 to 1.2 times preset IO
H023 / H223
During acceleration A sudden jerk at start of
rotation
Increase motor constant J slowly
within 1 to 1.2 times the preset
constant
H024 / H224
During deceleration Unstable motor rotation Decrease the speed response H05, H205
Set motor constant J smaller than
the preset constant
H024, H224
During torque
limiting
Insufficient torque during
torque limit at low speed
Set the overload restriction level
lower than the torque limit level
B021,
B041 to B044
At low-frequency
operation
Irregular rotation Set motor constant J larger than the
preset constant
H024, H244
Torque limit setting Actual torque limit Motor capacity
×
Inverter capacity
-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 200% 0.4kW×
0.75kW
-------------------------------106%===
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–71
PID Loop Operation
In standard operation, the inverter uses a reference source selected by parameter A001 for the
output frequency, which may be a fixed value (F001), a variable set by the front panel potenti-
ometer, or value from an analog input (voltage or current). To enable PID operation, set A071 =
01. This causes the inverter to calculate the target frequency, or setpoint. An optional intelligent
input assignment (code 23), PID Disable, will temporarily disable PID operation when active.
A calculated target frequency can have a lot of advantages. It lets the inverter adjust the motor
speed to optimize some other process variable of interest, potentially saving energy as well.
Refer to the figure below. The motor acts upon the external process. To control that external
process, the inverter must monitor the process variable. This requires wiring a sensor to either
the analog input terminal [O] (voltage) or terminal [OI] (current).
When enabled, the PID loop calculates the ideal output frequency to minimize the loop error.
This means we no longer command the inverter to run at a particular frequency, but we specify
the ideal value for the process variable. That ideal value is called the setpoint, and is specified
in the units of the external process variable. For a pump application it may be gallons/minute,
or it could be air velocity or temperature for an HVAC unit. Parameter A075 is a scale factor
that relates the external process variable units to motor frequency. The figure below is a more
detailed diagram of the PID function.
∑
PID
Calculation
ErrorSetpoint
SP
PV
Freq. Inverter
Output Motor External
Process
Sensor
Process Variable (PV)
Inverter
Analog input
Monitor
P gain
I gain
D gain
∑
Analog input scaling
∑
Voltage
O
OI
L
Current
A GND
PID V/I
input select
Process Variable
(Feedback)
Scale factor
Frequency
setting
Scale factor
Setpoint
(Target)
Scale factor
reciprocal
Multi-speed
settings
Standard
setting
Frequency
source select
Potentiometer
on keypad Error
[AT]
V/I input
select PV
SP
A001
A075 F001
F001
1/A075
A020 to A035 A072
A073
A075 D004
A074
A076
A011
A015
A012
A013 A014
A071
PID Enable
C023
PID Disable
optional
intelligent input
PID
Normal
Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors
Operations
and Monitoring
4–72
Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors
Simultaneous
Connections
For some applications, you may need to connect two
or more motors (wired in parallel) to a single
inverter’s output. For example, this is common in
conveyor applications where two separate conveyors
need to have approximately the same speed. The use
of two motors may be less expensive than making the
mechanical link for one motor to drive multiple
conveyors.
Some of the requirements when using multiple
motors with one drive are:
• Use only V/F (variable-frequency) control; do not use SLV (sensorless vector control).
• The inverter output must be rated to handle the sum of the currents from the motors.
• You must use separate thermal protection switches or devices to protect each motor. Locate
the device for each motor inside the motor housing or as close to it as possible.
• The wiring for the motors must be permanently connected in parallel (do not remove one
motor from the circuit during operation).
NOTE: The motor speeds are identical only in theory. That is because slight differences in
their loads will cause one motor to slip a little more than another, even if the motors are identi-
cal. Therefore, do not use this technique for multi-axis machinery that must maintain a fixed
position reference between its axes.
Inverter
Configuration for
Multiple Motor
Types
Some equipment manufacturers may have a single type of machine that has to support three
different motor types—and only one motor will be connected at a time. For example, an OEM
may sell basically the same machine to the US market and the European market. Some reasons
why the OEM needs two motor profiles are:
• The inverter power input voltage is different for these markets.
• The required motor type is also different for each destination.
In other cases, the inverter needs two profiles because the machine characteristics vary accord-
ing to these situations:
• Sometimes the motor load is very light and can move fast. Other times the motor load is
heavy and must move slower. Using two profiles allows the motor speed, acceleration and
deceleration to be optimal for the load and avoid inverter trip (fault) events.
• Sometimes the slower version of the machine does not have special braking options, but a
higher performance version does have braking features.
Having multiple motor profiles lets you store several “personalities” for motors in one
inverter’s memory. The inverter allows the final selection between the three motor types to be
made in the field through the use of intelligent input terminal functions [SET] and [SET3]. This
provides an extra level of flexibility needed in particular situations. See the following page.
Inverter
to Nth motor
Motor 1
Motor 2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
SJ300 Inverter
Operations
and Monitoring
4–73
Parameters for the second motor and third motors have function codes of the form x2xx and
x3xx respectively. They appear immediately after the first motor’s parameter in the menu
listing order. The following table lists the parameters that have the second/third parameter
registers for programming.
Function Name
Parameter Codes
1st motor 2nd motor 3rd motor
Multi-speed frequency setting A020 A220 A320
Acceleration time setting (Acceleration 1) F002 F202 F302
Deceleration time setting (Deceleration 1) F003 F203 F303
Second acceleration time setting (Accelera-
tion 2)
A092 A292 A392
Second deceleration time setting (Decelera-
tion 2)
A093 A293 A393
Select method to use 2nd acceleration/deceler-
ation
A094 A294 —
Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point A095 A295 —
Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point A096 A296 —
Level of electronic thermal setting B012 B212 B312
Select electronic thermal characteristic B013 B213 B313
Torque boost method selection A041 A241 —
Manual torque boost value A042 A242 —
Manual torque boost frequency adjustment A043 A243 A343
V/F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 A344
Base frequency setting A003 A203 A303
Maximum frequency setting A004 A204 A304
Select motor constant H002 H202 —
Motor capacity setting H003 H203 —
Motor poles setting H004 H204 —
Motor constant R1 setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)
H020/H030 H220/H230 —
Motor constant R2 setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)
H021/H031 H221/H231 —
Motor constant L setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)
H022/H032 H222/H232 —
Motor constant Io setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)
H023/H033 H223/H233 —
Motor constant J setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)
H024/H034 H224/H234 —
Motor constant Kp setting (Standard, Auto
tuning)
H005 H205 —
Motor stabilization constant H006 H206 —
Inverter System
Accessories
In This Chapter.... page
— Introduction ....................................................................................... 2
— Component Descriptions .................................................................. 3
— Dynamic Braking............................................................................... 6
5
Introduction
Motor Control
Accessories
5–2
Introduction
A motor speed control system will obviously include a motor and inverter, as well as fuses for
safety. If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just to get started, that’s all
you may need for now. But a fully developed system can also have a variety of additional
components. Some can be for noise suppression, while others may enhance the inverter’s
braking performance. The figure below shows a system with several possible optional compo-
nents, and the table gives part number information.
AC reactor, or
LCR filter
RF noise
filter
DC link choke
AC reactor
EMI filter
Capacitive filter
Braking
resistor
Braking
unit
RF noise filter
Thermal switch
NOTE: The Hitachi part number series for accessories
includes different sizes of each part type, specified by the
–x suffix. Hitachi product literature can help match size
and rating of your inverter to the proper accessory size.
Each inverter accessory comes with its own printed
instruction manual. Please refer to those manuals for com-
plete installation details. This chapter gives only an over-
view of these optional system devices. For more
information on Hitachi inverter system accessories, please
contact your Hitachi sales office or distributor.
Name
Part No. Series
See
page
Europe,
Japan USA
AC reactor, input
side
ALI–xxx HRL–x 5–3
RF noise filter,
input side
ZCL–x ZCL–x 5–4
EMI filter
(EMC Class A)
NF–CEHx NF–CEHxx 5–4
EMI filter
(EMC Class B)
NF–CEHx,
with FC–Hx
NF–CEHxx,
with FC–Hx
5–4
Capacitive filter CFI–x CFI–x 5–4
DC link choke —HDC–xxx 5–4
Braking resistor JRB–xxx–x,
SRB–xxx–x
JRB–xxx,
SRB–xxx
5–9
Braking resistor,
NEMA-rated
—HRB1-x,
HRB2-x
HRB3-x
5–9
Resistance braking
unit
BRD–xxx BRD–xxx 5–8
RF noise filter,
output side
ZCL–xxx ZCL–xxx 5–4
AC reactor, output
side
ALI–xxx HRL–xxx 5–3
LCR filter —HRL–xxxC 5–3
Encoder feed-back
expansion
SJ-FB 5–5
Digital input
expansion card
SJ-DG 5–5
Inverter
Encoder input
expansion card
Digital input
expansion card
A B
Switch
Breaker,
MCCB or
GFI
Ferrite core
Expansion bay
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
Motor
Encoder
RST
+1
+
RB
GND
UVW
–
From power supply
SJ300 Inverter
Motor Control
Accessories
5–3
Component Descriptions
AC Reactors,
Input Side
This is useful in suppressing harmonics induced on the power supply lines, or when the main
power voltage imbalance exceeds 3% (and power source capacity is more than 500 kVA), or to
smooth out line fluctuations. It also improves the power factor.
In the following cases for a general-purpose inverter, a large peak current flows on the main
power supply side, and is able to destroy the inverter module:
• If the unbalanced factor of the power supply is 3% or higher
• If the power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity (the power
supply capacity is 500 kVA or more)
• If abrupt power supply changes are expected
Examples of these situations include:
1. Several inverters are connected in parallel, sharing the same power bus
2. A thyristor converter and an inverter are connected in parallel, sharing the same power bus
3. An installed phase-advance (power factor correction) capacitor opens and closes
Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable, install
an AC reactor between the power supply and the inverter. Also, where the effects of an indirect
lightning strike is possible, install a lightning conductor.
Example calculation:
VRS = 205V, VST = 203V, VTR = 197V,
where VRS is R-S line voltage, VST is S-T line voltage, VTR is T-R line voltage
Please refer to the documentation that comes with the AC reactor for installation instructions.
AC Reactor or
LCR Filter,
Output Side
This reactor reduces the vibrations in the motor caused by the inverter’s switching waveforms,
by smoothing the waveforms to approximate commercial power quality. It is also useful to
reduce the reflected voltage wave phenomenon when wiring from the inverter to the motor is
more than 10m in length. Please refer to the documentation that comes with the AC reactor for
installation instructions.
Unbalance factor of voltage Max. line voltage (min.) Mean line voltage–
Meanline voltage
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100×=
VRS VRS VST VTR
++()3⁄–
VRS VST VTR
++()3⁄
--------------------------------------------------------------------------100×=205 202–
202
------------------------100×1.5%==
Component Descriptions
Motor Control
Accessories
5–4
Zero-phase
Reactor (RF
Noise Filter)
Electrical noise interference may occur
on nearby equipment such as a radio
receiver. The zero-phase reactor helps
reduce radiated noise from the inverter
wiring. It can be used on the input or
output side of the inverter. The example
zero-phase reactor shown to the right
comes with a mounting bracket. The
wiring must go through the opening to
reduce the RF component of the electri-
cal noise. Loop the wires three times
(four turns) to attain the full RF filtering
effect. For larger wire sizes, place
multiple zero-phase reactors (up to
four) side-by-side for a greater filtering
effect.
EMI Filter The EMI filter reduces the conducted noise on the power supply wiring generated by the
inverter. Connect the EMI filter to the inverter primary (input side). The NF–CEH–x series
filter is required for compliance to the EMC Class A directive (Europe) and C-TICK (Austra-
lia). See “CE–EMC Installation Guidelines” on page D–2.
WARNING: The EMI filter has high internal leakage current from power wiring to the chassis.
Therefore, connect the chassis ground of the EMI filter before making the power connections to
avoid danger of shock or injury.
Ferrite Core To meet EMC Class B limit an optional ferrite core (FC–Hx) must be inserted between the
NF–CEHx filter (above) and the inverter.
RF Noise Filter
(Capacitive)
This capacitive filter reduces radiated noise from the main power wires in the inverter input
side. This filter is not for achieving CE compliance and is applicable only to the input side only
of the inverter. It comes in two versions—for 200V class inverters or 400V class inverters.
Please refer to the documentation that comes with the radio noise filter for installation instruc-
tions.
DC Link Choke The DC choke (reactor) suppresses harmonics generated by the inverter. It attenuates the high-
frequency components on the inverter’s internal DC bus (link). However, note that it does not
protect the diode rectifiers in the inverter input circuit.
ZCL–x
NF–CEHxx
SJ300 Inverter
Motor Control
Accessories
5–5
Expansion Cards The SJ–FB Encoder Feedback Board installs in
the inverter’s expansion bay, which can accept
up to two expansion cards. The encoder card
accepts two-channel incremental encoder
signals. Position feedback is essential for certain
torque-control algorithms, and is useful for
improving low-speed performance. The card can
also generate linear acceleration/deceleration
ramps for velocity control.
All wiring associated with this card connects to
its PWB connectors as shown. Some related
signals may be assigned to the intelligent I/O
terminals, as described in Chapter 4. For more
information, refer to the SJ–FB manual.
The SJ–DG Digital Input Card installs in the
inverter’s expansion bay. This card accepts up to
eight digital input signals, in addition to the intel-
ligent inputs on the inverter’s control terminal
connector. All wiring associated with card
connects to its PWB connectors as shown.
The SJ–DN DeviceNet Interface Card (not shown) installs in the inverter’s expansion bay. It
connects directly to a DeviceNet network. Inverter parameters P044 to P049 configure the card.
Only one DeviceNet card may be installed in an inverter. For more information, please refer to
the DeviceNet Expansion Card Instruction Manual.
PWB connector
to external wiring
SJ–FB Encoder Feedback Card
PWB connector
to external wiring
SJ–DG Digital Input Card
Dynamic Braking
Motor Control
Accessories
5–6
Dynamic Braking
Introduction The purpose of dynamic braking is to improve the ability of the inverter
to stop (decelerate) the motor and load. This becomes necessary when an
application has some or all of the following characteristics:
• High load inertia compared to the available motor torque
• The application requires frequent or sudden changes in speed
• System losses are not great enough to slow the motor as needed
When the inverter reduces its output frequency to decelerate the load, the
motor can temporarily become a generator. This occurs when the motor
rotation frequency is higher than the inverter output frequency. This
condition can cause the inverter DC bus voltage to rise, resulting in an
over-voltage trip. In many applications, the over-voltage condition
serves as a warning signal that we have exceeded the deceleration
capabilities of the system. SJ300 inverters rated 15hp (11kW) and below
have a built-in braking unit that sends the regenerative energy from the
motor during deceleration to the optional braking resistor(s). External
braking units may also be used if higher braking torques and/or duty
cycles are required. The dynamic braking resistor serves as a load, devel-
oping heat to stop the motor just as brakes on an automobile develop
heat during braking.
The braking resistor is the main component of a braking resistor assem-
bly, which includes an integral thermal fuse and thermally activated
alarm relay for safety. However, be careful to avoid overheating its resis-
tor. The thermal fuse and thermal relay are safeguards for extreme condi-
tions, but the inverter can maintain braking usage in a safe zone.
Dynamic Braking
Usage Ratio
The inverter controls braking via a duty cycle
method (percent of the time braking is ON
versus total time). Parameter B090 sets the
dynamic braking usage ratio. In the graph to
the right, the example shows three uses of
dynamic braking in a 100-second period. The
inverter calculates the average percentage
usage in that time (T%). The percentage of
usage is proportional to the heat dissipated. If
T% is greater than the B090 parameter
setting, the inverter enters the Trip Mode and
turns OFF the frequency output.
Please note the following (for SJ300–004LF/HF to SJ300–110LF/HF).
• When B090 is set for 0%, dynamic braking is not performed.
• When the T% value exceeds the limit set by B090, the inverter will trip (ending the dynamic
braking).
• The cable from the external resistor to the inverter must not exceed 5 m (16 ft.) length.
• The individual wires from the resistor to the inverter must not be bundled together.
NOTE: Inverters rated 20hp (15kW) and above (SJ300–150LF/HF to SJ300–550LF/1320HFE/
1500HFU) do not include an internal braking unit. Parameters B090, B095, and B096 do not
apply to these models.
Braking
Resistor
B90
BRD
T% t1 t2 t3 ...+++()
100 seconds
------------------------------------------ 100×=
t
t1 t2 t3
ON
OFF 100s
SJ300 Inverter
Motor Control
Accessories
5–7
SJ300
Dynamic Braking
Selection Tables
The SJ300 Series 200V and 400V class inverter models in the 1/2 to 15 hp range have internal
braking units. Additional stopping torque is available by adding external resistors. The required
braking torque depends on your particular application. Other tables in this section will help you
choose the proper resistor.
1/2 to 15 hp (0.4 to 11 kW) Without
External Resistor
Using Optional
External Resistor
Performance @
Minimum Resistance Minimum
Resistance
@ 100%
Braking
Duty
Cycle,
Ohms
Voltage
Class Model Number Motor
hp
Braking
Unit
Braking
Torq ue
@ 60Hz,
%
External
Resistance,
Ohms
Braking
Torque
@60Hz,
%
Minimum
Resistance,
Ohms
Max.
Braking
Duty
Cycle,
%
200V
SJ300–004LFU 1/2 Built-in 50 50 200 50 10 150
SJ300–007LFU 1 Built-in 50 50 200 50 10 150
SJ300–015LFU 2 Built-in 50 35 200 35 10 100
SJ300–022LFU 3 Built-in 20 35 160 35 10 100
SJ300–037LFU 5 Built-in 20 35 100 35 10 100
SJ300–055LFU 7.5 Built-in 20 17 80 17 10 50
SJ300–075LFU 10 Built-in 20 17 80 17 10 50
SJ300–110LFU 15 Built-in 10 17 70 17 10 50
400V
SJ300–007HFU/E 1 Built-in 50 100 200 100 10 300
SJ300–015HFU/E 2 Built-in 50 100 200 100 10 300
SJ300–022HFU/E 3 Built-in 20 100 200 100 10 300
SJ300–040HFU/E 5 Built-in 20 100 140 70 10 200
SJ300–055HFU/E 7.5 Built-in 20 70 100 70 10 200
SJ300–075HFU/E 10 Built-in 20 70 100 50 10 150
SJ300–110HFU/E 15 Built-in 10 70 70 50 10 150
Dynamic Braking
Motor Control
Accessories
5–8
Choosing a
Braking Unit
The SJ300 Series 200V and 400V class inverter models in the 20 to 200 hp range require
external braking units to increase their braking torque. Braking units come in sizes correspond-
ing to the power handing requirements for particular resistor selections. Be sure to follow the
installation instructions accompanying each braking unit. The following table lists the SJ300
inverter models and their applicable braking units.
20 to 200 hp (15 to 1500 kW)
Performance Versus External Braking Units
Without
Braking
Unit
With Braking Unit
Voltage
Class
Model Number
SJ300
Motor
hp
Braking
Torque,
%
Braking Unit
Model
Minimum
Resistance,
Ohms
Max.
Braking
Duty Cycle,
%
Minimum
Resistance
@ 100%
Braking
Duty Cycle,
Ohms
200V
–150LFU
20
10 BRD–E2 17 10 46
10 BRD–E2–30K 4 20 6
–185LFU
25
10 BRD–E2 17 10 46
10 BRD–E2–30K 4 20 6
–220LFU
30
10 BRD–E2 17 10 46
10 BRD–E2–30K 4 20 6
–300LFU 40 10 BRD–E2–30K 2 20 6
10 BRD–E2–55K 2 20 4
–370LFU 50 10 BRD–E2–55K 2 20 4
–450LFU 60 10 BRD–E2–55K 2 20 4
–550LFU 75 10 BRD–E2–55K 2 20 4
400V
–150HFU/HFE 20 10 BRD–EZ2 20 10 34
10 BRD–EZ2–30K 10 10 24
–185HFU/HFE 25 10 BRD–EZ2 20 10 34
10 BRD–EZ2–30K 10 10 24
–220HFU/HFE 30 10 BRD–EZ2 20 10 34
10 BRD–EZ2–30K 10 10 24
–300HFU/HFE 40 10 BRD–EZ2–55K 6 20 12
–370HFU/HFE 50 10 BRD–EZ2–55K 6 20 12
–450HFU/HFE 60 10 BRD–EZ2–55K 6 20 12
–550HFU/HFE 75 10 BRD–EZ2–55K 6 20 12
–750HFU/HFE 100 10 BRD–EZ2–55K 6 20 12
–900HFU/HFE 125 10 BRD–EZ2–55K 6 20 12
–1100HFU/HFE 150 10 BRD–EZ2–55K 6 20 12
–1320HFE 175 10 BRD–EZ2–55K 6 20 12
–1500HFU 200 10 BRD–EZ2–55K 6 20 12
SJ300 Inverter
Motor Control
Accessories
5–9
Selecting a
Braking Resistor
You can add one or more resistors to your inverter configuration to increase braking torque
performance. The number of resistors and their configuration (series or parallel) depends on the
desired braking torque. The tables below list the resistor types for inverter models with internal
braking units. Tables for inverters with external braking units are on the next two pages.
• Total Ohms – lists the resistance value of the resistor or, if using multiple resistors, their
combined resistance
• Total Watts – lists the power dissipation of the resistor or, if using multiple resistors, their
combined power dissipation
• Maximum Duty Cycle – the maximum allowable percentage of braking time over any 100-
second interval to avoid overheating the resistor(s)
• Maximum braking torque – the maximum braking torque that the inverter / resistor combina-
tion can deliver
NOTE: If your application requires resistors with NEMA ratings, be sure to use the HRB type.
200V Class Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection
Max.
Braking
Torque,
%
Model
Number
SJ300
JRB Series SRB/NSRB Series HRB Series
Type
& (qty)
Total
Ohms
Total
Watts
Max.
Duty
Cycle,
%
Type
& (qty)
Total
Ohms
Total
Watts
Max.
Duty
Cycle,
%
Type
& (qty)
Total
Ohms
Total
Watts
Max.
Duty
Cycle,
%
–004LFU 120–3 50 120 1.5 300–1 50 300 7.5 HRB1 50 400 10 200
–007LFU 120–3 50 120 1.5 300–1 50 300 7.5 HRB1 50 400 10 200
–015LFU 120–4 35 120 1.0 400–1 35 400 7.5 HRB2 35 600 10 200
–022LFU 120–4 35 120 1.0 400–1 35 400 7.5 HRB2 35 600 10 160
–037LFU 120–4 35 120 1.0 400–1 35 400 7.5 HRB2 35 600 10 100
–055LFU 120–4
x (2) in
parallel
17.5 240 1.0 400–1
x (2) in
parallel
17.5 800 7.5 HRB3 17 1200 10 80
–075LFU 17.5 240 1.0 17.5 800 7.5 HRB3 17 1200 10 80
–110LFU 17.5 240 1.0 17.5 800 7.5 HRB3 17 1200 10 70
400V Class Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection
Max.
Braking
Torque,
%
Model
Number
SJ300
JRB Series SRB/NSRB Series HRB Series
Type
& (qty)
Total
Ohms
Total
Watts
Max.
Duty
Cycle,
%
Type
& (qty)
Total
Ohms
Total
Watts
Max.
Duty
Cycle,
%
Type
& (qty)
Total
Ohms
Total
Watts
Max.
Duty
Cycle,
%
–007HFU/HFE 120–2 100 120 1.5 200–2 100 200 7.5 HRB1
x (2) in
series
100 800 10 200
–015HFU/HFE 120–2 100 120 1.5 200–2 100 200 7.5 100 800 10 200
–022HFU/HFE 120–2 100 120 1.5 200–2 100 200 7.5 100 800 10 200
–040HFU/HFE
120–4
x (2) in
series
70 240 1.0
400–1
x (2) in
series
70 800 10
HRB2
x (2) in
series
70 1200 10 140
–055HFU/HFE 70 240 1.0 70 800 10 70 1200 10 120
–075HFU/HFE 70 240 1.0 70 800 10 70 1200 10 100
–110HFU/HFE 70 240 1.0 70 800 10 70 1200 10 70
Dynamic Braking
Motor Control
Accessories
5–10
The table below lists the performance of 200V-class inverter models with the optional external
braking units. In some cases, the resistor selection specifies multiple resistors in a parallel,
series, or combination parallel/series configuration. The example diagram shows a parallel
configuration. Please refer to the braking resistor documentation for detailed wiring diagrams.
200V Class Braking Unit Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection
Max.
Braking
Torque,
%
Model Number
SJ300
Type Type
x (quantity)
Series or
Parallel
Tot al
Ohms
Total
Watts
Max.
Duty
Cycle,
%
–150LFU
BRD–E2
HRB1 — 50 400 10 30
HRB2 — 35 600 10 35
HRB3 — 17 1200 10 60
BRD–E2–30K
HRB3 x (2) parallel 8.5 2400 20 110
HRB3 x (3) parallel 5.7 3600 20 150
HRB3 x (4) parallel 4.3 4800 20 200
–185LFU
BRD–E2
HRB1 — 50 400 10 25
HRB2 — 35 600 10 30
HRB3 — 17 1200 10 50
BRD–E2–30K
HRB3 x (2) parallel 8.5 2400 20 90
HRB3 x (3) parallel 5.7 3600 20 130
HRB3 x (4) parallel 4.3 4800 20 170
–220LFU
BRD–E2
HRB1 — 50 400 10 25
HRB2 — 35 600 10 30
HRB3 — 17 1200 10 45
BRD–E2–30K
HRB3 x (2) parallel 8.5 2400 20 80
HRB3 x (3) parallel 5.7 3600 20 110
HRB3 x (4) parallel 4.3 4800 20 150
–300LFU BRD–E2–30K
HRB3 x (2) parallel 8.5 2400 20 55
HRB3 x (3) parallel 5.7 3600 20 80
HRB3 x (4) parallel 4.3 4800 20 110
–370LFU BRD–E2–30K
HRB3 x (2) parallel 8.5 2400 20 45
HRB3 x (3) parallel 5.7 3600 20 65
HRB3 x (4) parallel 4.3 4800 20 90
–450LFU BRD–E2–30K
HRB3 x (2) parallel 8.5 2400 20 35
HRB3 x (3) parallel 5.7 3600 20 50
HRB3 x (4) parallel 4.3 4800 20 75
Braking
Unit
Inverter
Example configuration
HRB3 x (4) parallel
SJ300 Inverter
Motor Control
Accessories
5–11
The table below lists the performance of 400V-class inverter models with the optional external
braking units. In some cases, the resistor selection specifies multiple resistors in a parallel,
series, or combination parallel/series configuration. The example diagram shows a combination
parallel / series configuration. Please refer to the braking unit manual for detailed wiring
diagrams.
–550LFU BRD–E2–30K
HRB3 x (2) parallel 8.5 2400 20 30
HRB3 x (3) parallel 5.7 3600 20 40
HRB3 x (4) parallel 4.3 4800 20 60
200V Class Braking Unit Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection
Max.
Braking
Torque,
%
Model Number
SJ300
Type Type
x (quantity)
Series or
Parallel
Total
Ohms
Total
Watts
Max.
Duty
Cycle,
%
Braking
Unit
HRB3 x (6)...
(3) parallel x 2 series
Inverter
Example configuration
400V Class Braking Unit Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection
Max.
Braking
Torque,
%
Model Number
SJ300
Type Type
x (quantity)
Series /
Parallel
Total
Ohms
Total
Watts
Max.
Duty
Cycle,
%
–150HFU/HFE
BRD–EZ2
HRB1 x (2) series 100 800 10 40
HRB2 x (2) series 70 1200 10 60
HRB3 x (2) series 34 2400 10 110
BRD–EZ2–30K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 190
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 200
–185HFU/HFE
BRD–EZ2
HRB1 x (2) series 100 800 10 40
HRB2 x (2) series 70 1200 10 50
HRB3 x (2) series 34 2400 10 90
BRD–EZ2–30K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 170
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 200
–220HFU/HFE
BRD–EZ2
HRB1 x (2) series 100 800 10 35
HRB2 x (2) series 70 1200 10 45
HRB3 x (2) series 34 2400 10 80
BRD–EZ2–30K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 150
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 200
Dynamic Braking
Motor Control
Accessories
5–12
NOTE: Other braking units and resistors are also available. For braking requirements beyond
those in the tables, contact your Hitachi distributor.
–300HFU BRD–EZ2–55K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 110
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 170
–370HFU/HFE BRD–EZ2–55K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 90
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 150
–450HFU/HFE BRD–EZ2–55K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 70
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 120
–550HFU/HFE BRD–EZ2–55K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 60
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 100
–750HFU/HFE BRD–EZ2–55K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 45
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 70
–900HFU/HFE BRD–EZ2–55K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 40
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 60
–1100HFU/HFE BRD–EZ2–55K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 30
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 50
–1320HFU BRD–EZ2–55K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 25
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 40
–1500HFE BRD–EZ2–55K
HRB3 x (4) (2) parallel
x 2 series
17 4800 10 20
HRB3 x (6) (3) parallel
x 2 series
11.3 7200 10 35
400V Class Braking Unit Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection
Max.
Braking
Torque,
%
Model Number
SJ300
Type Type
x (quantity)
Series /
Parallel
Total
Ohms
Tot al
Watts
Max.
Duty
Cycle,
%
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
In This Chapter.... page
— Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 2
— Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions................................... 5
— Restoring Factory Default Settings ................................................... 9
— Maintenance and Inspection........................................................... 10
— Warranty ......................................................................................... 18
6
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–2
Troubleshooting
Safety Messages Please read the following safety messages before troubleshooting or performing maintenance
on the inverter and motor system.
WARNING: Wait at least five (5) minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before
performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
WARNING: Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform maintenance, inspection,
and part replacement. Before starting to work, remove any metallic objects from your person
(wristwatch, bracelet, etc.). Be sure to use tools with insulated handles. Otherwise, there is a
danger of electric shock and/or injury to personnel.
WARNING: Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads (wires for cooling fan and
logic P.C. board). Otherwise, there is danger of fire due to wire breakage and/or injury to
personnel.
General Precau-
tions and Notes
• Always keep the unit clean so that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the inverter.
• Take special care to avoid breaking wires or making connection mistakes.
• Firmly connect terminals and connectors.
• Keep electronic equipment away from moisture and oil. Dust, steel filings and other foreign
matter can damage the inverter, causing unexpected accidents, so take special care.
Inspection Items This chapter provides instructions or checklists for these inspection items:
• Daily inspection
• Periodic inspection (approximately once a year)
• Insulation resistance test
SJ300 Inverter
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–3
Troubleshooting
Tips
The table below lists typical symptoms and the corresponding solution(s).
Symptom/condition Probable Cause Solution
The motor
will not run.
The inverter
outputs U, V, W
are not supplying
voltage.
•Is the frequency command source
A001 parameter setting correct?
•Is the Run command source A002
parameter setting correct?
•Make sure the parameter
setting A001 is correct.
•Make sure the parameter
setting A002 is correct.
•Is power being supplied to terminals
[R], [S], and [T] ([L1], [L2], and
[L3])? If so, the POWER lamp should
be ON.
•Check terminals [R], [S], and
[T] ([L1], [L2], and [L3]), then
[U], [V], and [W] ([T1], [T2],
and [T3]).
•Turn ON the power supply or
check fuses.
•Is there an error code
EXX.X
displayed?
•Press the Func. key and deter-
mine the error type. Eliminate
the error cause, then clear the
error (Reset).
•Are the signals to the intelligent input
terminals correct?
•Is the Run Command active?
•Is the [FW] terminal (or [RV])
connected to P24 (via switch, etc.)
•Verify the terminal functions
for C001 - C008 are correct.
•Turn ON Run command
enable.
•Supply 24V to [FW] or [RV]
terminal, if configured.
•Has the frequency setting for F001
been set greater than zero?
•Are the control circuit terminals [H],
[O], and [L] connected to the potenti-
ometer?
•Set the parameter for F001 to a
safe, non-zero value.
•If the potentiometer is the
frequency setting source, verify
voltage at [O] > 0V.
•Is the RS (reset) function or FRS (free-
run stop) function ON?
•Turn OFF the command(s).
Inverter outputs
U, V, W are
supplying voltage.
•Is the motor load too heavy? •Reduce load or test the motor
independently of the load.
The direction of the motor is
reversed.
•Are the connections of output termi-
nals [U/T1], [V/T2], and [W/T3]
correct?
•Is the phase sequence of the motor
forward or reverse with respect to
[U/T1],[V/T2], and [W/T3]?
•Make connections according to
the phase sequence of the
motor. In general:
FWD = U-V-W, and REV=U-
W-V.
•Are the control terminals [FW] and
[RV] wired correctly?
•Is parameter F004 properly set?
•Use terminal [FW] for forward,
and [RV] for reverse.
•Set motor direction in F004.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–4
The motor speed will not reach the
target frequency (desired speed).
•If using the analog input, is there
current or voltage at [O] or [OI]?
•Check the wiring.
•Check the potentiometer or
signal generating device.
•Is the load too heavy? •Reduce the load.
•Heavy loads activate the
overload restriction feature
(reduces output as needed).
•Is the inverter internally limiting the
output frequency?
•Check max frequency setting
(A004)
•Check frequency upper limit
setting (A061)
•If using analog inputs, check
their settings (A101– A104)
or (A111–A114), or (A011–
A014)
The rotation is unstable.
•Is the load fluctuation too great?
•Is the supply voltage unstable?
•Is the problem occurring at a particular
frequency?
•Increase the motor capacity
(both inverter and motor).
•Fix power supply problem.
•Change the output frequency
slightly, or use the jump
frequency setting to skip the
problem frequency.
The RPM of the motor does not
match the inverter output
frequency setting.
•Is the maximum frequency setting
A004 correct?
•Does the monitor function D001
display the expected output frequency?
•Verify the V/F settings match
motor specifications.
•Make sure all scaling (such as
A011 to A014) is properly set.
A parameter
will not
change after
an edit
(reverts to old
setting).
True for certain
parameters
•Is the inverter in Run Mode? Some
parameters cannot be edited during
Run Mode.
•Put inverter in Stop Mode
(press the Stop/reset key). Then
edit the parameter.
True for all
parameters
•If you’re using the [SFT] intelligent
input (software lock function)—is the
[SFT] input ON?
•Change the state of the SFT
input, and check the B031
parameter (SFT mode).
Symptom/condition Probable Cause Solution
SJ300 Inverter
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–5
Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions
Fault Detection
and Clearing
The microprocessor in the inverter detects a
variety of fault conditions and captures the event,
recording it in a history table. The inverter output
turns OFF, or “trips” similar to the way a circuit
breaker trips due to an over-current condition.
Most faults occur when the motor is running (refer
to the diagram to the right). However, the inverter
could have an internal fault and trip in Stop Mode.
In either case, you can clear the fault by pressing
the Stop/Reset key. Additionally, you can clear the
inverter’s cumulative trip history by performing the procedure “Restoring Factory Default
Settings” on page 6–9 (setting B_84=00 will clear the trip history but leave inverter settings
intact).
Error Status
Codes
The conditions at the time of an error provide important clues to help you understand the cause.
The SJ300 inverter displays a “status at trip point” digit to the right of the decimal point for
some error codes. For example,
E07.2
means Error 7 occurred and the inverter status was
condition # “2” when the error occurred.
Error Codes An error code will appear on the display automatically when a fault causes the inverter to trip.
The following table lists the cause associated with the error.
RUN
STOP
RESET
STOP
RESET
Run Stop
Fault Tr i p Fault
Status
Codes Inverter Status Status
Codes Inverter Status
---.0 Reset ---.5 f0 stop
---.1 Stop ---.6 Starting
---.2 Deceleration ---.7 DC braking
---.3 Constant speed ---.8 Overload restriction
---.4 Acceleration
Error
Code Name Probable Cause(s)
E01 Over current event while at
constant speed
The inverter output was short-circuited, or the
motor shaft is locked or has a heavy load. These
conditions cause excessive current for the inverter,
so the inverter output is turned OFF.
The dual-voltage motor is wired incorrectly.
Note: The SJ300 will over current trip at
nominally 200% of rated current for models up to
–550xxx;
nominally 180% of rated current for models
–750xxx to –1500xxx.
E02 Over current event during
deceleration
E03 Over current event during
acceleration
E04 Over current event during
other conditions
DC braking power(A054) is set too high, or a
current transformer error occurred, or a noise
source induced the error.
Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–6
E05 Overload protection When a motor overload is detected by the
electronic thermal function, the inverter trips and
turns OFF its output.
E06 Braking resistor overload When the regenerative braking resistor exceeds
the usage time allowance or usage ratio, the
inverter trips and turns OFF its output to the
motor.
E07 Over voltage protection When the DC bus voltage exceeds a threshold, due
to regenerative energy from the motor.
E08 EEPROM error When the built-in EEPROM memory has
problems due to noise or excessive temperature,
the inverter trips and turns OFF its output to the
motor.
E09 Under-voltage error A decrease of internal DC bus voltage below a
threshold results in a control circuit fault. This
condition can also generate excessive motor heat
or cause low torque. The inverter trips and turns
OFF its output.
E10 CT (current transformer)
error
If a strong source of electrical interference is close
to the inverter or a fault occurs in a built-in CT
(current transformer), the inverter trips and turns
its output OFF.
E11 CPU error A malfunction in the built-in CPU has occurred,
so the inverter trips and turns OFF its output to the
motor.
E12 External trip A signal on an intelligent input terminal config-
ured as EXT has occurred. The inverter trips and
turns OFF the output to the motor.
E13 USP When the Unattended Start Protection (USP) is
enabled, an error occurred when power is applied
while a Run signal is present. The inverter trips
and does not go into Run Mode until the error is
cleared.
E14 Ground fault The inverter is protected by the detection of
ground faults between the inverter output and the
motor during powerup tests. This feature protects
the inverter, and does not protect humans.
E15 Input over-voltage When the input voltage is higher than the specified
value, it is detected 60 seconds after powerup and
the inverter trips and turns OFF its output.
E16 Instantaneous power failure When the input power is removed for more than
15ms, the inverter trips and the output to the motor
turns OFF. If the power failure duration exceeds
the duration set in parameter B002, it is consid-
ered a power failure. When input power is
restored, the inverter restarts if the Run signal is
present, depending on the restart condition.
E21 Inverter thermal trip When the inverter internal temperature is above
the threshold, the thermal sensor in the inverter
module detects the excessive temperature of the
power devices and trips, turning the inverter
output OFF.
Error
Code Name Probable Cause(s)
SJ300 Inverter
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–7
NOTE: If an EEPROM error (E08) occurs, be sure to confirm the parameter data values are
still correct.
E23 Gate array error An internal inverter error has occurred in commu-
nications between the CPU and gate array IC.
E24 Phase failure detection One of three lines of the 3-phase power is missing.
E30 IGBT error When an instantaneous over-current condition
occurs on any IGBT (output transistor) device, the
inverter alarm trips. then it turns the outputs OFF
in order to protect the circuitry.
E35 Thermistor When a thermistor is connected to terminals [TH]
and [CM1] and the inverter has sensed the temper-
ature is too high, the inverter trips and turns OFF
the output.
E36 Brake error When the inverter releases the brake and cannot
detect whether the external brake is ON or OFF
within the waiting time (set by parameter B024),
the inverter trips and turns OFF the output to the
motor.
–––– Under-voltage (brownout)
with output shutoff
Due to low input voltage, the inverter turns its
output OFF and tries to restart. If it fails to restart,
then the alarm trips to record the under-voltage
error event.
Automatic restart and phase
loss
The inverter is restarting, due to an over-current,
over-voltage, under-voltage, or a phase loss event.
See parameter B001 setting in “Automatic Restart
Mode and Phase Loss” on page 3–29.
E6X Expansion card #1
connection error
An error has occurred in an expansion card or at
its connecting terminals. Please refer to the
manual for the expansion card for additional
details.
E7X Expansion card #2
connection error
Error
Code Name Probable Cause(s)
Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–8
Trip History and
Inverter Status
We recommend that you first find the cause of the fault before attempting clearing it. When a
fault occurs, the inverter stores important performance data at the moment of the fault. To
access the data, use the monitor functions (Dxxx) and select D081 for details about the present
fault (En). The previous five faults are stored in D081 to D086, with D (En-1 to En-5). Each error
shifts D081–D085 to D082–D086, and writes the new error to D081.
The following Monitor Menu map shows how to access the error codes. When fault(s) exist,
you can review their details by first selecting the proper function: D081 is most recent, and
D086 is the oldest.
1
Error Code
Error
exists?
Output frequency at
trip point
Motor current at
trip point
DC bus voltage at
trip point
No error
Ye s
No
FUNC.
212
2
E07.2
60.00
4.00
270.0
15
18
d 081
d 086
d082
1
1
1
1
1
____
Cumulative inverter
operation time
at trip point
Cumulative power-
ON time at trip point
1
FUNC.
2
FUNC.
Current Trip
Conditions
Trip History
Monitor Menu
SJ300 Inverter
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–9
Restoring Factory Default Settings
You can restore all inverter parameters to the original factory (default) settings for the intended
country of use. After initializing the inverter, use the powerup test in Chapter 2 to get the motor
running again. To initialize the inverter, follow the steps below.
NOTE: Initialization cannot be performed with a remote operator panel. Disconnect the device
and use the inverter’s front panel keypad.
No. Action Display Func./Parameter
1Use the , , and keys to
navigate to the “B” Group.
“B” Group selected
2Press the key. First “B” parameter selected
3Press and hold the key until -> Country code for initializa-
tion selected
4Press the key. 00 = Japan, 01 = Europe,
02 = U.S.
5 Confirm the country code is correct. Do not change it unless you are absolutely sure
the power input voltage range and frequency match the country code setting.
To change the country code, press or to set; to store.
6Press the key. Country code for initializa-
tion selected
7Press the key. Initialization function selected
8Press the key. 00 = initialization disabled,
clear trip history only
9Press the key. 01 = enable initialization
10 Press the key. Initialization now enabled to
restore all defaults
11 Press and hold the and
keys together, and immediately
press and hold the key. Do not
release these keys yet.
First part of special key
sequence, the “B” in the
display begins flashing
12 Holding the keys above, press and
hold the (STOP) key for 3 sec.
Entire “B084” display will
begin flashing
13 When the
b
084
display begins
flashing, release the key.
or
Default parameter country
code shown during initializa-
tion process (left-most charac-
ter displays alternating
pattern)
14 Release the , , and
keys together.
Final part of key sequence,
function code for output
frequency monitor shown after
initialization is complete
FUNC.
12
b---
FUNC.
b001
1
b085
FUNC.
02
12
STR
FUNC.
b085
2
b084
FUNC.
00
1
01
STR b084
12
FUNC.
b084
STOP
RESET
b084
STOP
RESET
0 eu
0USA
12
FUNC.
d001
Maintenance and Inspection
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–10
Maintenance and Inspection
Monthly and
Yearly Inspection
Chart
Note 1: The life of a capacitor is affected by the ambient temperature. See “Capacitor Life
Curve” on page 6–12.
Note 2: The inverter must be cleaned periodically. If dust accumulates on the fan and heat
sink, it can cause overheating of the inverter.
Item Inspected Check for...
Inspection
Cycle Inspection Method Criteria
Month Ye a r
Overall Ambient
environment
Extreme
temperatures
& humidity
✔Thermometer,
hygrometer
Ambient temperature
between -10 to 50°C,
non-condensing
Major devices Abnormal
vibration,
noise
✔Visual and aural Stable environment for
electronic controls
Power supply
voltage
Voltage toler-
ance
✔Digital volt meter,
measure between
inverter terminals
[L1], [L2], [L3]
200V class:
200 to 240V 50/60 Hz
400V class:
380 to 460V 50/60 Hz
Main
circuit
Ground
Insulation
Adequate
resistance
✔Megger test 500VDC, reading of 5M
ohms or greater, see next
section for test details
Mounting No loose
screws
✔Torque wrench M3: 0.5 – 0.6 Nm
M4: 0.98 – 1.3 Nm
M5: 1.5 – 2.0 Nm
Components Overheating ✔Thermal trip events No trip events
Housing Dirt, dust ✔Visual Vacuum dust and dirt
Terminal block Secure
connections
✔Visual No abnormalities
Smoothing
capacitor
Leaking,
swelling
✔Visual No abnormalities
Relay(s) Chattering ✔Aural Single click when
switching ON or OFF
Resistors Cracks or
discoloring
✔Visual Use Ohm meter to check
braking resistors
Cooling fan Noise ✔Power down,
manually rotate
Rotation must be smooth
Dust ✔Visual Vacuum to clean
Control
circuit
Overall No odor,
discoloring,
corrosion
✔Visual No abnormalities
Capacitor No leaks or
deformation
✔Visual Undistorted appearance
Display LEDs Legibility ✔Visual All LED segments work
SJ300 Inverter
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–11
Megger Test The megger is a piece of test equipment that uses a high voltage to determine if an insulation
degradation has occurred. For inverters, it is important that the power terminals be isolated
from the Earth GND terminal via the proper amount of insulation.
The circuit diagram below shows the inverter wiring for performing the megger test. Just follow
the steps to perform the test:
1. Remove power from the inverter and wait at least 5 minutes before proceeding.
2. Open the front housing panel to access the power wiring.
3. Remove all wires to terminals [R, S, T, PD, P, N, RB, U, V, and W]. Most importantly, the
input power and motor wires will be disconnected from the inverter.
4. Remove the jumper at connector J61. It is located on the main circuit board beside the
power terminals.
5. Use a bare wire and short terminals [R, S, T, PD, P, N, RB, U, V, and W] together as shown
in the diagram.
6. Connect the megger to the inverter Earth GND and to the shorted power terminals as shown.
Then perform the megger test at 500 VDC and verify 5MΩ or greater resistance.
7. After completing the test, disconnect the megger from the inverter.
8. Reconnect the jumper at connector J61 as before.
9. Reconnect the original wires to terminals [R, S, T, PD, P, N, RB, U, V, and W].
CAUTION: Do not connect the megger to any control circuit terminals such as intelligent I/O,
analog terminals, etc. Doing so could cause damage to the inverter.
CAUTION: Never test the withstand voltage (HIPOT) on the inverter. The inverter has a surge
protector between the main circuit terminals above and the chassis ground.
U
V
W
Motor
R
S
T
Disconnect
power source
P
PD
RB
N
J61
SJ300 Disconnect
motor wires
Earth
GND
Megger, 500VDC
Add test
jumper wire
Disconnect jumper at
J61 before performing
the megger test
L1
L2
L3
Maintenance and Inspection
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–12
Spare parts We recommend that you stock spare parts to reduce down time, including parts listed below:
Capacitor
Life Curve
The DC bus inside the inverter uses a large capacitor as shown in the diagram below. The
capacitor handles high voltage and current as it smooths the power for use by the inverter. So,
any degradation of the capacitor will affect the performance of the inverter. The capacitor bank
in SJ300 series inverters is replaceable. This section will show you how to replace it in the field.
Capacitor life is reduced in higher ambient temperatures, as the graph below demonstrates. Be
sure to keep the ambient temperature at acceptable levels, and perform maintenance inspections
on the fan, heat sink, and other components. If the inverter is installed on a cabinet, the ambient
temperature is the temperature inside the cabinet.
Part description Symbol
Quantity
Notes
Used Spare
Cooling fan FAN 1, 2, 3... (depends
on model)
1 or 2 Fan unit at top of housing
in all models
Auxiliary cooling fan FAN 0 or 1... (depends
on model)
0 or 1 –150Lxx, –185Lxx, and
–220Lxx models
Capacitor bank CB 1 1 All models
Power
Input
Inverter
L1/R Motor
L2/S
L3/T
Rectifier
Variable-frequency Drive
Internal DC Bus
+
+
–
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Converter
Ambient
temperature, °C
Ye a r s
Capacitor Life Curve
12 hrs / day operation
12 345678 910
0
20
40
30
50
SJ300 Inverter
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–13
Capacitor
Replacement
The capacitor bank consists of an assembly that slides out of the SJ300 unit. This means that no
soldering is required!
1. First, make sure that all power is removed
from the unit, and that you have waited 5
minutes before accessing the wiring area. Then
you’ll need to remove the metal wire entry
plate located at the bottom of the unit. This
may require you to disconnect all wires to the
power terminals. Then, just loosen the screws
as shown, and slide the wire entry plate
outward on its guides to remove.
WARNING: The screws that retain the capacitor bank assembly are part of the electrical
circuit of the high-voltage internal DC bus. Be sure that all power has been disconnected from
the inverter, and that you have waited at least 5 minutes before accessing the terminals or
screws. Be sure the charge lamp is extinguished. Otherwise, there is the danger of electrocution
to personnel.
2. The capacitor bank assembly is locked into
the inverter via two screws that also make the
electrical connection to the internal DC bus.
These two screws are accessible just below
the power terminals as shown to the right.
3. Grasp the capacitor bank assembly and gently
slide it out of the unit as shown to the right. DO
NOT try to force the removal; it will slide out
easily if all the screws in the steps above have
been removed.
4. Then slide in the new unit and replace all the
screws removed in steps 1) and 2).
CAUTION: Do not operate the inverter unless
you have replaced the two screws that connect
the capacitor bank assembly to the internal DC
bus. Otherwise, damage to the inverter may
occur.
Retention screws for wire entry plate
Retention screws for capacitor bank
Pull capacitor bank assembly outward
from SJ300 unit to remove
Maintenance and Inspection
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–14
Fan Assembly
Replacement
The SJ300 Series inverters have field-replaceable fan units. They include an internal connector
for easy removal and replacement. You will need to remove the front panel covers to remove
the fan assembly. First, be sure to remove power from the unit and wait at least 5 minutes
before accessing the wiring area.
1. Remove the digital operator from the front
panel. Then remove the bottom front panel
to expose the wiring area as shown. This
will also expose the retention screws for the
top front panel. Remove these screws,
which will allow the front panel to hinge
upward and unfasten from the unit.
2. After removing all front panel pieces, locate
the thumb latches in the top of the inverter
housing. Grasp and push the releases inward as
shown to the right, and gently pull upward to
remove the fan assembly.
CAUTION: Remove the fan assembly carefully,
since it is attached to the unit via connecting
wires.
3. After unfastening the fan assembly, turn it over
to expose the connecting wires. Then locate the
PWB connector as shown. Disconnect the
wiring.
4. Connect the new fan assembly wiring. The
polarized plug will ensure a proper connection.
5. Snap the replacement fan into place.
6. Replace all front panel pieces and retention
screws.
Digital operator keypad removal
Upper panel
retention screws
PWB connector for fan assembly wiring
SJ300 Inverter
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–15
General Inverter
Electrical
Measurements
The following table specifies how to measure key system electrical parameters. The diagrams
on the next page show inverter-motor systems and the location of measurement points for these
parameters.
Note 1: Use a meter indicating a fundamental wave effective value for voltage, and meters
indicating total effective values for current and power.
Note 2: The inverter output has a distorted waveform, and harmonic frequencies may cause
erroneous readings. However, the measuring instruments and methods listed above
provide reasonably accurate results.
Note 3: A general-purpose digital volt meter (DVM) is not usually suitable to measure a
distorted waveform (not pure sinusoid).
Parameter Circuit location
of measurement
Measuring
instrument Notes Reference Value
Supply voltage
E1
ER – across L1 and L2
ES – across L2 and L3
ET – across L3 and L1
Moving-coil type
voltmeter or recti-
fier type voltmeter
Fundamental
wave effective
value
Commercial supply
voltage (200V class)
200-240V, 50/60 Hz
400V class 380-
460V, 50/60 Hz
Supply current
I1
Ir – L1, Is – L2, It – L3 Moving-coil type
ammeter
Total effective
value
—
Supply power W1W11 – across L1 and L2
W12 – across L2 and L3
Electronic type
wattmeter
Total effective
value
—
Supply power
factor Pf1
—
Output voltage
E0
EU – across U and V
EV – across V and W
EW – across W and U
Rectifier type
voltmeter
Total effective
value
—
Output current IoIU – U
IV – V
IW – W
Moving-coil type
ammeter
Total effective
value
—
Output power WoW01 – across U and V
W02 – across V and W
Electronic type
wattmeter
Total effective
value
—
Output power
factor Pfo
Calculate the output power factor from the output voltage E, output
current I, and output power W.
—
Pf1
W1
3E
1
×I1
×
------------------------------100%×=
Pf0
W0
3E
0
×I0
×
------------------------------100%×=
Maintenance and Inspection
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–16
The figure below shows measurement locations for voltage, current, and power measurements
listed in the table on the previous page. The voltage to be measured is the fundamental wave
effective voltage. The power to be measured is the total effective power.
Inverter Output
Voltage Measure-
ment Techniques
Taking voltage measurements around drives equipment requires the right equipment and a safe
approach. You are working with high voltages and high-frequency switching waveforms that
are not pure sinusoids. Digital voltmeters will not usually produce reliable readings for these
waveforms. And, it is usually risky to connect high voltage signals to oscilloscopes. The
inverter output semiconductors have some leakage, and no-load measurements produce
misleading results. So, we highly recommend using the following circuits to measure voltage
for performing the equipment inspections.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals when working with
the inverters and taking measurements. Be sure to place the measurement circuitry above in an
insulated housing before using them.
E1
I1I1
I1
I1
EU-V
EU-V
EU-V
W01
W02
W01
W02
E1
E1
I2
I3
Three-phase measurement diagram
L1
L2
L3
Inverter
Motor
T1
T2
T3
R
S
T
U
V
W
V/T2
W/T3
U/T1
L2/S
L3/T
L1/R
V/T2
W/T3
U/T1
L2/S
L3/T
L1/R
V class Diode bridge Voltmeter
200V class 600V 0.01A min. 300V range
400V class 1000V 0.1 A min. 600V range
220kΩ
2W
+–
220kΩ
2W
+–
Voltage measurement with load
Inverter
Voltage measurement without load
Inverter
V class Diode bridge Voltmeter
200V class 600V 0.01A min. 300V range
400V class 1000V 0.1 A min. 600V range
5kΩ
30W
SJ300 Inverter
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–17
IGBT Test Method The following procedure will check the inverter transistors (IGBTs) and diodes:
1. Disconnect input power to terminals [R, S, and T] and motor terminals [U, V, and W].
2. Disconnect any wires from terminals [P] and [RB] for regenerative braking.
3. Use a Digital Volt Meter (DVM) and set it for 1 ohm resistance range. You can check the
status of the charging state of terminals [R, S, T, U, V, W, RB, P, and N] of the inverter and
the probe of the DVM by measuring the charging state.
Almost infinite ohms = “non-conducting,” and 0 to 10 ohms = “conducting.”
NOTE: The resistance values for the diodes or the transistors will not be exactly the same, but
they will be close. If you find a significance difference, a problem may exist.
NOTE: Before measuring the voltage between [P] and [N] with the DC current range, confirm
that the smoothing capacitor is discharged fully, then execute the tests.
Circuit Type
DVM Probe
Measured Value
+ –
Converter
D1 R PD Non-conducting
PD R Conducting
D2 S PD Non-conducting
PD S Conducting
D3 T PD Non-conducting
PD T Conducting
D4 R N Conducting
N R Non-conducting
D5 S N Conducting
N S Non-conducting
D6 T N Conducting
N T Non-conducting
Inverter
TR1 U P Non-conducting
P U Conducting
TR2 V P Non-conducting
P V Conducting
TR3 W P Non-conducting
P W Conducting
TR4 U N Conducting
N U Non-conducting
TR5 V N Conduct
N V Non-conducting
TR6 W N Conducting
N W Non-conducting
Dynamic
Braking
(0.4kW–11kW)
TR7 RB P Non-conducting
P RB Conducting
RB N Non-conducting
N RB Non-conducting
R
S
T
D1 D2 D3
D4 D5 D6
U
V
W
TR1 TR2 TR3
TR4 TR5 TR6
PD PRB
C
TR7
+
Converter Inverter
N
Warranty
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
6–18
Warranty
Warranty Terms
The warranty period under normal installation and handling conditions shall be two (2)
years from the date of manufacture (“DATE” on product nameplate), or one (1) year
from the date of installation, whichever occurs first. The warranty shall cover the repair
or replacement, at Hitachi's sole discretion, of ONLY the inverter that was installed.
1. Service in the following cases, even within the warranty period, shall be charged to
the purchaser:
a. Malfunction or damage caused by mis-operation or modification or improper
repair
b. Malfunction or damage caused by a drop after purchase and transportation
c. Malfunction or damage caused by fire, earthquake, flood, lightning, abnormal
input voltage, contamination, or other natural disasters
2. When service is required for the product at your work site, all expenses associated
with field repair shall be charged to the purchaser.
3. Always keep this manual handy; please do not lose it. Please contact your Hitachi
distributor to purchase replacement or additional manuals.
Glossary and
Bibliography
In This Appendix.... page
— Glossary............................................................................................ 2
— Bibliography ...................................................................................... 6
A
Glossary
Appendix A
A–2
Glossary
Ambient
Temperature
The air temperature in the chamber containing a powered electronic unit. A unit’s heat sinks
rely on a lower ambient temperature in order to dissipate heat away from sensitive electronics.
Arrival Frequency The arrival frequency refers to the set output frequency of the inverter for the constant speed
setting. The arrival frequency feature turns ON an output when the inverter reaches the set
constant speed. The inverter has various arrival frequencies and pulsed or latched logic options.
Auto-tuning The ability of a controller to execute a procedure that interacts with a load to determine the
proper coefficients to use in the control algorithm. Auto-tuning is a common feature of process
controllers with PID loops. Hitachi inverters feature auto-tuning to determine motor parameters
for optimal commutation. Auto-tuning is available as a special command from a digital
operator panel. See also digital operator panel.
Base Frequency The power input frequency for which an AC induction motor is designed to operate. Most
motors will specify a 50 to 60 Hz value. The Hitachi inverters have a programmable base
frequency, so you must ensure that parameter matches the attached motor. The term base
frequency helps differentiate it from the carrier frequency. See also carrier frequency and
frequency setting.
Braking Resistor An energy-absorbing resistor that dissipates energy from a decelerating load. Load inertia
causes the motor to act as a generator during deceleration. See also four-quadrant operation
and dynamic braking.
Break-away
Torque
The torque a motor must produce to overcome the static friction of a load in order to start the
load moving.
Carrier
Frequency
The frequency of the constant, periodic, switching waveform that the inverter modulates to
generate the AC output to the motor. See also PWM.
CE A regulatory agency for governing the performance of electronic products in Europe. Drive
installations designed to have CE approval must have particular filter(s) installed in the applica-
tion.
Choke An inductor that is tuned to react at radio frequencies is called a “choke,” since it attenuates
(chokes) frequencies above a particular threshold. Tuning is often accomplished by using a
movable magnetic core. In variable-frequency drive systems, a choke positioned around high-
current wiring can help attenuate harmful harmonics and protect equipment. See also harmon-
ics.
DC Braking The inverter DC braking feature stops the AC commutation to the motor, and sends a DC
current through the motor windings in order to stop the motor. Also called “DC injection
braking,” it has little effect at high speed, and is used as the motor is nearing a stop.
DC Link The portion of the variable frequency drive between the input rectifiers and the output stages. It
delivers smoothed DC power to the control and output stages of the drive.
Deadband In a control system, the range of input change for which there is no perceptible change in the
output. In PID loops, the error term may have a deadband associated with it. Deadband may or
may not be desirable; it depends on the needs of the application.
Digital Operator
Panel
For Hitachi inverters, “digital operator panel” (DOP) refers first to the operator keypad on the
front panel of the inverter. It also includes hand-held remote keypads, which connect to the
inverter via a cable. Finally, the DOP Professional is a PC-based software simulation of the
keypad devices.
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix A
A–3
Diode A semiconductor device that has a voltage-current characteristic that allows current to flow
only in one direction, with negligible leakage current in the reverse direction. See also rectifier.
Duty Cycle 1. The percent of time a square wave of fixed frequency is ON (high) versus OFF (low). 2. The
ratio of operating time of a motor, braking resistor, etc. to its resting time. This parameter
usually is specified in association with the allowable thermal rise for the device.
Dynamic Braking The inverter dynamic braking feature shunts the motor-generated EMF energy into a special
braking resistor. The added dissipation (braking torque) is effective at higher speeds, having a
reduced effect as the motor nears a stop.
Error In process control, the error is the difference between the desired value or setpoint (SP) and the
actual value of a the process variable (PV). See also process variable and PID Loop.
EMI Electromagnetic Interference - In motor/drive systems, the switching of high currents and
voltages creates the possibility of generating radiated electrical noise that may interfere with
the operation of nearby sensitive electrical instruments or devices. Certain aspects of an instal-
lation, such as long motor lead wire lengths, tend to increase the chance of EMI. Hitachi
provides accessory filter components you can install to decrease the level of EMI.
Four-quadrant
operation
Referring to a graph of torque versus speed, a four-quadrant drive can turn the motor either
forward or reverse, as well as decelerate in either direction (see also reverse torque). A load that
has a relatively high inertia and must move in both directions and change directions rapidly
requires four-quadrant capability from its drive.
Free-run Stop A method of stopping a motor, caused when the inverter simply turns OFF its motor output
connections. This may allow the motor and load to coast to a stop, or a mechanical brake may
intervene and shorten the deceleration time.
Frequency
Setting
While frequency has a broad meaning in electronics, it typically refers to motor speed for
variable-frequency drives (inverters). This is because the output frequency of the inverter is
variable, and is proportional to the attained motor speed. For example, a motor with a base
frequency of 60 Hz can be speed controlled with an inverter output varying form 0 to 60 Hz.
See also base frequency, carrier frequency, and slip.
Harmonics A harmonic is a whole number multiple of a base of fundamental frequency. The square waves
used in inverters produce high-frequency harmonics, even though the main goal is to produce
lower-frequency sine waves. These harmonics can be harmful to electronics (including motor
windings) and cause radiated energy that interferes with nearby electronic devices. Chokes, line
reactors, and filters are sometimes used to suppress the transmission of harmonics in an electri-
cal system. See also choke.
Horsepower A unit of physical measure to quantify the amount of work done per unit of time. You can
directly convert between horsepower and Watts as measurements of power.
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) - A semiconductor transistor capable of conduct-
ing very large currents when in saturation and capable of withstanding very high voltages when
it is OFF. This high-power bipolar transistor is the type used in Hitachi inverters.
Inertia The natural resistance of an object to being accelerated or decelerated by an external force. See
also momentum.
Intelligent
Terminal
A configurable input or output logic function on the Hitachi inverters. Each terminal may be
assigned one of several functions.
Inverter A device that electronically changes DC to AC current through a alternating process of switch-
ing the input to the output, inverted and non-inverted. A variable speed drive such as the Hitachi
SJ300 is also called an inverter, since it contains three inverter circuits to generate 3-phase
output to the motor.
Glossary
Appendix A
A–4
Isolation
Transformer
A transformer with 1:1 voltage ratio that provides electrical isolation between its primary and
secondary windings. These are typically used on the power input side of the device to be
protected. An isolation transformer can protect equipment from a ground fault or other
malfunction of nearby equipment, as well as attenuate harmful harmonics and transients on the
input power.
Jogging
Operation
Usually done manually, a jog command from an operator’s panel requests the motor/drive
system to run indefinitely in a particular direction, until the machine operator ends the jog
operation.
Jump Frequency A jump frequency is a point on the inverter output frequency range that you want the inverter to
skip around. This feature may be used to avoid a resonant frequency, and you can program up
to three jump frequencies in the inverter.
Line Reactor A three-phase inductor generally installed in the AC input circuit of an inverter to minimize
harmonics and to limit short-circuit current.
Momentum The physical property of a body in motion that causes it to continue to remain in motion. In the
case of motors, the rotor and attached load are rotating and possess angular momentum.
Multi-speed
Operation
The ability of a motor drive to store preset discrete speed levels for the motor, and control
motor speed according to the currently selected speed preset. The Hitachi inverters have 16
preset speeds.
Motor Load In motor terminology, motor load consists of the inertia of the physical mass that is moved by
the motor and the related friction from guiding mechanisms. See also inertia.
NEC The National Electric Code is a regulatory document that governs electrical power and device
wiring and installation in the United States.
NEMA The National Electric Manufacturer’s Association. NEMA Codes are a published series of
device ratings standards. Industry uses these to evaluate or compare the performance of devices
made by various manufacturers to a known standard.
Open-collector
Outputs
A common logic-type discrete output that uses an NPN transistor that acts as a switch to a
power supply common, usually ground. The transistor’s collector is open for external connec-
tion (not connected internally). Thus, the output sinks external load current to ground.
Orientation When using the expansion card SJ-FB with encoder feedback, the orientation feature is avail-
able. Also called home search in motion terminology, you can specify a search direction and a
stop position. Typically the orientation procedure is necessary after each inverter powerup.
Power Factor A ratio that expresses a phase difference (timing offset) between current and voltage supplied
by a power source to a load. A perfect power factor = 1.0 (no phase offset). Power factors less
than one cause some energy loss in power transmission wiring (source to load).
PID Loop Proportional-Integral-Derivative – a mathematical model used for process control. A process
controller maintains a process variable (PV) at a setpoint (SP) by using its PID algorithm to
compensate for dynamic conditions and varies its output to drive the PV toward the desired
value. See also error.
Process Variable A physical property of a process that is of interest because it affects the quality of the primary
task accomplished by the process. For an industrial oven, temperature is the process variable.
See also PID Loop and error.
PWM Pulse-width modulation: A type of AC adjustable frequency drive that accomplishes frequency
and voltage control at the output section (inverter) of the drive. The drive output voltage
waveform is at a constant amplitude, and by “chopping” the waveform (pulse-width-modulat-
ing), the average voltage is controlled. The chopping frequency is sometimes called the carrier
frequency.
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix A
A–5
Reactance The impedance of inductors and capacitors has two components. The resistive part is constant,
while the reactive part changes with applied frequency. These devices have a complex imped-
ance (complex number), where the resistance is the real part and the reactance is the imaginary
part.
Rectifier An electronic device made of one or more diodes that converts AC power into DC power.
Rectifiers are usually used in combination with capacitors to filter (smooth) the rectified
waveform to closely approximate a pure DC voltage source.
Regenerative
Braking
A particular method of generating reverse torque to a motor, an inverter will switch internally to
allow the motor to become a generator and will either store the energy internally, deliver the
braking energy back to the main power input, or dissipate it with a resistor.
Regulation The quality of control applied to maintain a parameter of interest at a desired value. Usually
expressed as a percent (+/-) from the nominal, motor regulation usually refers to its shaft speed.
Reverse Torque The torque applied in the direction opposite to motor shaft rotation. As such, reverse torque is a
decelerating force on the motor and its external load.
Rotor The windings of a motor that rotate, being physically coupled to the motor shaft. See also
stator.
Saturation
Voltag e
For a transistor semiconductor device, it is in saturation when an increase in input current no
longer results in an increase in the output current. The saturation voltage is the voltage drop
across the device. The ideal saturation voltage is zero.
Sensorless
Vector Control
A technique used in variable-frequency drives to rotate the force vector in the motor without the
use of a shaft position sensor (angular). Benefits include an increase in torque at the lowest
speed and the cost savings from the lack of a shaft position sensor.
Setpoint (SP) The setpoint is the desired value of a process variable of interest. See also Process Variable
(PV) and PID Loop.
Single-phase
Power
An AC power source consisting of Hot and Neutral wires. An Earth Ground connection usually
accompanies them. In theory, the voltage potential on Neutral stays at or near Earth Ground,
while Hot varies sinusoidally above and below Neutral. This power source is named Single
Phase to differentiate it from three-phase power sources. Some Hitachi inverters can accept
single phase input power, but they all output three-phase power to the motor. See also three-
phase.
Slip The difference between the theoretical (synchronous) speed of a motor at no load (determined
by its inverter output waveforms) and the actual speed. Some slip is essential in order to
develop torque to the load, but too much will cause excessive heat in the motor windings and/or
cause the motor to stall.
Squirrel Cage A “nick-name” for the appearance of the rotor frame assembly for an AC induction motor.
Stator The windings in a motor that are stationary and coupled to the power input of the motor. See
also rotor.
Start Frequency The output frequency that the inverter first produces as the frequency command setting
increases from zero. The start frequency is programmable, and is important to set properly for
the load, etc.
Tachometer 1. A signal generator usually attached to the motor shaft for the purpose of providing feedback
to the speed controlling device of the motor. 2. A speed-monitoring test meter that may
optically sense shaft rotation speed and display it on a readout.
Bibliography
Appendix A
A–6
Thermal Switch An electromechanical safety device that opens to stop current flow when the temperature at the
device reaches a specific temperature threshold. Thermal switches are sometimes installed in
the motor in order to protect the windings from heat damage. The inverter can use thermal
switch signals to trip (shut down) if the motor overheats. See also trip.
Thermistor A type of temperature sensor that changes its resistance according to its temperature. The
sensing range of thermistors and their ruggedness make them ideal for motor overheating
detection. Hitachi inverters have built-in thermistor input circuits, which can detect an
overheated motor and shut OFF (trip) the inverter output.
Three-phase
Power
An AC power source with three Hot connections that have phase offsets of 120 degrees is a 3-
phase power source. Usually, Neutral and Earth Ground wires accompany the three Hot
connections. Loads may be configured in a delta or Y configuration. A Y-connected load such
as an AC induction motor will be a balanced load; the currents in all the Hot connections are the
same. Therefore, the Neutral connection is theoretically zero. This is why inverters that
generate 3-phase power for motors do not generally have a Neutral connection to the motor.
However, the Earth Ground connection is important for safety reasons, and is provided.
Torque A measure of rotational force. The units of measurement are the product of the distance (radius
from shaft center axis) and force (weight) applied at that distance. Units are usually given as
pound-feet, ounce-inches, or Newton-meters.
Transistor A solid state, three-terminal device that provides amplification of signals and can be used for
switching and control. While transistors have a linear operating range, inverters use them as
high-powered switches. Recent developments in power semiconductors have produced transis-
tors capable of handling high voltages and currents, all with high reliability. The saturation
voltage has been decreasing, resulting in less heat dissipation. Hitachi inverters use state-of-
the-art semiconductors to provide high performance and reliability in a compact package. See
also IGBT and saturation voltage.
Trip An event that causes the inverter to stop operation is called a “trip” event (as in tripping a
circuit breaker). The inverter keeps a history log of trip events. They also require an action to
clear.
Watt Loss A measure of the internal power loss of a component, the difference between the power it
consumes and what its output delivers. An inverter’s watt loss is the input power minus the
power delivered to the motor. The watt loss is typically highest when an inverter is delivering
its maximum output. Therefore, watt loss is usually specified for a particular output level.
Inverter watt loss specifications are important when designing enclosures.
Bibliography
Title Author and Publisher
Variable Speed Drive Fundamentals, 2nd Ed. Phipps, Clarence A.
The Fairmont Press, Inc. / Prentice-Hall, Inc. 1997
ISBN 0-13-636390-3
Electronic Variable Speed Drives Brumbach, Michael E.
Delmar Publishers 1997
ISBN 0-8273-6937-9
Hitachi Inverter Technical Guide Book Published by Hitachi, Ltd. Japan 1995
Publication SIG-E002
Serial
Communications
In This Appendix.... page
— Introduction ....................................................................................... 2
— Communications Protocol................................................................. 5
— Communications Reference Information ........................................ 17
B
Introduction
Appendix B
B–2
Introduction
SJ300 inverters have a built-in RS485 serial communications interface. This serial communica-
tions function provides a way of controlling from 1 to 32 inverters on a common serial network.
In a typical application, a host computer or controller is the master and each of the inverter(s) is
a slave, as shown in the figure below.
The specifications for SJ300 Series RS485 serial communications are in the following table:
Item Specifications User-selectable
Transmission speed 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps ✔
Communication modes Half duplex (one device transmits at a time) ✘
Synchronization Direct current transmission ✘
Character code ASCII codes ✘
LSB placement Transmits LSB first ✘
Electrical interface RS485 differential transceiver ✘
Data bits 7 or 8 bits ✔
Parity None / even / odd ✔
Stop bits 1 or 2 bits ✔
Start convention One-way start from host device command ✘
Wait time for response 10 to 1000 ms ✔
Connections Station address numbers from 1 to 32 ✔
Error check Overrun / Fleming block check code / vertical
or horizontal parity
✘
SJ300 SJ300SJ300
RS485 serial network
12 32
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix B
B–3
Serial Connection
Diagrams
The serial connector is to the left of the control logic connector as shown below:
Each device requires just two connections for data transmission and reception. Additionally, the
device at each physical end of the wiring requires a termination resistor. The SJ300 has built-in
termination resistors that become part of the circuit when you add a jumper as shown.
TIP: Each slave device on the serial network must have a unique node address, set by parame-
ter C072. If this is a new application, we recommend connecting one new device at a time and
checking the communications after each addition.
SP SN RP SN
Serial
Communications
Connector
Send/receive (+) Positive
Send/receive (–) Negative
Termination resistor (+)
Termination resistor (–)
SP SN RP SN
SJ300 SJ300
SP SN RP SN SP SN RP SN
SJ300
Termination jumper
Send/receive (+)
Send/receive (–)
Introduction
Appendix B
B–4
Serial Network
Parameter
Settings
Several parameter settings are necessary to configure serial communications, listed below.
For inverters on the same network, some settings must match from inverter to inverter. These
include:
• Baud rate
• Data bits
•Parity
• Stop bits
However, the node address on each inverter must be unique, used only once on the network.
Function
Code Item Val ue Description
C070 Data command source
02 Digital operator
03 RS485 connector
04 Expansion card #1
05 Expansion card #2
C071 Baud rate
02 Loop-back test
03 2400 bps
04 4800 bps
05 9600 bps
06 19200 bps
C072 Node address
1 to 32,
FF
1 to 32 – Node or station address (unique
to each inverter or device)
FF – Automatic broadcast (to all nodes on
transmit, allowed only on certain
commands (refer to each command
description in this appendix)
C073 Data bits 07 7 bits
08 8 bits
C074 Parity
00 none
01 Even parity
02 Odd parity
C075 Stop bits 01 1 bit
02 2 bits
C078 Wait time 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 ms time that the inverter waits
to respond to network master
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix B
B–5
Communications Protocol
Introduction to
Command List
The network master sends a frame to initiate
communications with a slave, as shown in the
figure to the right. After the set waiting time
(per parameter C078, the inverter responds.
The following table lists the commands, single-character codes sent to a particular device on
the network.
NOTE: Use of command 08 – set inverter parameters to default values first requires setting the
initialization mode parameter B084 to 01 (initializes parameters only) or 02 (initializes param-
eters and clears the trip history).
Command
Code Description User-selectable
00 Forward / Reverse / Stop command ✔
01 Setting of frequency in standard profile ✔
02 Setting of intelligent terminal state ✔
03 Read all monitor data (block read) —
04 Read inverter status —
05 Read trip history —
06 Read a single parameter value —
07 Write a single parameter value ✔
08 Set inverter parameters to default values ✔
09 Verifies that the requested setting can be
written to EEPROM.
—
0A Writes a parameter value to EEPROM ✔
0B Requests the recalculation of internal constant ✔
Host
(master) wait
time
frame
Inverter
(slave)
frame
Communications Protocol
Appendix B
B–6
Command – 00 The 00 command controls the Forward, Reverse and Stop mode of the inverter. You must set
parameter A002=03 in order for serial communications control of the inverter to apply.
The frame format of command 00 follows the
timing diagram and specification table.
The example below shows a transmission to the inverter at address Node 1 to rotate the motor
in the forward direction.
Command – 01 The 01 command sets the output frequency for the standard profile. You must set parameter
A002=03 in order for serial communications control of the inverter to apply.
The frame format of command 01 follows the
timing diagram and specification table.
The example below shows a transmission to the inverter at address Node 1 to set the output
frequency for 5 Hz. We use a value of 500 in ASCII to represent 5.00 Hz.
Element Description Size Value
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all
nodes)
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 00
Data Transmission data 1 byte 00 = Stop command
01 = Forward command
02 = Reverse command
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
STX Node Command Data BCC [CR]
Frame format
(STX) | 01 | 00 | 1 | (BCC) | [CR] to ASCII 02 | 30 31 | 30 30 | 31 | 33 30 | 0D
Element Description Size Value
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all
nodes)
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 01
Data Transmission data 6 bytes ASCII code for ten times the
frequency (accommodates two
decimal places)
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
STX Node Command Data BCC [CR]
Frame format
(STX) | 01 | 01 | 000500 | (BCC) | [CR]
to ASCII 02 | 30 31 | 30 31 | 30 30 30 35 30 30 | 30 35 | 0D
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix B
B–7
Command – 02 The 02 command assigns the function of the intelligent input terminals.
The frame format of command 02 follows the
timing diagram and specification table.
The 16-byte data string is specified in the following table:
Element Description Size Value
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 02
Data Transmission data 16 bytes (see table below)
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
STX Node Command Data BCC [CR]
Frame format
Data (Hex) Description Data (Hex) Description
0000000000000001 [FW] Forward command 0000000001000000 [PIDC] PID integrator reset
0000000000000002 [RV] Reverse command 0000000002000000 —
0000000000000004 [CF1] Multi-speed 1 0000000004000000 [CAS] control gain switching function
0000000000000008 [CF2] Multi-speed 2 0000000008000000 [UP] remote control increment speed
0000000000000010 [CF3] Multi-speed 3 0000000010000000 [DWN] remote control decrement
speed
0000000000000020 [CF4] Multi-speed 4 0000000020000000 [UDC] remote control clear up/down
0000000000000040 [JG] Jog operation 0000000040000000 —
0000000000000080 [DB] Dynamic braking 0000000080000000 [OPE] Force from operator terminal
0000000000000100 [SET] set 2nd motor 0000000100000000 [SF1] Multi-speed bit-level
0000000000000200 [2CH] 2-stage adjustable speed 0000000200000000 [SF2] Multi-speed bit-level
0000000000000400 — 0000000400000000 [SF3] Multi-speed bit-level
0000000000000800 [FRS] Free-run stop 0000000800000000 [SF4] Multi-speed bit-level
0000000000001000 [EXP] External trip 0000001000000000 [SF5] Multi-speed bit-level
0000000000002000 [USP] Unattended start protection 0000002000000000 [SF6] Multi-speed bit-level
0000000000004000 [CS] Commercial power change 0000004000000000 [SF7] Multi-speed bit-level
0000000000008000 [SFT] Software lock 0000008000000000 [OLR] Overload restriction setting
0000000000010000 [AT] analog input voltage/current 0000010000000000 [TL] Torque limit
0000000000020000 [SET3] Set 3rd motor 0000020000000000 [TRQ1] Torque limit select 1
0000000000040000 [RS] Reset 0000040000000000 [TRQ2] Torque limit select 2
0000000000080000 — 0000080000000000 [PPI P/PI] inverter mode select
0000000000100000 [STA] 3-wire Start 0000100000000000 [BOK] Brake confirmation
0000000000200000 [ST]P 3-wire Hold 0000200000000000 [ORT] Orientation (home) command
0000000000400000 [F/R] 3-wire FWD/REV 0000400000000000 [LAC] Linear Accel/decel Cancel
0000000000800000 [PID] PID enable 0000800000000000 [PCLR] Position error clear
— — 0001000000000000 [STAT] Pulse train input enable
Communications Protocol
Appendix B
B–8
The arrangement of the terminal assignment data permits you to assign all inputs in a single
command. The example below shows a transmission to the inverter at address Node 1 to set the
Forward command, Multi-speed 1 and Multi-speed 2.
Command – 03 The 03 command reads the monitor data as a single block.
The frame format of command 03 follows the
diagram and specification table. The transmit
frame has no data field.
The receive frame has a 104-byte data field,
containing values for 13 items.
(STX) | 01 | 02 | 0x000000000000000D | (BCC) | (CR) to ASCII
02 | 30 31 | 30 31 | 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 68 | 30 35 | 0D
0x0000000000000001
+ 0x0000000000000004
+ 0x0000000000000008
= 0x000000000000000D
Sum the three data strings:
Element Description Size Value
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 03
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
Element Description Size Value
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
Data Transmission data 104
bytes
(see next table)
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
STX Node Command BCC [CR]
Transmit frame format
STX Node Data BCC [CR]
Receive frame format
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix B
B–9
The data in the receive frame contains 8-byte values for 13 items, listed in the table below:
The eight bytes for intelligent input or intelligent output data have a bit set in the data field for
each I/O point that is ON, according to the following table:
No. Monitor Item Units Multiplier
1 Output frequency Hz 100
2 Output current A 10
3 Direction of rotation — —
4 PID feedback monitor % 100
5 Intelligent input monitor — —
6 Intelligent output monitor — —
7 Frequency converting monitor — 100
8 Output torque monitor % 1
9 Output voltage monitor V 10
10 Electric power monitor kW 10
11 Reserved — —
12 Run Mode time monitor hours 1
13 Power ON time monitor hours 1
Terminal Monitor Item Data
[FW] Forward input 00000001
[1] Input 1 00000002
[2] Input 2 00000004
[3] Input 3 00000008
[4] Input 4 00000010
[5] Input 5 00000020
[6] Input 6 00000040
[7] Input 7 00000080
[8] Input 8 00000100
[AL] Alarm relay 00000001
[11] Output 1 00000002
[12] Output 2 00000004
[13] Output 3 00000008
[14] Output 4 00000010
[15] Output 5 00000020
Communications Protocol
Appendix B
B–10
Command – 04 The 04 command reads the status of the inverter.
The frame format of command 04 follows the
diagrams and specification tables. The transmit
frame has no data field.
The receive frame has an 8-byte data field,
containing values for three trip items (plus a
reserved field).
Trip data is organized as shown. The
table below lists the codes and their
meanings.
Element Description Size Value
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 04
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
Element Description Size Value
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
Data Transmission data 8 bytes (see next table)
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
Code Status A Definition Status B Definition Status C Definition
00 Initial status On stopping —
01 — On running Stop
02 On Stopping On tripping Deceleration speed
03 On running — Constant speed
04 On free-run stop — Acceleration speed
05 On jog — Forward
06 On dynamic braking — Reverse
07 On retry — Reverse from forward
08 On trip — Forward from reverse
09 On under-voltage — Forward start
10 — — Reverse start
STX Node Command BCC [CR]
Transmit frame format
STX Node Data BCC [CR]
Receive frame format
Data field contents
(reserved)Status CStatus B
Status A
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix B
B–11
Command – 05 The 05 command reads the inverter’s trip history.
The frame format of command 05 follows the
diagrams and specification tables. The transmit
frame has no data field.
The receive frame has a 440-byte data field. This
consists of an 8-byte total accumulated number of
trip events, followed by six 72-byte strings for the
six most recent trip events as shown below.
The nine bytes of data for each trip event history is listed below. The data contains the multi-
plier to adjust the decimal point. Divide the data by that factor to derive the actual value.
Element Description Size Va lue
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 05
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
Element Description Size Va lue
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
Data Transmission data 440
bytes
(see next table)
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
No. Monitor Item Units Multiplier
1Trip factor — —
2 Inverter Status A — —
3 Inverter Status B — —
4 Inverter Status C — —
5 Output frequency Hz 10
6 Accumulated Run Mode time hours 1
7 Output current A 10
8 Output voltage V 10
9 Power ON time hours 1
STX Node Command BCC [CR]
Transmit frame format
STX Node Data BCC [CR]
Receive frame format
Data field contents
Tr i p 3Tr ip 2Tr i p 1
Total count Trip 6Tr ip 5Trip 4
Communications Protocol
Appendix B
B–12
For Command 05, bytes 2, 3, and 4 of
the event history are status codes A, B,
and C, respectively. The tables below
provide status code descriptions.
Code Status A Definition Status C Definition
00 Initial status On reset
01 — On stopping
02 On Stopping On deceleration
03 On running Constant speed
04 On free-run stop On acceleration
05 On jog On 0 Hz running
06 On dynamic braking On running
07 On retry On dynamic braking
08 On trip On overload restriction
09 On under-voltage —
Bit Status B Definition Error
Code
0 Ground fault E14
1 IGBT error, U phase E30
2 Under-voltage error E09
3 Over-voltage protection E07
4Thermal trip E21
5 IGBT error, V phase E30
6 IGBT error, W phase E30
7 Gate array error E23
Data field contents
Status CStatus B
Status A
byte 4byte 3byte 2
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix B
B–13
Command – 06 The 06 command reads a single parameter
value from the inverter, which is specified by
the data field this read command.
The receive frame includes an ACK
(acknowledge) character, followed by an
8-byte data field.
Use the codes in the table below to return parameters for H03 and H203 (motor capacity selec-
tion).
Element Description Size Va lue
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 06
Data Parameter specified to be read 4 bytes (see tables below)
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
Element Description Size Va lue
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
ACK Control code (ACKnowledge) 1 byte ACK (0x06)
Data Parameter value 8 bytes Value of parameter times ten,
returned as ASCII char. code,
except for H003 and H203 (see
table below)
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
Code Data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
U.S. mode (B85=00, 02) 0.2 kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.,2 3.7
EU mode (B85=01) 0.2 kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0
Code Data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
U.S. mode (B85=00, 02) 5.5 kW 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
EU mode (B85=01) 5.5 kW 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
STX Node Command Data BCC [CR]
Transmit frame format
STX Node ACK Data BCC [CR]
Receive frame format
Communications Protocol
Appendix B
B–14
Command – 07 The 07 command sets a parameter value equal to the value specified in the transmission.The
frame format of command 07 follows the diagram and specification table.
Note that the parameter F001, the output frequency, can be set more directly with host
command 01 instead of with this command. Use the codes in the following table for setting
parameters associated with H003 and H203.
Element Description Size Value
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all
nodes)
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 07
Parameter Function code of parameter 4 bytes F002..., A001..., B001..., C001...,
H003..., P001...
Data Transmission data 8 bytes Value of parameter times ten as
ASCII char. code, except for
H003 and H203 (see table below)
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
Code Data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
U.S. mode (B85=00, 02) 0.2 kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.,2 3.7
EU mode (B85=01) 0.2 kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0
Code Data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
U.S. mode (B85=00, 02) 5.5 kW 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
EU mode (B85=01) 5.5 kW7.5111518.5223037455575
STX Node Command Data BCC [CR]
Frame format
Parameter
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix B
B–15
Command – 08 The 08 command initializes the inverter parameters to the factory default values. First, you
must set B84 (use command 07) to specify whether you want to clear the trip history at the
same time. Also, set B85 to specify the country code for the initialization (use command 07).
The frame format of command 08 follows the
diagram and specification table.
Command – 09 The 09 command verifies whether or not it is
possible to set a particular parameter in the
EEPROM. The frame format of command 08
follows the diagram and specification table.
The receive frame includes an ACK
(acknowledge) character, followed by a
2-byte data field with the result.
Element Description Size Va lue
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all
nodes)
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 08
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
STX Node Command BCC [CR]
Frame format
Element Description Size Va lue
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 09
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
Element Description Size Va lue
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
ACK Control code (ACKnowledge) 1 byte ACK (0x06)
Data Parameter value 2 bytes 00 = setting not allowed,
01 = setting is allowed
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
STX Node Command BCC [CR]
Transmit frame format
STX Node ACK Data BCC [CR]
Receive frame format
Communications Protocol
Appendix B
B–16
Command – 0A The 0A command sets a value in the EEPROM.
The frame format of command 0A follows the
diagram and specification table.
Command – 0B The 0B command recalculates the inverter’s internal motor constants. Use this function after
the base frequency or any Hxxx parameters are changed via the serial link commands.
The frame format of command 0B follows the
diagram and specification table.
Element Description Size Value
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32, and FF (broadcast to all
nodes)
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 0A
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
STX Node Command BCC [CR]
Frame format
Element Description Size Value
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
Command Transmission command 2 bytes 0B
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node,
Command, and Data
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
STX Node Command BCC [CR]
Frame format
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix B
B–17
Communications Reference Information
Inverter
Affirmative Reply
The standard affirmative reply from the inverter
uses the ACK character (acknowledge) in the data
field. The frame format of this reply follows the
diagram and specification table.
Inverter
Negative Reply
The standard negative reply from the inverter
uses the NAK character (negative acknowl-
edge) in the data field. The frame format of
this reply follows the diagram and specifica-
tion table.
The error codes for a NAK (negative acknowledge) are:
Element Description Size Va lue
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
ACK Control code (ACKnowledge) 1 byte ACK (0x06)
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node and ACK
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
STX Node ACK BCC [CR]
Frame format
Element Description Size Va lue
STX Control code (STart of TeXt) 1 byte STX (0x02)
Node Node (station) address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32
Data Error code – reason for negative
acknowledge
2 bytes (see error codes in next table)
NAK Control code
(Negative ACKnowledge)
1 byte NAK (0x15)
Error code Code representing error type 1 byte (See next table below)
BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node, Data,
and NAK
[CR] Control code (carriage return) 1 byte [CR] (0x0D)
Error
Code Error Description Error
Code Error Description
01H Parity error 07H Receive buffer overrun error
02H Check sum error 08H Receive time-out error
03H Framing error 11H Abnormal command code error
04H Overrun error 13H Test error code
05H Protocol error 16H Abnormal parameter code/value
error
06H ASCII code error — —
Node BCC [CR]
Frame format
STX NAK Error
code
Communications Reference Information
Appendix B
B–18
Block Check
Code (BCC)
This section shows how the inverter protocol computes defines a BCC—block check code. The
BCC is calculated for each frame transmitted and can be used to verify the integrity of data
transmission. The example below shows command 01 setting the inverter frequency to 5Hz.
The block check code is computed by using the ASCII codes (shown above) and applying
eXclusive OR (XOR) operations. Beginning with the first pair of bytes, the result of their XOR
result is then used in an XOR operation with the third byte, and so on. For this example, the
BCC calculation is shown below.
ASCII Code Table The table below shows only the ASCII codes used for function codes and parameter data.
STX Node Command Data BCC [CR]
Frame format
ASCII Code
(0x 02)
(0x 30 31)
(0x 30 31)
(0x 30 30 30 35 30 30)
(0x 30 35)
(0x 0D)
0 1
0 1
0 0 0 5 0 0
0
Data bytes:
3 0 3 03 53 03 03 03 13 03 1
0 1
3 0
3 1
0 0
3 0
0 0
3 0
0 5
3 5
0 5 BCC
XOR
intermediate results
Character ASCII Code Character ASCII Code Character ASCII Code
STX 0 2 4 3 4 C 4 3
ACK 0 6 5 3 5 D 4 4
CR 0 D 6 3 6 E 4 5
NAK 1 5 7 3 7 F 4 6
03 08 38H4 8
13 19 39P5 0
2 3 2 A 4 1 ——
3 3 3 B 4 2 ——
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix B
B–19
Communication
Test Mode
The communication test mode verifies that the inverter can properly send and receive data via
the RS485 serial port. Follow the steps below to perform the communication test.
1. Remove the serial cable (if present) connected to the TM2 connector block of the control
terminals, as shown below.
NOTE: It is not necessary to connect a loopback jumper. The RS485 port uses a transceiver for
communications, which already allows simultaneous transmitting and receiving.
2. Use the front panel keypad to navigate to parameter C071, Communication Speed
Selection. Change parameter C071=02 and press Store. Value 02 is the Test option. Now the
inverter is ready to conduct the loopback test.
3. Turn the inverter power OFF and then ON again. Observe the keypad display and compare
to the results shown below.
4. Press the Stop/Rest button on the keypad to return the inverter keypad/ display to normal
operation.
5. Change C071 to its original setting (default is C071=04). Otherwise, while C071=02, the
inverter will perform the communications loopback test at each powerup.
SP SN RP SN
Serial
communications
TM2
PASS FAIL
Drive Parameter
Settings Tables
In This Appendix.... page
— Introduction ....................................................................................... 2
— Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry ............................................... 2
C
Introduction
Appendix C
C–2
Introduction
This appendix lists the user-programmable parameters for the SJ300 series inverters and the
default values for European, U.S. and Japanese product types. The right-most column of the
tables is blank so you can record values you have changed from the default. This involves just a
few parameters for most applications.
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry
SJ300 series inverters provide many functions and parameters that can be configured by the
user. We recommend that you record all parameters that have been edited, in order to help in
troubleshooting or recovery from a loss of parameter data.
Main Profile
Parameters
}This information is printed on
the specification label located
on the right side of the inverter.
Inverter model
MFG. No.
SJ300
“F” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
F001 Output frequency setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
F002 Acceleration (1) time setting 30.0 30.0 30.0
F202 Acceleration (1) time setting, 2nd
motor
30.0 30.0 30.0
F302 Acceleration (1) time setting, 3rd
motor
30.0 30.0 30.0
F003 Deceleration (1) time setting 30.0 30.0 30.0
F203 Deceleration (1) time setting, 2nd
motor
30.0 30.0 30.0
F303 Deceleration (1) time setting, 3rd
motor
30.0 30.0 30.0
F004 Keypad Run key routing 00 00 00
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix C
C–3
Standard
Functions
“A” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
A001 Frequency source setting 01 01 02
A002 Run command source setting 01 01 02
A003 Base frequency setting 50. 60. 60.
A203 Base frequency setting, 2nd motor 50. 60. 60.
A303 Base frequency setting, 3rd motor 50. 60. 60.
A004 Maximum frequency setting 50. 60. 60.
A204 Maximum frequency setting, 2nd
motor
50. 60. 60.
A304 Maximum frequency setting, 3rd
motor
50. 60. 60.
A005 [AT] selection 00 00 00
A006 [O2] selection 00 00 00
A011 [O]–[L] input active range start
frequency
0.00 0.00 0.00
A012 [O]–[L] input active range end
frequency
0.00 0.00 0.00
A013 [O]–[L] input active range start
voltage
0. 0. 0.
A014 [O]–[L] input active range end
voltage
100. 100. 100.
A015 [O]–[L] input start frequency enable 01 01 01
A016 External frequency filter time const. 8. 8. 8.
A019 Multi-speed operation selection 00 00 00
A020 Multi-speed frequency setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A220 Multi-speed frequency setting, 2nd
motor
0.00 0.00 0.00
A320 Multi-speed frequency setting, 3rd
motor
0.00 0.00 0.00
A021 Multi-speed 1 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A022 Multi-speed 2 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A023 Multi-speed 3 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A024 Multi-speed 4 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A025 Multi-speed 5 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A026 Multi-speed 6 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A027 Multi-speed 7 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry
Appendix C
C–4
A028 Multi-speed 8 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A029 Multi-speed 9 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A030 Multi-speed 10 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A031 Multi-speed 11 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A032 Multi-speed 12 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A033 Multi-speed 13 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A034 Multi-speed 14 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A035 Multi-speed 15 setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A038 Jog frequency setting 1.00 1.00 1.00
A039 Jog stop mode 00 00 00
A041 Torque boost method selection 00 000 00
A241 Torque boost method selection, 2nd
motor
00 00 00
A042 Manual torque boost value 1.0 1.0 1.0
A242 Manual torque boost value, 2nd
motor
1.0 1.0 1.0
A342 Manual torque boost value, 3rd
motor
1.0 1.0 1.0
A43 Manual torque boost frequency
adjustment
5.0 5.0 5.0
A243 Manual torque boost frequency
adjustment, 2nd motor
5.0 5.0 5.0
A343 Manual torque boost frequency
adjustment, 3rd motor
5.0 5.0 5.0
A44 V/F characteristic curve selection,
1st motor
00 00 00
A244 V/F characteristic curve selection,
2nd motor
00 00 00
A344 V/F characteristic curve selection,
3rd motor
00 00 00
A045 V/f gain setting 100. 100. 100.
A051 DC braking enable 00 00 00
A052 DC braking frequency setting 0.50 0.50 0.50
A053 DC braking wait time 0.0 0.0 0.0
A054 DC braking force during
deceleration
0. 0. 0.
A055 DC braking time for deceleration 0.0 0.0 0.0
“A” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix C
C–5
A056 DC braking / edge or level detection
for [DB] input
01 01 01
A057 DC braking force for starting 0. 0. 0.
A058 DC braking time for starting 0.0 0.0 0.0
A059 DC braking carrier frequency setting 5.0 5.0 5.0
A061 Frequency upper limit setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A0261 Frequency upper limit setting, 2nd
motor
0.00 0.00 0.00
A062 Frequency lower limit setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A0262 Frequency lower limit setting, 2nd
motor
0.00 0.00 0.00
A063,
A065,
A067
Jump (center) frequency setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A064,
A066,
A068
Jump (hysteresis) frequency width
setting
0.50 0.50 0.50
A069 Acceleration stop frequency setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
A070 Acceleration stop time frequency
setting
0.0 0.0 0.0
A071 PID Function Enable 00 00 00
A072 PID proportional gain 1.0 1.0 1.0
A073 PID integral time constant 1.0 1.0 1.0
A074 PID derivative gain 0.0 0.0 0.0
A075 PV scale conversion 1.00 1.00 1.00
A076 PV source setting 00 00 00
A081 AVR function select 00 00 00
A082 AVR voltage select 230/400 230/460 200/400
A085 Operation mode
selection
00 00 00
A086 Energy saving mode tuning 50.0 50.0 50.0
A092 Acceleration (2) time setting 15.0 15.0 15.0
A292 Acceleration (2) time setting, 2nd
motor
15.0 15.0 15.0
A392 Acceleration (2) time setting, 3rd
motor
15.0 15.0 15.0
A093 Deceleration (2) time setting 15.0 15.0 15.0
“A” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry
Appendix C
C–6
A293 Deceleration (2) time setting, 2nd
motor
15.0 15.0 15.0
A393 Deceleration (2) time setting, 3rd
motor
15.0 15.0 15.0
A094 Select method to switch to Acc2/
Dec2 profile
00 00 00
A294 Select method to switch to Acc2/
Dec2, 2nd motor
00 00 00
A095 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition
point
0.0 0.0 0.0
A295 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition
point, 2nd motor
0.0 0.0 0.0
A096 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition
point
0.0 0.0 0.0
A296 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition
point, 2nd motor
0.0 0.0 0.0
A097 Acceleration curve selection 00 00 00
A098 Deceleration curve setting 00 00 00
A101 [OI]–[L] input active range start
frequency
0.00 0.00 0.00
A102 [OI]–[L] input active range end
frequency
0.00 0.00 0.00
A103 [OI]–[L] input active range start
current
20. 20. 20.
A104 [OI]–[L] input active range end
current
100. 100. 100.
A105 [OI]–[L] input start frequency
enable
01 01 01
A111 [O2]–[L] input active range start
frequency
0.00 0.00 0.00
A112 [O2]–[L] input active range end
frequency
0.00 0.00 0.00
A113 [O2]–[L] input active range start
voltage
–100. –100. –100.
A114 [O2]–[L] input active range end
voltage
100. 100. 100.
A131 Acceleration curve constants setting 02 02 02
A132 Deceleration curve constants setting 02 02 02
“A” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix C
C–7
Fine Tuning
Functions
“B” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
B001 Selection of restart mode 00 00 00
B002 Allowable under-voltage power
failure time
1.0 1.0 1.0
B003 Retry wait time before motor restart 1.0 1.0 1.0
B004 Instantaneous power failure / under-
voltage trip alarm enable
00 00 00
B005 Number of restarts on power failure /
under-voltage trip events
00 00 00
B006 Phase loss detection enable 00 00 00
B007 Restart frequency threshold 0.00 0.00 0.00
B012 Electronic thermal setting (calcu-
lated within the inverter from current
output)
Rated current
for each
inverter
Rated current
for each
inverter
Rated current
for each
inverter
B212 Electronic thermal setting (calcu-
lated within the inverter from current
output), 2nd motor
Rated current
for each
inverter
Rated current
for each
inverter
Rated current
for each
inverter
B312 Electronic thermal setting (calcu-
lated within the inverter from current
output), 3rd motor
Rated current
for each
inverter
Rated current
for each
inverter
Rated current
for each
inverter
B013 Electronic thermal characteristic 01 01 00
B213 Electronic thermal characteristic,
2nd motor
01 01 00
B313 Electronic thermal characteristic,
3rd motor
01 01 00
B015 Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency (1)
0. 0. 0.
B016 Free setting, electronic thermal
current (1)
0.0 0.0 0.0
B017 Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency (2)
0. 0. 0.
B018 Free setting, electronic thermal
current (2)
0.0 0.0 0.0
B019 Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency (3)
0. 0. 0.
B020 Free setting, electronic thermal
current (3)
0.0 0.0 0.0
B021 Overload restriction operation mode 01 01 01
B022 Overload restriction setting Rated current x
1.50
Rated current x
1.50
Rated current x
1.50
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry
Appendix C
C–8
B023 Deceleration rate at overload restric-
tion
1.0 1.0 1.0
B024 Overload restriction operation mode
(2)
01 01 01
B025 Overload restriction setting (2) Rated current x
1.50
Rated current x
1.50
Rated current x
1.50
B026 Deceleration rate at overload
restriction (2)
1.00 1.00 1.00
B031 Software lock mode selection 01 01 01
B034 Run/power-on warning time 0. 0. 0.
B035 Rotational direction restriction 00 00 00
B036 Reduced voltage start selection 06 06 06
B037 Function code display restriction 00 00 00
B040 Torque limit selection 00 00 00
B041 Torque limit (1) (forward-driving in
4-quadrant mode)
150. 150. 150.
B042 Torque limit (2) (reverse-regenerat-
ing in 4-quadrant mode)
150. 150. 150.
B043 Torque limit (3) (reverse-driving in
4-quadrant mode)
150. 150. 150.
B044 Torque limit (4) (forward-regenerat-
ing in 4-quadrant mode)
150. 150. 150.
B045 Torque limit LADSTOP enable 00 00 00
B046 Reverse Run protection enable 00 00 00
B050 Controller deceleration and stop on
power loss
00 00 00
B051 DC bus voltage trigger level during
power loss
0.0 0.0 0.0
B052 Over-voltage threshold during power
loss
0.0 0.0 0.0
B053 Deceleration time setting during
power loss
1.00 1.00 1.00
B054 Initial output frequency decrease
during power loss
0.00 0.00 0.00
B080 [AM] terminal analog meter adjust-
ment
180 180 180
B081 [FM] terminal analog meter adjust-
ment
60 60 60
B082 Start frequency adjustment 0.50 0.50 0.50
B083 Carrier frequency setting 5.0 5.0 5.0
“B” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix C
C–9
B084 Initialization mode (parameters or
trip history)
00 00 00
B085 Country code for initialization 01 02 00
B086 Frequency scaling conversion factor 1.0 1.0 1.0
B087 STOP key enable 00 00 00
B088 Restart mode after FRS 00 00 00
B090 Dynamic braking usage ratio 0.0 0.0 0.0
B091 Stop mode selection 00 00 00
B092 Cooling fan control 00 00 00
B095 Dynamic braking control 00 00 00
B096 Dynamic braking activation level 360/720 360/720 360/720
B098 Thermistor for thermal protection
control
00 00 00
B099 Thermal protection level setting 3000. 3000. 3000.
B100 Free-setting V/f frequency (1) 0. 0. 0.
B101 Free-setting V/f voltage (1) 0.0 0.0 0.0
B102 Free-setting V/f frequency (2) 0. 0. 0.
B103 Free-setting V/f voltage (2) 0.0 0.0 0.0
B104 Free-setting V/f frequency (3) 0. 0. 0.
B105 Free-setting V/f voltage (3) 0.0 0.0 0.0
B106 Free-setting V/f frequency (4) 0. 0. 0.
B107 Free-setting V/f voltage (4) 0.0 0.0 0.0
B108 Free-setting V/f frequency (5) 0. 0. 0.
B109 Free-setting V/f voltage (5) 0.0 0.0 0.0
B110 Free-setting V/f frequency (6) 0. 0. 0.
B111 Free-setting V/f voltage (6) 0.0 0.0 0.0
B112 Free-setting V/f frequency (7) 0. 0. 0.
B113 Free-setting V/f voltage (7) 0.0 0.0 0.0
B120 Brake Control Enable 00 00 00
B121 Brake Wait Time for Release 0.00 0.00 0.00
B122 Brake Wait Time for Acceleration 0.00 0.00 0.00
B123 Brake Wait Time for Stopping 0.00 0.00 0.00
B124 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation 0.00 0.00 0.00
B125 Brake Release Frequency Setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
“B” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry
Appendix C
C–10
Intelligent
Terminal
Functions
B126 Brake Release Current Setting Rated current
for each
inverter
Rated current
for each
inverter
Rated current
for each
inverter
“B” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
“C” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
C001 Terminal [1] function 18 18 18
C002 Terminal [2] function 16 16 16
C003 Terminal [3] function 06 06 06
C004 Terminal [4] function 11 11 11
C005 Terminal [5] function 09 09 09
C006 Terminal [6] function 03 13 03
C007 Terminal [7] function 02 02 02
C008 Terminal [8] function 01 01 01
C011 Terminal [1] active state 00 00 00
C012 Terminal [2] active state 00 00 00
C013 Terminal [3] active state 00 00 00
C014 Terminal [4] active state 00 00 00
C015 Terminal [5] active state 00 00 00
C016 Terminal [6] active state 00 01 00
C017 Terminal (7) active state 00 00 00
C018 Terminal [8] active state 00 00 00
C019 Terminal [FW] active state 00 00 00
C021 Terminal [11] function 01 01 01
C022 Terminal [12] function 00 00 00
C023 Terminal [13] function 03 03 03
C024 Terminal [14] function 07 07 07
C025 Terminal [15] function 08 08 08
C026 Alarm relay terminal function 05 05 05
C027 [FM] signal selection 00 00 00
C028 [AM] signal selection 00 00 00
C029 [AMI] signal selection 00 00 00
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix C
C–11
C031 Terminal [11] active state 00 00 00
C032 Terminal [12] active state 00 00 00
C033 Terminal [13] active state 00 00 00
C034 Terminal [14] active state 00 00 00
C035 Terminal [15] active state 00 00 00
C036 Alarm relay active state 01 01 01
C040 Overload signal output mode 01 01 01
C041 Overload level setting Rated current
for each
inverter
Rated current
for each
inverter
Rated current
for each
inverter
C042 Frequency arrival setting for accel. 0.00 0.00 0.00
C043 Arrival frequency setting for decel. 0.00 0.00 0.00
C044 PID deviation level setting 3.0 3.0 3.0
C045 Frequency arrival setting for
acceleration (2)
0.00 0.00 0.00
C046 Frequency arrival setting for
deceleration (2)
0.00 0.00 0.00
C055 Over-torque (forward-driving) level
setting
100. 100. 100.
C056 Over-torque (reverse regenerating)
level setting
100. 100. 100.
C057 Over-torque (reverse driving) level
setting
100. 100. 100.
C058 Over-torque (forward regenerating)
level setting
100. 100. 100.
C061 Electronic thermal warning level
setting
80. 80. 80.
C062 Alarm code output 00 00 00
C063 Zero speed detection level 0.00 0.00 0.00
C070 Data command method 02 02 02
C071 Communication speed selection 04 04 04
C072 Node allocation 1. 1. 1.
C073 Communication data length selec-
tion
777
C074 Communication parity selection 00 00 00
C075 Communication stop bit selection 1 1 1
C078 Communication wait time 0. 0. 0.
C081 [O] input span calibration Factory set Factory set Factory set
“C” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry
Appendix C
C–12
C082 [OI] input span calibration Factory set Factory set Factory set
C083 [O2] input span calibration Factory set Factory set Factory set
C085 Thermistor input tuning 105.0 105.0 105.0
C086 [AM] terminal offset tuning 0.0 0.0 0.0
C087 [AMI] terminal meter tuning 80. 80. 80.
C088 [AMI] terminal offset tuning Factory set Factory set Factory set
C091 Debug mode enable 00 00 00 Do not
edit
C101 Up/Down memory mode selection 00 00 00
C102 Reset mode selection 00 00 00
C103 Restart mode after reset 00 00 00
C111 Overload setting (2) Rated current
for each
inverter model
Rated current
for each
inverter model
Rated current
for each
inverter model
C121 [O] input zero calibration Factory set Factory set Factory set
C122 [OI] input zero calibration Factory set Factory set Factory set
C123 [O2] input zero calibration Factory set Factory set Factory set
“C” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix C
C–13
Motor Constants
Functions
“H” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
H001 Auto-tuning Setting 00 00 00
H002 Motor data selection, 1st motor 00 00 00
H202 Motor data selection, 2nd motor 00 00 00
H003 Motor capacity, 1st motor Factory set Factory set Factory set
H203 Motor capacity, 2nd setting Factory set Factory set Factory set
H004 Motor poles setting, 1st motor 4 4 4
H204 Motor poles setting, 2nd motor 4 4 4
H005 Motor speed constant, 1st motor 1.590 1.590 1.590
H205 Motor speed constant, 2nd motor 1.590 1.590 1.590
H006 Motor stabilization constant, 1st
motor
100. 100. 100.
H206 Motor stabilization constant, 2nd
motor
100. 100. 100.
H306 Motor stabilization constant, 3rd
motor
100. 100. 100.
H20 Motor constant R1, 1st motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H220 Motor constant R1, 2nd motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H021 Motor constant R2, 1st motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H221 Motor constant R2, 2nd motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H022 Motor constant L, 1st motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H222 Motor constant L, 2nd motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H023 Motor constant Io According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H223 Motor constant Io, 2nd motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H024 Motor Constant J According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H224 Motor constant J, 2nd motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H030 Auto constant R1, 1st motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H230 Auto constant R1, 2nd motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry
Appendix C
C–14
H031 Auto constant R2, 1st motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H231 Auto constant R2, 2nd motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H032 Auto constant L, 1st motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H232 Auto constant L, 2nd motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H033 Auto constant Io, 1st motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H233 Auto constant Io, 2nd motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H034 Auto constant J, 1st motor According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H234 Auto constant J,
2nd motor
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
According to
inverter rating
H050 PI proportional gain for 1st motor 100.0 100.0 100.0
H250 PI proportional gain for 2nd motor 100.0 100.0 100.0
H051 PI integral gain for 1st motor 100.0 100.0 100.0
H251 PI integral gain for 2nd motor 100.0 100.0 100.0
H052 P proportional gain setting for 1st
motor
1.00 1.00 1.00
H252 P proportional gain setting for 2nd
motor
1.00 1.00 1.00
H060 Zero LV limit for 1st motor 100. 100. 100.
H260 Zero LV limit for 2nd motor 100. 100. 100.
H070 Terminal selection PI proportional
gain setting
100.0 100.0 100.0
H071 Terminal selection PI integral gain
setting
100.0 100.0 100.0
H072 Terminal selection P proportional
gain setting
1.00 1.00 1.00
“H” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix C
C–15
Expansion Card
Functions
“P” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
P001 Operation mode on expansion card 1
error
00 00 00
P002 Operation mode on expansion card 2
error
00 00 00
P010 Feedback option enable 00 00 00
P011 Encoder pulse-per-revolution (PPR)
setting
1024 1024 1024
P012 Control pulse setting 00 00 00
P013 Pulse line mode setting 00 00 00
P014 Home search stop position setting 0. 0. 0.
P015 Home search speed setting 5.00 5.00 5.00
P016 Home search direction setting 00 00 00
P017 Home search completion range
setting
555
P018 Home search completion delay time
setting
0.00 0.00 0.00
P019 Electronic gear set position selection 00 00 00
P020 Electronic gear ratio numerator
setting
1. 1. 1.
P021 Electronic gear ratio denominator
setting
1. 1. 1.
P022 Feed-forward gain setting 0.00 0.00 0.00
P023 Position loop gain setting 0.50 0.50 0.50
P025 Temperature compensation
thermistor enable
00 00 00
P026 Over-speed error detection level
setting
135.0 135.0 135.0
P027 Speed deviation error detection level
setting
7.50 7.50 7.50
P031 Accel/decel time input selection 00 00 00
P032 Positioning command input selec-
tion
00 00 00
P044 DeviceNet comm watchdog timer 01 01 01
P045 Inverter action on DeviceNet comm
error
21 21 21
P046 DeviceNet polled I/O: Output
instance number
71 71 71
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry
Appendix C
C–16
User-selectable
Menu Functions
P047 DeviceNet polled I/O: Input instance
number
01 01 01
P048 Inverter action on DeviceNet idle
mode
000
P049 Motor poles setting for RPM 01 01 01
“P” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
“P” Group Parameters Default Setting
User
Setting
Func.
Code Name -FE (Europe) -FU (USA) -FR (Japan)
U001
User-selected function...
“no” = disabled, or use any of the
functions D001 to P049
no no no
U002 no no no
U003 no no no
U004 no no no
U005 no no no
U006 no no no
U007 no no no
U008 no no no
U009 no no no
U010 no no no
U011 no no no
U012 no no no
CE–EMC
Installation
Guidelines
In This Appendix.... page
— CE–EMC Installation Guidelines....................................................... 2
— Hitachi EMC Recommendations....................................................... 4
D
CE–EMC Installation Guidelines
Appendix D
D–2
CE–EMC Installation Guidelines
You are required to satisfy the EMC directive (89/336/EEC) when using an SJ300 inverter in an
EU country. To satisfy the EMC directive and to comply with standard, follow the guidelines in
this section.
1. As user you must ensure that the HF (high frequency) impedance between adjustable
frequency inverter, filter, and ground is as small as possible.
• Ensure that the connections are metallic and have the largest possible contact areas (zinc-
plated mounting plates).
2. Avoid conductor loops that act like antennas, especially loops that encompass large
areas.
• Avoid unnecessary conductor loops.
• Avoid parallel arrangement of low-level signal wiring and power-carrying or noise-prone
conductors.
3. Use shielded wiring for the motor cable and all analog and digital control lines.
• Allow the effective shield area of these lines to remain as large as possible; i.e., do not
strip away the shield (screen) further away from the cable end than absolutely necessary.
• With integrated systems (for example, when the adjustable frequency inverter is commu-
nicating with some type of supervisory controller or host computer in the same control
cabinet and they are connected at the same PE-potential), connect the shields of the
control lines to ground + PE (protective earth) at both ends. With distributed systems (for
example the communicating supervisory controller or host computer is not in the same
control cabinet and there is a distance between the systems), we recommend connecting
the shield of the control lines only at the end connecting to the adjustable frequency
inverter. If possible, route the other end of the control lines directly to the cable entry
section of the supervisory controller or host computer. The shield conductor of the motor
cables always must connected to PE at both ends.
• To achieve a large area contact between shield and PE-potential, use a PG screw with a
metallic shell, or use a metallic mounting clip.
• Use only cable with braided, tinned copper mesh shield (type “CY”) with 85% coverage.
• The shielding continuity should not be broken at any point in the cable. If the use of
reactors, contactors, terminals, or safety switches in the motor output is necessary, the
unshielded section should be kept as short as possible.
• Some motors have a rubber gasket between terminal box and motor housing. Very often,
the terminal boxes, and particularly the threads for the metal PG screw connections, are
painted. Make sure there is always a good metallic connection between the shielding of
the motor cable, the metal PG screw connection, the terminal box, and the motor
housing. If necessary, carefully remove paint between conducting surfaces.
4. Take measures to minimize interference that is frequently coupled in through
installation cables.
• Separate interfering cables with 0.25m minimum from cables susceptible to interference.
A particularly critical point is laying parallel cables over longer distances. If two cables
intersect (one crosses over the other), the interference is smallest if they intersect at an
angle of 90°. Cables susceptible to interference should therefore only intersect motor
cables, intermediate circuit cables, or the wiring of a rheostat at right angles and never be
laid parallel to them over longer distances.
5. Minimize the distance between an interference source and an interference sink (inter-
ference-threatened device), thereby decreasing the effect of the emitted interference on
the interference sink.
• You should use only interference-free devices and maintain a minimum distance of
0.25 m from the adjustable frequency inverter.
SJ300 Inverter
Appendix D
D–3
6. Follow safety measures in the filter installation.
• Ensure that the protective earth terminal (PE) of the filter is properly connected to the PE
terminal of the adjustable frequency inverter. An HF ground connection via metal
contact between the housings of the filter and the adjustable frequency inverter, or solely
via cable shield, is not permitted as a protective conductor connection. The filter must be
solidly and permanently connected with the ground potential so as to preclude the danger
of electric shock upon touching the filter if a fault occurs.
To achieve a protective ground connection for the filter:
• Ground the filter with a conductor of at least 10 mm2 cross-sectional area.
• Connect a second grounding conductor, using a separate grounding terminal parallel to
the protective conductor. (The cross section of each single protective conductor terminal
must be sized for the required nominal load.)
PEL1 L2L3
SJ300 inverter with footprint-type filter SJ300 inverter with book-type filter
PEL1 L2L3 M
3~
M
3~
Hitachi EMC Recommendations
Appendix D
D–4
Hitachi EMC Recommendations
WARNING: This equipment should be installed, adjusted, and serviced by qualified personal
familiar with construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
Use the following checklist to ensure the inverter is within proper operating ranges and
conditions.
1. The power supply to SJ300 inverters must meet these specifications:
• Voltage fluctuation+/- 10% or less
• Voltage imbalance +/- 3% or less
• Frequency variation +/- 4% or less
• Voltage distortion THD = 10% or less
2. Installation measure:
• Use a filter designed for SJ300 inverter.
3. Wiring:
• Shielded wire (screened cable) is required for motor wiring, and the length must be less
than 50 meters.
• The carrier frequency setting must be less than 5 kHz to satisfy EMC requirements.
• Separate the power input and motor wiring from the signal/process circuit wiring.
4. Environmental conditions—when using a filter, follow these guidelines:
• Ambient temperature: –10 to 40 °C
• Humidity: 20 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
• Vibration: 5.9 m/sec2 (0.6 G) 10 ~ 55Hz, SJ300–004xxx to SJ300–220xxx
2.94 m/sec2 (0.3 G) 10 ~ 55Hz, SJ300–300xxx to SJ300–1500xxx
• Location: 1000 meters or less altitude, indoors (no corrosive gas or dust)
Index
A
A Group functions 3–9
AC reactors 5–3
Acceleration 1–15, 3–8
characteristic curves 3–26
second function 3–24
two-stage 4–19
Acceleration stop function 3–21
Access levels 3–5, 3–36, 4–25
Access to terminals 2–2
Accessories 5–2
Adaptive auto-tuning 4–69
Alarm signal 4–48
Algorithms 3–62
Algorithms, torque control 3–5
Ambient temperature 2–7, A–2
Analog input settings 3–11, 3–28
Analog inputs
current/voltage select 4–26
operation 4–59
sampling filter 4–59
wiring examples 4–61
Analog outputs
FM type 4–63
operation 4–62
PWM type 4–62
Analog signal calibration 3–60
Anti-windmilling 3–18, 3–21
Arrival frequency A–2
ASCII code table B–18
Automatic restart 3–29
Automatic voltage regulation 3–23
Auto-tuning 4–67, A–2
adaptive 4–69
procedure 4–68
Auto-tuning constants 3–62
AVR 3–23
B
B Group functions 3–29
Base frequency 2–26, A–2
Bibliography A–6
Block check code B–18
Brake control, external 3–46, 4–39, 4–58
Braking 1–15
dynamic 5–6
Braking resistor 2–5, A–2
Braking resistor selection 5–7, 5–9
Braking unit 2–5
Braking unit selection 5–8
Braking, dynamic 1–18
Break-away torque A–2
C
C Group functions 3–47
Capacitor life curve 6–12
Capacitor replacement 6–13
Carrier frequency 3–41, A–2
Catching a spinning motor 3–43, 3–61
CE approval A–2
CE-EMC guidelines D–2
Chassis ground connection 2–20
Choke 2–5, A–2
Choke, DC link 5–4
Chopper frequency 3–41
Clearance 2–7
Coasting 3–43, 3–61
Commercial power source switching 4–23
Communication test mode B–19
Communications 3–59
Communications protocol B–5
Communications, serial B–2
Constant torque 3–14
Constant volts/hertz operation 1–13
Control algorithms 3–14
Control gain switching 4–31
Controlled deceleration 3–40
Controlled deceleration at power loss 4–4
Cooling fan control 3–44
Copy Unit 1–3
Current overload 3–34
Current overload restriction 4–35
Index–2
D
D Group parameters 3–6
DC braking 4–16, 4–17, A–2
derating 3–19
settings 3–18
DC link A–2
choke 5–4
Deadband A–2
Deceleration 1–15, 3–8, 4–16
characteristic curves 3–26
second function 3–24
two-stage 4–19
Default parameter values C–2
Default settings
restoring 6–9
Derating
DC braking 3–19
Derating curves 1–11
Derivative gain 3–22
DeviceNet 5–5
Digital operator 2–23, 3–3
force operation 4–34
removal 2–4
Digital operator panel A–2
Digital operators 1–3
Dimensions
inverter 2–8
terminals 2–16
Diode A–3
Display restriction 3–37
Droop control 4–32
Duty cycle A–3
Dynamic braking 5–6, A–3
usage ratio 3–44, 5–6
E
Editing parameters 2–23, 2–26
in Run Mode 3–5, 3–36, 4–25
Electromagnetic compatibility D–2
Electronic thermal overload 3–30
Elevator braking 3–46
EMC installation guidelines D–2
EMC installation recommendations D–4
EMI A–3
EMI filter 5–4
Encoder feedback 3–16
Energy savings mode 3–23
Error
PID loop 4–47, A–3
Error codes
programming 3–68
trip events 6–5
Event clearing 4–27
Expansion bay 2–4
Expansion card functions 3–65
Expansion cards
digital input 5–5
encoder feedback 5–5
input signals 4–41
output signals 4–58
External brake control 4–39, 4–58
External trip 4–21
F
F Group functions 3–8
Factory settings, restoring 6–9
Fan default setting 3–44
Fan outlet 2–7, 2–20
Fan replacement 6–14
Fan unit, Filler plate 1–4
FAQ 1–17
Features 1–2, 2–2
Ferrite core 5–4
Filters
noise suppression 5–2
Fine-tuning functions 3–29
Force operation from digital operator 4–34
Forward run command 4–12
Four-quadrant operation A–3
Free-run stop 3–43, 3–61, 4–16, 4–20, A–3
Frequency arrival signals 4–44
Frequency matching 3–43, 3–61
Frequency setting A–3
Frequency-related functions 3–20
Frequently asked questions 1–17
Functions 1–15
Fuse ratings 2–14
Fuzzy logic accel/decel 3–23
G
Gain settings 4–31
Glossary of terms A–2
Grommets 2–13
H
H Group parameters 3–62
Harmonics A–3
History of trip events 3–7
Home search A–4
Horsepower A–3
SJ300 Inverter
Index–3
I
IGBT 1–13, A–3
test method 6–17
Index of terminal functions 4–10
Inertia A–3
Initialization 6–9
Input active range 3–28
Input circuits 4–11
Input terminals 2–18
Inspection
electrical measurements 6–15
IGBT test method 6–17
measurement techniques 6–16
procedures 6–10
unpacking 2–2
Installation 2–6
Instantaneous power failure 4–51
Insulation test 6–11
Integral gain 3–22
Intelligent input terminals 3–47, 4–11
Intelligent input wiring examples 4–11
Intelligent output terminals 3–53, 4–42
Intelligent terminal functions 3–47
Intelligent terminal index 4–10
Intelligent terminals A–3
Inverter 1–17
Inverter definition A–3
Inverter specifications 1–6
Isolation transformer A–4
J
Jog command 4–16
Jog frequency settings 3–13
Jogging operation A–4
Jump frequency 3–20, A–4
K
Keypad
features 2–23, 3–3
navigation 2–25, 3–4
navigation, trip events 6–8
Keypad features 2–23
Keypads 1–3, 3–2
L
LEDs 2–23, 3–3
Line reactor A–4
Linear accel/decel 3–26
Logic connector 4–9
Logic terminals 3–47, 3–53
input wiring examples 4–11
M
Main profile parameters 3–8
Maintenance procedures 6–10
Megger test 6–11
Model number convention 1–5
Momentum A–4
Monitor mode 2–25, 2–29, 2–30, 3–4
Monitoring functions 3–6
Motor constants 3–62, 4–65
auto-tuning 4–67
manual setting of 4–70
Motor load A–4
Motor poles 2–28
Motor selection 1–18
Motor wiring 2–20
Mounting location 2–6
Multiple motors
configuration 4–72
Multi-speed operation 4–13, A–4
Multi-speed profiles 1–15
Multi-speed settings 3–13
N
Nameplate 1–5
Navigational map 2–25, 3–4
trip events 6–8
NEC A–4
NEMA A–4
NEMA compliance 2–13
NEMA rating 2–7
Noise filters 5–2
AC reactor 2–5
Noise suppression 1–18
O
Open-collector outputs 4–42, A–4
Operational modes 3–5
Operator interfaces 1–3
Optimal accel/decel 3–23
Optional components 2–5
Options 1–2
Orientation A–4
Output circuits 4–42
Output deviation for PID control 4–47
Output frequency 3–8
Output overload 3–34
Output terminals 2–20
Over-current trip 3–29
Overload advance notice signal 4–46
Overload restriction 3–34, 4–35
Over-torque signal 4–50
Index–4
P
P Group functions 3–65
P/PI selection 4–31
Parameter editing 2–23, 2–26
Parameter settings tables C–2
Parameters 1–15
Phase loss 3–29
PID loop 1–18, A–4
clearing 4–30
error A–3
ON/OFF 4–30
operation 4–71
output deviation 4–47
process variable A–4
setpoint A–5
settings 3–22
PLC, connecting to 4–7
Poles 1–18
Poles of motor 2–28
Potentiometer 2–27, 4–61
Power factor A–4
Power failure 4–51
Power failure response 3–29
Power loss 4–4
Power loss response 3–40
Power source switching 4–23
Power-on time over signal 4–54
Powerup test 2–21
observations 2–30
Powerup, unattended start 4–22
Process variable A–4
Program mode 2–25, 2–30, 3–4
Programming device 3–2
Programming error codes 3–68
Programming error monitoring 3–7
Proportional gain 3–22
Pulse-width modulation 4–62
PWM A–4
R
Ratings label 1–5
Reactance A–5
Read/write copy unit 1–3, 3–2
Rectifier A–5
Reduced torque 3–14
Regenerative braking A–5
Regulation A–5
Regulatory agency approvals 1–5
Relay alarm contacts 4–48
Remote control 4–33
Removable components 1–4
Reset function 4–27
Reset Mode 3–61
Restart Mode 3–43, 3–61
Retention screws 2–4
Reverse run command 4–12
Reverse torque A–5
Reverse U-shape accel/decel 3–26
Rotor A–5
Run command 4–12
Run mode 2–30, 3–5
Run signal 4–43
Running the motor 2–29
Run-time edits 3–5, 3–36, 4–25
Run-time signal 4–54
S
Safety messages i
Saturation voltage A–5
Second motor 4–18
Sensorless vector control 3–14, 3–16, A–5
Serial communications 3–59, B–2
Serial communications protocol B–5
Set 2nd/3rd motors 4–18
Setpoint A–5
Sigmoid accel/decel 3–26
Single-phase power A–5
Sinking I/O 4–7
Slip A–5
Software lock 3–5, 3–36, 4–25
Sourcing I/O 4–7
Spare parts 6–12
Specifications
derating curves 1–11
general 1–9
logic signals 4–9
Speed control 1–13, 1–15, 4–13
Speed loop gains 4–31
Speed pot 2–27
Squirrel cage A–5
Standard functions 3–9
Start frequency A–5
Stator A–5
Stop command 4–12
Stop Mode 3–43
Supply wiring 2–18
Switching frequency 3–41
Symbol definitions i
System description 2–5
SJ300 Inverter
Index–5
T
Tachometer A–5
Technical support 1–xviii
Term definitions A–2
Terminal block 1–4
Terminal listing 4–10
Thermal overload 3–30
Thermal protection 4–28
Thermal switch A–6
Thermal warning 4–55
Thermistor A–6
Thermistor input 4–28, 4–55
Third motor 4–18
Three-phase power A–6
motor phase connections 1–14
Three-wire interface 4–29
Torque 1–13
Torque boost 3–16
Torque control algorithms 3–5, 3–14, 3–62
tuning 4–65
Torque limit 4–37
Torque limit signal 4–54
Torque specs, terminals 2–16
Torque, definition A–6
Transistor A–6
Trip events 3–7
clearing 6–5
definition A–6
error codes 6–5
external 4–21
history 6–8
monitoring 6–5
Trip history 6–8
Trip mode 4–27
Troubleshooting tips 6–3
Two-stage accel/decel 4–19
U
U Group functions 3–67
UL instructions xii
Unattended start protection 4–22
Under-voltage signal 4–51
Under-voltage trip 3–29
Unpacking 2–2
Up/Down functions 4–33
User-selectable menu functions 3–67
U-shape accel/decel 3–26
V
V/f control 3–14
V/f control setting 3–45
V/f free-setting 3–15
Variable torque 3–14
Variable-frequency drives
introduction 1–13
Velocity profile 1–15
Ventilation 2–7, 2–20
W
Warnings
operating procedures 4–3
Warranty 6–18
Watt loss A–6
Windmilling 3–18, 3–21
Wiring
analog inputs 4–61
gauge 2–14
intelligent input wiring examples 4–11
logic 2–20
logic connector 4–9
output 2–20
power input 2–18
preparation 2–13
serial communications B–3
system diagram 4–8
Z
Zero-phase reactor 5–4

Navigation menu